PF 3109 
.N3 
Copy 1 



li li^iiliniinli;; !i n ii r i. 



I II 



II III l!| ' 



inn 







jn 

lilli ! 



Hi. 



ifP'fii 



liil'ISiiiijIiiiiSiiiiHiriijii.,., .„ ,..„...,.. . 



■ IP 



{library of congress. I 

f [SMITHSONIAN DEPOSIT.] 

l UNITED STATES OE AMERICA. 



COMPLETE PRACTICAL GRAMMAR 



GERMAN LANGUAGE 



INCLUDING 



EXERCISES FOR BEGINNERS, 



FOR THE ADVANCED. 



BY 

THE REV. FR.NEEBE, PH. DR. 

OF THE UNIVERSITY OF MARBURG, 

CLERGYMAN OF THE GERMAN LUTHERAN CHURCH, 

GERMAN MASTER AT ST. PETER's-COLLEGE SCHOOL, EATON SQUARE, 

AND EXAMINER OF GERMAN AT THE COLLEGE OF PRECEFTORS. 



LONDON: 

WILLIAMS AND NORGATE, 14 HENEIETTA STREET 

DULAU AND CO., 37 SOHO SQUARE ; 

LONGMAN AND CO., PATERNOSTER ROW. 

EDMONSTON AND DOUGLAS, EDINBURGH. 



7 1847. 









LONDON I 
PRINTED BY WILLIAM WATTS, CROWN COURT, TEMPLE BAR. 



TO THE RIGHT HONOURABLE LORDS 
THE LORD ASHLEY, 

AND 

THE LORD SANDON, 

AS A PROOF OF THEIR LORDSHIPS' PATRONAGE OF THE LANGUAGE, 

AND 
AS AN ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF THEIR MANY KINDNESSES, 

THIS WO RK 

IS, BY PERMISSION, 

MOST RESPECTFULLY DEDICATED, 



BY 



THE AUTHOR 



LIST OF SUBSCRIBERS. 



To the Library of His Royal Highness Prince Albert, 

10 copies. 
His Serene Highness Prince Edward of Saxe Weimar. 
The Lord Ashley, 2 copies. 
The Lady Ashley, 2 copies. 
Honourable Antony Ashley. 
Honourable Francis Ashley. 
Honourable Maurice and Evelyn Ashley. 
Thomas Addison, M.D. 
George E. Anson, Esq. 
Honourable Mrs. Anson. 
M. Ancell, Esq. 
Thomas P. Anderson, Esq. 
C. J. B. Aldis, M.D. 
S. Ashwell, M.D., 2 copies. 

B. G. Babington, M.D. 

J. Gurney Barclay, Esq. 

Ford Barclay, Esq. 

Robert Barclay, Esq., 2 copies. 

F. Barlow, Esq. 

Lord Beaumont. 

William Bell, M.D. 

James Bell, Esq. 

Frederick Bird, M.D. 

Miss Booth. 

Colonel Bouverie. 

E. W. Brayley, jun., Esq. 

J. Bright, M.D. 

Richard Bright, M.D. 

Rev. M. Bright, B.D. 



LIST OF SUBSCRIBERS. 

Mrs. John Bringle. 
W. Bromet, M.D. 
Mrs. Mary Bryant. 
J. S. Buckingham, Esq. 
Edward Bullock, Esq. 

The Lord Canning. 

Viscountess Castlereagh. 

Edmund Coates, Esq., 5 copies. 

Sir James Clark, Bart., M.D., Physician to Her Majesty 

and His Royal Highness Prince Albert. 
Dr. Copland, F.R.S. 
The Lord Courtenay. 
The Lady Courtenay. 

The Hon. and Rev. C. L. Courtenay, Chaplain to the Queen. 
The Earl Cowper, 3 copies. 
P. Curie, M.D. 
Lord Colborne. 

Sir David Davies, M.D., Physician to Her Majesty the 

Queen Dowager. 
Henry Davies, M.D., 2 copies. 
William Devey, Esq. 
G. D. Dermott, Esq. 
The Lord Dudley De L'Isle, 3 copies. 
Harris Dunsford, M.D. 

The Right Honourable Colonel Darner, M.P., 4 copies. 
The Lord Bishop of Durham. 

The Lord Ebrington. 
Lady Ebrington. 
The Rev. John Evans. 
Str. E. Eyre, Esq. 

Edwin Fagg, Esq. 

R. Ferguson, M.D., F.L.S., Physician to Her Majesty. 

Lord Foly. 

Sir C. F. Forbes, M.D., K.C.H. 

John Forbes, M.D., F.R.S. 

The Earl Fortescue, 2 copies. 



LIST OF SUBSCRIBERS. 

Lady Fortescuc. 

Lady Eleanor Fortescue. 

Francis Fox, Esq. 

Thomas Fowler, Esq. 

The Honourable Mrs. Eraser. 

Thomas Fuller, Esq. 

Rev. J. D. Glennie. 

Richard Godson, Esq., Q.C., M.P. 

Richard Godson, jun., Esq., 2 copies 

J. R. Gower, Esq. 

Sir George Grey. 

Lady Grey. 

Honourable Lady Dowager Grey. 

The Lord Robert Grosvenor. 

Samuel Gurney, sen., Esq. 

G. Hadley, Esq. 

Rev. — Halford. 

Marshall Hall, M.D. 

The Duchess of Hamilton, 2 copies. 

Cornelius Hanbury, Esq. 

Edwin Harris, Esq. 

The Earl of Harrowby, 5 copies. 

John Hatchard and Son. 

Bisset Hawkins, M.D. 

H. Hay ward, Esq. 

Rev. R. H. Herschell. 

John Hill, Esq. 

Thomas Hodgkin, M.D. 

Mrs. Howes. 

S. B. Howlett, Esq. 

Rev. G. T. Hudson, A.M., Chaplain to Her Majesty the 

Queen Dowager, 2 copies. 
J. R. Hume, M.D., 2 copies. 
— Home, M.D. 

Sir Fitzroy Kelly, M.P., 3 copies. 

Rev. Ch. S. Kennaway, Trinity Chapel, Brighton. 

A. Klaftenberger, Esq. 



UST OF SUBSCRIBERS. 

C. Lang, M.D. 

R. G. Latham, M.D. 

J. Laurie, M.D. 

— Little, M.D. 
Edmund Lloyd, Esq. 

C. Locock, M.D., Physician to Her Majesty. 
R. W. S. Lutwidge, Esq., 2 copies. 

Rev. D. W. Marks. 

George Bellasis Masfen, Stafford. 

Ch. Massay, Esq. 

Daniel May, Esq. 

J. Moore, M.D. 

Mrs. Murray, Sudbury, Suffolk. 

John Murray, Esq. 

Robert Nairne, M.D. 
R. A. Nelson, Esq. 
Col. North, 2 copies 
Baroness North, 2 copies 
Charles Nottidge, Esq., 2 copies. 

B. F. Outram, M.D., F.R.S., F.S.A. 

The Lord Palmerston, 2 copies. 

— Parker, M.D. 

S. T. Partridge, M.D. 

R. B. Pennigton, Esq., 2 copies. 

G. J. Pennington, Esq. 

W. Pennington, Esq. 

Hon. Lt.-Col. Pennant, M.P., 2 copies. 

Fr. R. Philp, M.D. 

Lord Powlett. 

J. Pereira, M.D. 

B. W. Procter, Esq. 

J. Ridge, M.D. 

E. Rigby, M.D., F.L.S. 

Edward Robinson, Esq. 
Hamilton Roe, M.D. 

F. W. Rogers, Esq, 



LIST OF SUBSCRIBERS. 

Honourable Granville Ryder, M.P. 
The Lady Georgiana Ryder. 
Hon. Miss Ryder. 
Hon. Dudley Ryder. 
Hon. Henry Ryder. 
Mrs. Frederick Ryder. 

The Lord Sandon, 10 copies. 

The Lady Frances Sandon, 5 copies. 

John Sandilands, Esq. 

Captain Edward Saurin, R.N. 

Lady Mary Saurin. 

W. Gr. Saurin, Esq. 

Sir James South, 3 copies. 

E. J. Seymour, M.D., F.R.S. 
George Smyth, M.D. 

Rev. — Stratten. 

John Stewart, Esq., M.P. 

Alexander P. Stewart, M.D. 

Leonard Stewart, M.D. 

The Lord Dudley C. Stuart, 6 copies. 

Abel Stuart, M.D., 4 copies. 

Emily Dowager Lady Sunield, 2 copies. 

His Grace the Duke of Sutherland, 4 copies. 

Miss Sweet. 

Richard Thompson, Esq. 

F. E. Thompson, Esq. 

R. B. Todd, M.D., F.R.S. 

Thomas Turner, M.D., 2 copies. 

Rev. W. H. Turner. 

Rev. R. Walpole. 

T. J. Watson, Esq. LL.D., 4 copies. 

Thomas Watson, M.D. 

Mrs. Wilks, Nursling Rectory, near Southampton, 3 copies. 

James Williamson, Esq. 

C. W. Williams, M.D. 

James R. Wyatt, Esq., Tonbridge Wells, 4 copies. 

Mrs. James Wyatt, 3 copies. 

The Earl of Zetland. 



PREFACE. 



This work is the fruit of many months' labour, and it owes its 
appearance to kind friends whose names I have the honour to 
publish in the List of Subscribers. I have also been honoured 
with the signature of His Royal Highness Prince Albert, 
which shews that His Royal Highness has approved of my 
work. I am aware of the many deficiencies it will contain ; 
however no Grammar has yet appeared without them. 

As for the declension of nouns, I have followed the system 
of Eulenstein, the best yet adopted ; and to correspond to the 
wishes of many of my Pupils, I have added to the table of 
declension of nouns a complete declension of nouns with the 
adjective, the article, and without it, in order to shew to the 
Student at once the various terminations of nouns specified 
throughout the declension. The noun is variously exemplified 
by examples according to the principle of its declension ; and 
the adjective follows, with the degrees of comparison, in alpha- 
betical order. As soon as the Pupil is able to pronounce the 
single and compound letters with the article, he is to exercise 
the declension either orally or by writing. When this is ac- 
complished, he will be obliged to attend to the verb ; and, in 
consequence of that, to practise the exercises by writing, and 
by attending to the study of the parts of speech, systematically 
arranged, the nature of which is variously explained by ex- 
amples, both in the Etymology and Syntax. With immediate 
attention to reading and translation, the Student will soon be 
able to commence conversation. When the course of exercises 
is finished by writing, the Pupil should lay aside exercises alto- 
gether, and a well-informed Master should guide him farther 



11 PREFACE, 

by easy composition. I have avoided any passage of the Bible 
and of Authors as examples, as I do not approve of the correct- 
ness of the former and of the singularities of the latter. I re- 
commend reading the New Testament (Gospel of St. John) 
after a few lessons, which will be an introduction to easy litera- 
ture, and will shew the incorrectness and simplicity of the 
language ; yet it will be a guide how to distinguish the simila- 
rity of the English with the German. If the student be familiar 
with one of the Gospels, and any other easy work in connection 
with the Scripture, he will, after some exercise, be able to read 
the easier parts of an author, which is undoubtedly Schiller, 
recommended both for the elegance of his prose and poetry. 
According to this method I have even succeeded in teaching chil- 
dren to understand and speak the language after a few months' 
exercise. I abstain from specifying a time when a Student should 
be able to master the language, as the Pupil must be able to 
acquire the language, and the Master qualified to teach it. As 
for the practice of the language, the Pupil should read, translate 
(both from the German and the English), write, and also con- 
verse, in order to acquire the idioms by conversation. 

The author hopes that these suggestions will be acknowledged 
by those who really are anxious to acquire the language ; and 
trusts that it will be also a guide to those who are obliged to 
study without the help of a Master. 

Those distinguished and kind persons to whose families the 
author has had the honour of giving instruction will best reward 
him for his perseverance by their continued kind patronage. 

The author hopes, in conclusion, that this work may be con- 
sidered, not as a mere attempt to write a Grammar, but as a guide 
both to the public at large and to private establishments. 

FR. NEEBE. 

London, June 25th, 1847. 
7, Broadly Street, Blandford Square. 



CONTENTS. 



FIRST DIVISION.— ETYMOLOGY. 

PAGE 

§ 1. German Alphabet -------- l 

Compound Vowels and Diphthongs - - - - - 3 

Compound Consonants ------ 4 

§ 2. The Definite Article - - 5 

§ 3. The Indefinite Article 5 

§ 4. The Genders of Nouns - - 5 

The sense of Nouns is changed if the Article be changed - 7 

§5. Declension of Nouns --------8 

Table of the Declension of Nouns ----- 9 

§ 6. Examples of Nouns and Adjectives declined with the 

Articles - - - - - - - --10 

First Declension - - - - - - - 1 

Second Declension - - - - - - --14 

Third Declension - - - - - - -19 

Fourth Declension - - - - - - --21 

§ 7. Vocabularies of Nouns of the four Declensions - - - 23 
First Declension - - -, - - - --23 

Second Declension ------- 25 

Third Declension - - - - - - - - 27 

Fourth Declension 28 

j 8. Formation of Nouns - - 31 

Nouns compounded with other Words - - - 32 

Nouns compounded with Nouns - - - - - 33 

Parts of speech which may be used as Nouns - - - 34 
§ 9. Declension of proper names - - - - - - - 35 

§10. Formation of Adjectives ------- 37 

§11. Comparison of Adjectives - ------ 39 

The regular comparison - - - - - -39 

The irregular comparison - - - - - --40 

M 2. Vocabularies of Adjectives with their Degrees of Comparison, 41 — 49 



CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

§13. Adjectives declined with Nouns or Pronouns . 49 

With the Genitive - - - 49 

the Dative - - - 50 

the Accusative - - - - - - - 52 

Adjectives which differ in both languages - - - 52 

§ 14. The Numerals: 

The Cardinal Numbers - - - - - --53 

Observations on the Cardinals - 54 — 56 

The Ordinal Numbers - - - - - - - 56 

Numeral Pronouns - 57, 58 

§ ] 5. Pronouns : 

Personal Pronouns - - - - - - - - 59 

Conjunctive Possessive Pronouns - - - - - 6 1 

Absolute Possessive Pronouns - - - - - - 62 

Remarks on Absolute Possessive Pronouns 64 

Demonstrative Pronouns - - - - - - 64 

Relative Pronouns - 66 

Interrogative Pronouns - - - - - - - 68 

Indefinite Pronouns - - - - - - -69 

§16. Auxiliary Verbs of Tenses : 

Spabtn, to have 70 

©Ct)rt, to be ........ 72 

SJBcrben, to become 74 

§17. The Regular Active or Transitive Verb - - - - 75 

§18. Passive Voice - . ... 77 

§19. The Auxiliary Verbs of Mood: 

£a(Ten, to allow - - - 78 

SRuffett, to be obliged - - - - - - - 80 

©often, to be compelled - 81 

SBotten, to be willing ------- 82 

£)tttfen, to dare - - - - . - - - - 83 

$6nnen, to be able 85 

$K6gen, to like - 86 

§ 20. Irregular Verbs - - - - - - 87 

First Class - 88 

Second Class 88 

Third Class 92 

Fourth Class - - - - - 93 

Fifth Class 94 

Sixth Class --------- 97 

§ 21. Neuter or Intransitive Verbs 98 — 104 

§ 22. Reflective Verbs - - 104 

§ 23. Impersonal Verbs - - - - - - - - 105 



CONTENTS. 

PAGI 

§ 24. Compound Verbs: 

Compound Inseparable 100 

Compound Separable 107 

Compound Separable and Inseparable - - - - 109 

Double Compound Verbs 109 

Compounds Separable - - - - - - - 1 1 1 

Compounds Inseparable - - - - - - - 1 1 1 

Separable Verbs compounded with Adverbs - - - - 1 1 1 

Inseparable Verbs compounded with Nouns or Adjectives - 111 

§ 25. Adverbs - ........ 112 

Adverbs of Time - - - - - - - - 1 1 3 

Adverbs of Place - - - - - - - 114 

Adverbs of Number - - - - - - 1 15 

Adverbs of Qualification - - - - - 1 1 5 

Adverbs of Affirmation - - - - - --11 G 

Adverbs of Negation - - - - - - - 1 1 G 

Adverbs of Doubt - - 117 

Adverbs of Comparison - - - - - - - 1 1 7 

Adverbs compounded with Nouns - - - - - 1 1 8 

Adverbs derived from Adjectives 118 

Adverbs derived from Verbs - - - - - - 118 

§ 26. Prepositions : 

The Genitive 119—122 

The Dative 122 

The Accusative - - - 127 

The Dative and Accusative - 129 

Prepositions compounded with the Article - - - - 132 

with roeldSet .... 134 

with the Adverb ba - - - - 135 

with Prepositions - - - - 135 

List of all Prepositions - - - 136 

§ 27. Conjunctions - - 137—150 

§ 28. Interjections - - - - - - - - - 150 



SECOND DIVISION.— SYNTAX. 

§ 1 . The Article : 

The Definite Article is used - - - - - -152 

The Definite Article is not used - - - - - - 153 

The Indefinite Article is used - - - - - - 1 54 



CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

§ 2. The Cases : 

The Nominative - - - - . _ --154 

The Genitive - 155 

The Dative 161 

The Accusative - - - - - _ . -167 
§ 3. The use of the Verb - - - - - - - - ] 70 

Numbers and Persons - - - - - . -170 

Tenses : 

The Present - - - - 172 

The Imperfect ------__ 172 

The Perfect - 173 

The Pluperfect - - - - - - - -173 

Moods : 

The Indicative - - - 174 

The Subjunctive - -174 

The Conditional 176 

The Imperative 178 

The Infinitive - - - - - - - --179 

Participles : 

The Present - - - - - - - - - 183 

The Past - - - - 186 

The Future 188 

§4. The Construction of the German Language - - - - 189 
Principal sentences which do agree with the English - - 189 
Sentences which do not agree with the English - - - 190 
Dependent or subordinate Sentences - - - - 195 

Additional Remarks on Punctuation - - - - . 201 

The Comma - - - - - - - --201 

The Colon - - - - - -■ - - 203 

The Semicolon - - - - - - - - . 203 

Rules explaining the prefix £>et before Verbs - 204 

Verbs compounded with Prepositions and Adverbs - - - 206 

Exercises ----- 207 



FIRST DIVISION. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



GERMAN. 


ENGLISH 


21 a . . 


Aa . 


23 b . 


Bb . 



§ 1. GERMAN ALPHABET. 

l'RONUNCIATION. WORDS. 

ahy like garden . <&tab\, steel; 5B<u% choice. 

corresponds to the En- ^ 

glish, but almost it is / SSanb (bet) volume ; bt$, till ; 
pronounced like p at i Strieb, instinct ; Qyabe, gift. 
the end of words. . . . J 

Before e it is pronoun- 
ced as in English. 

_ , /- (Santor, clerk in a church; 

Sc ..Co ..tse, hkek when fol- \ ^^ C()mc< . ^ ^ 



lowed by ,,,0,11, ««.. ( m , iCasL 

tifor, censor 

(Snprefte, cypress; dafar, C<z?- 



x ., , . « r (£enfor, censor; (Sitvone, lemon 

Like te before e, t, t) ; ae, ) «. -. a*r n 

, t f . ' ys < (Snprefie, cypress; (£a\at, G<z 

oe (a, u) I „.,..,, 7 ., 

I. sar ; (Jultbat, celibacy. 

D b . D d . . <fc, as in English j ^ g^ w . ^ unb> rf . ^ 

stronger at the end \ becomes , 

before a consonant . J 

Sfyeben, to lift ; jkeben, to endea- 
vour ; mben, to weave. 

. i fetf)ten, to fight; forbetn, to de- 
ls f • F f . .*/, as in English J ^^ . ^ mo ^ 

© 9 . . G g . . #e, like g in game ; as, gotten, to fo worth; gegeben, ey&ew. 
like g in </«me, as, (Sprung, jumping; Rin^, ri?ig. 
at the beginning of * 

words or syllables, 
and at the end. 
At the end, after e, et, £ 'JBeg, road; jSroetg, twig ; arg, 
or r, like <fy I wicked; Aug, clever. 

After r or n it has a ( mM 9 { "' *»*wm»i», «"*". 

nasal sound ) cam '' b ""3° n ' '° P™ 5 " i «"• 

v gen, to sing. 



2 ETYMOLOGY. 

GERMAN. ENGLISH. PRONUNCIATION. WORDS. 

§ \) .. Hh . . hah, at the beginning of ^ ipafen, harbour; S?of, yard; 

words or syllables as \ fTe(;cn, to implore; brefyen, to 

in English ) turn. 

In the middle, or at the x 

end, it is mute after I tyun, to do; £f>cm, dew; gtyein, 

t or r, but lengthens | Rhine. 

the syllables ' 

3 i .. Ii ..e, as in English i in ( ^"i» *° him > M>, ^ee; ftc3^>, 

&i?z I Atwwfl^. 

f jung, young; 3orf>, yo&e; 3u= 
3) .. Jj .. yo*, like y in year.... | bd> TO tr*A. 

_ ', , . _ .. . . C Settc, chain; Slaw, complaint; 

St K k . kah, as m English, but \ s ^ . ^ knee; $ ntA 

is never mute ( man% , ^^ ^ 

T , ,_ . „ ,. . C £a$S, salmon; £ob, praise; 

%{ ..LI ..cZ, as in English...... | ^ ^ 

^ ,, , n v i f ^««t, mark; #Rontag, Jf<m- 

5JJI m . . M m . . em, as in English \ 7 ^ : 

& ( day; sjftutfy, courage. 

^ n . . N n . . erc, as in English nafye,wear; nm,only; neun, nine. 

^ „ , . ■ ,. , c Obft, fruit; ob<x,or; Obr, car; 

O o . . O o . . 6, as in English J L J e '•#' 

' o i Dpfet, sacrifice. 

p , . ' '"' . ■ r ^ad>t, lease ; tyalme, palm-tree; 

" ^ " V ■ 1 > & * ^urput, purple. 

^ ~ . • -n t i r £Uialm, steam; queer, cross; 

C a . . Q q . . to, as in English .... J ^ „ . J 

^ & | Uuefte, spring oj water. 

cvj -d , • -c- t i r3tob,wteZ; vein, clean; 9uttet, 

3ft t ,.Kr . cr, as m English J ir • u 

© f . . S s . . cs, as in English ©anb, sand; fagte, said. 

jj or $ . . sz ors . . es, at the end of words C fag, sa£; f#icf>, comprehensible; 
or syllables | ©cms, tf/oosc. 

fct .. Tt .. tSh, as in English 5 * afcl > &oar ^* *<**, taUom ; 

I Zeis, day. 

Like ts before <tb». ... { @tation > *ta«*o»; Nation, «Z/ow- 
{ ance. 

U u . . U u . . oo, as in English ( um ahout > Umfrei-5, circumfe- 

\ rence. 
93 » . . V v ./ow, as in English, like/ i" ^eUrf>en, woZe*; <8olf, ^eo^?/c; 

( 93iottne, violin. 
2B m . . W w . . ve, as in veil ( SGBett, worZo 7 ; mo, w&cre; SBetF, 

I worAr. 



ETYMOLOGY. g 

GERMAN. ENGLISH. PRONUNCIATION. WORDS. 

I jr . . X x . . ttf, as in six ( Santippe, shrew; j?ere, witch; 

I 2Irt, axe. 

9 9 . . Y y . . ^>s^7<w, like 3/ in s*/raod £ ®t>nobe, synod; fcafyfu*, da£- 

3 j . . Z z . . tset } like fe J B«I?n, foo^A; jart, tender; jeU 

( gen, to s^ew ; Boll, e'wcA. 

The following Vowels form compound Vowels and Diphthongs. 
«, e, i, ( tt ), 0, u. 

COMPOUND VOWELS. 
GERMAN. ENGLISH. PRONUNCIATION. WORDS. 

2le d . . Ae ae (d) . as a in share We^ve, ear of grain; JDcU 

ne, Dane; tfrdfoe, 
crow. 

Oe 6 . . Oe oe (6) . . as ew in the French fewr . . . .ftoren, to disturb ; @e= 

(their) \)h,heari7ig; £6rper, 

Ue u . . Ue ue (u) . . as u in the French put $uf)l, coa/; 2Runse, 

(was able) coin; nutter n, sober. 

DIPHTHONGS. 

2ut au . . Au au . . as ou in mouse 9)iau$, mouse ; auf , 

^joora; 2auf, course. 
(£i ei . . Ei ei ) . r9\eiru>it, purity; brci, 

€9 «9 . . Ey ey ) as y m by > my \ three; met), abbey. 

$U at . . Ai ai ) broader than the former, as eye f Richer, guager; 33atjer, 
2fy at) . . Ay ay j OHuge) v Bavarian. 

ie . . ie . . like ee in seed Suege, ,/%/,* trie, Aow ; 

(<Saar) me, never. 

(£u eu . . Eu eu . . like oi in void (Surer, udder; 23eure, 

(ungu(ttg) booty; fjcute, to-day. 

5leu eu . . Aeu aeu (du). . broader than the former, as toy. . 35tdutigam, &Wc?e- 

groom; 25ducrin, 
cox 



4- ETYMOLOGY. 

GERMAN. ENGLISH. PRONOUNCIATION. WORDS. 

COMPOUND CONSONANTS. 

!(£fyao$, chaos; Qfyorat, 
choral song; (£ko= 
trt, chronicle; H&, 
linx. 
'(%$&* yacht; debt, ge- 
but as a guttural in yacht . . < nuine; ad), ah; £>aucb, 

t breath; id), i". 
/fd)einen, to shine; fd)0= 

6«ft.. Schsch .. like Min English { ^tospare; mUn, 

\ to harm; <S$aum, 
^ foam. 

Scb . . sch . . S before d> is oronounced sepa- \ , ' , , 

rately,as i **' W«u«*«»oww 

v mouse. 

Gt ft . • St st . . as in «tofid |^ en ' < osW >* ftctn 

©pfp 
Vfpf 

& 

IT 



stone; fhtmm,<£ttm&. 

Sp sp . . as in Spain, speak ©pemten, fprecfjen. 

p f f (^fwni>» pound; yfeil, 

^ I arrow; ^pftopf, cork. 

Ph ph . . like fin Pharisee, physical . . . ^arifder; pWfcf). 
tz . . stronger than ts f as in czar. . . . gaar; Jptfce, &ea£; nufje, 

ss . . is only used in the middle of ( fyaffen, to hate; fafien, 
words 1 #o seize. 

sz . . is only used atthe end of words C gtofj, large; gtdgftcb, 

or syllables ( frightful. 

Some Germans pronounce f before t and p as sh ; but & is neither correct 
nor elegant. 

Two similar compound vowels lengthen syllables or words; as, act, ee, oo; 
5tal, eel; ©eete, soul; 23oot, boat. 

Two similar compound consonants shorten syllables or words ; as, cf, ff, 
mm, nn, pp, tr, 99, tt ; 3iotf, coat; [cutoff, rugged; frumm, crooked; sjRann, 
man; fnapp, close; ffart, staring; Stacjgc, flag; rtett, neat; fett, fat. 

The compound consonants fch, $, and fj must never be separated in 
writing; as, menfefcucf), human; 9ftu§=en, caps; Wufi, nut; Plural, ^uf^fe nuts. 



ETYMOLOGY. ) 

§ 2. THE DEFINITE ARTICLE 

compared with the Demonstrative Pronoun that, bcr, bie, bat. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Masculine. Fern. Neuter. 

N. bet, bcr, bie,bie, bctf, ba$, the, that. N. bic, bie, the, those 

G. beS,beffen, ber, beren, beS, beffen, of the, of that. G. ber, bercn, of the, of those 

D. bem, bem, ber, bcr, bcm, bem, to the, to that. D. ben, bencn, to the, to those 

A. ben, ben, bie, bie, ba$, ba$, the, that. A. bie, bie, the, those 

The Pronouns: ifyr, her, their ; unfer, our; euer, your; 3f>t, your; 
biefer, this ; jener, that ; roelcher, which, who ; jeber, each ; are, 
declined like the Definite Article. 



§ 4. THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE 

compared with the Conjunctive Possesive Pronoun my, mem, 
meine, mein. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 
N. ein, mein, eine, meine, ein, mein, a, my. N. meine, my. 

G. eineS, meineS, einer, meiner, eineS meineS, of a, of my. G. meiner, of my. 
D. einem, meinem, einer, meiner, einem, meinem, to a, to my. D. meinen, to my. 
A. einen, meinen, eine, meine, ein, mein, a, my. A. meine, my. 



§ 4. THE GENDERS OF NOUNS. 
A. Masculines. 

GENERAL RULE: 

a. The names of winds, seasons, months and days, also those 
of rivers, are masculine, except bie SBofga, Wolga ; bie 
©cfyefbe, Scheld ; bie Ober, Oder, and others. 

o. Nouns which end in rid>, ling, cmt, as, 5Butf)ertd), Tyrant, 
Studying, fugitive, (Jomebiant, performer, are masculine. 

The rest are declined as in English, and applied in the same way. 



D GENDER OF NOUNS. 

• B. Feminities. 

GENERAL RULE : 

a. Names of women, or Nouns referring to them, are feminine, 
except bat $rduletn, a young lady of rank; bat Srauen-- 
jtmmer, a gentlewoman, married or not ; bat 3Betb, the wife; 
bat $Kdbd)en, the girl. 

b. Those which end in e, ei, ew, fyett, in, inn, kit, fcfyaft, ung, an), 
un?, are feminine ; as, bic 25tume, the flower ; bie Stdnbelct, 
playfulness; bie 9Ibtct), the Abbey ; bic Rofyeit, rudeness; 
bte ©drtncrin, the gardner's wife; bic $aifertnn, the Empress; 
bic ©rdftnn, the Countess; bic 23ttterfett, bitterness; bic 5einb= 
fcpafr, enmity ; bic £>offnung, hope; bte Spmafy, the marriage; 
bic %mun), poverty; except bet $nabe, the boy; bat @c= 
fd)tct, the wise; bcr $3anfe(mutf), inconstancy; bet £ef= 
benmutf), heroism. 

C. Neuters. 

GENERAL RULE : 

a. The names of metals, countries, and localities, are neuter; as, 
bat @olb, (the) gold; bat ncrbttcbe £>eutfd)lanb, the north of 
Germany; bat freimbltcfte ^ftannfyetm, the friendly-looking 
Mannheim; except bet <&taty, (the) steel; bcr Xombad, pinch- 
beck; bcr ^in!, zinc; bic ^lanna, platina; bte ©cf)roeis, Switzer- 
land; bic ^falj, Palatinate ; bic £cmfi$, Lausatia; bic £urfet, 
Turkey ; and all in ci are feminine. 

b. All words beginning with @c, as bat ©eprdge, the coinage, 
&c, are neuter. 

c. All ending in d>en, letn, and tfyum, as bat 23ruberd?en, the little 
brother; bat ^ndbtein, the little boy; bat jpetbentf>um, Hea- 
thenism, are neuter, except bcr SKetcf>tf?um, wealth. 

d. Those formed from Infinitives, as, bat Saufen, the run, 
running, and letters of the alphabet, as bat @, the G, bat 
*B, the V, are neuter. 

In compound Nouns the gender of the last is used, as bcr $elb= 
marfdjatt, Fieldmarshal. 

The sense of the following Nouns is changed if the Articles be 
changed; as, 

£)er 35anb, the volume ; bat 23anb, the ribband, tie. 



GENDER OF NOUNS. 7 

£>et ^ucfet, the back, hump; bie "Sudd, an ornament of metal for 

horses' necks. 
£)er S5unb, the confederacy; bat s £unb, the bundle. 
£er Qtfyor, the chorus; bat Gfyor, the choir. 
£>er (£rbe, the heir; bat (£rbe, the inheritance. 
£>et ©etfH, the hostage; bic @ei$ef, the whip, scourge; 
£et jpafr, the hold, clasp; bie Spaft, the imprisonment; ba$ jpaft, the 

name of an insect. 
£et £ar$, the Hercynian forest; bat Jipatj, rosin. 
£>er Jgeibe, the heathen ; bie jpctbe, the heath. 
2)cr jput, the hat ; bie jjut, the guard, the pasture. 
£)er liefer, the jawbone ; bie liefer, the pine-tree. 
2)et $unbe, the customer; bie $unbe, intelligence. 
2>et better, the guide ; bie better, the ladder. 
£)et Sofyn, the reward ; bat Sofyn, the wages. 
2>ie Wanbel, the almond ; bat 9ftanbef, a number of 15. 
£>ie SDtatf , the boundary, 8 ounces of silver ; bat tylaxt, the marrow. 
£>er 9)?afr, the mast of a ship ; bie 9ftaft, the fattening of pigs or cattle. 
£>et 9ttenfd), the human being; bat 9ftenfd), the wench. 
£)er 5^e(fer, the surveyor ; bat 2ftefiet, the knife. 
£>er Dfym (Ofjeim), the uncle ; bie Ofym (^m), the awm, awme (a 

measure of two pails.) 
£)et ©tfxuier, shivering, horror ; £)a$ ©djauer, the shelter, a shower 

of rain. 
£)et ©c^)i(b, the shield ; bat <&<$)i\b, the ensign. 
£)er ©cfmwlfl, a bombastic style ; bie ©cbroulft (©efcbroutft), the swelling. 
£et @ee, the lake ; bie ©ee (bat ^eer), the sea. 
£)et ©profle, the sprout, shoot ; bie ©ptofie, the step of a ladder. 
£>ie ©teuer, tax, contribution ; bat ©teuer, the helm, rudder. 
£)er ©tift, a piece of wire, brass, or lead ; bat ©tift, monastery, 

convent. 
£>er £f>etf , a part of the whole ; bat &f>eil, the share, portion. 
£)et £f)0t, a foolish person ; bat Xfyox, the gate. 
£)et 33erbien|t, earnings, income ; bat SSetbienft, the merit. 
2)te 3£ef>r, defence ; bat 3Bef>r, the dyke. 
£>er ^eug, stuff, materials ; bat 3eug, tools. 



( 8 ) 
§ 5. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 

Nouns are declined in four ways, according to their endings in 
the genitive singular. 

The singular of the first declension undergoes no change, all the 
cases being like the nominative. 

The second declension takes g in the genitive. 

The third declension takes n or en, eng or ng, in the genitive, and 
all the other cases end in en. 

The genitive singular of the fourth declension is formed by the 
addition of eg to the nominative, and the dative by the addition 
of e. This e, however, in some words, is omitted both in the 
genitive and dative. 

FORMS OF THE CASES. 

Singular. 

The nominative points out the declension, gender, and ending of 
the Noun. 

The genitive ends in g (second declension) ; n, en, ng, eng (third 
declension) ; eg or g (fourth declension) ; or it remains like the 
nominative (feminines only remain so). 

The dative ends in n or en (third declension), and in e (fourth 
declension), or it remains like the nominative. 

The accusative ends in en or n (third declension), or it remains 
like the nominative. 

Plural. 

The nominative ends in et, en, ec ; chen, (etn ; e ; at or or ; n ; and 
in en (second declension) ; in en or n (third declension) ; in e or et 
(fourth declension). 

The genitive remains like the nominative, or it is like the nomi- 
native singular. 

The dative ends always in n or en (first declension) ; eln, en, or 
em (second declension) ; n or en (third declension) ; en or em 
(fourth declension). 

The accusative ends like the nominative plural or singular. 

The vocatives are the same as the nominatives. 



FORMATION OF CASES. 



[. FEMININES. 



Sing. 


Plural. 


N. 

G. 

D. 


n, e, en. 


> > • 
— , it, — . 


A. 


j > • 



This declension 
is entirely femi- 
nine. 

The nominative 
singularis the same 
as the other cases. 

The plural is 
formed by the ad- 
dition of n when 
the singular ends 
in e, et, er, ie, oe,ce, 
fe, ffe ; except £orf)= 
tcr (pi o), Gutter 
(pi u). 

Monosyllables 
ending in a conso- 
nant form their 
plural by the ad- 
dition of e, and 
change a, o, u into 
d, 6, u(au is changed 
into du) ; except 
some which form 
their plural in en, 
and those which 
end in et (ey) } fyeit, 
in, inn, feir, fcfyaft, 
una,, ur, atfy, nifj, 
which form their 
plural with en. 



II. MASCULINES 
AND NEUTERS. 



Sing. 

N. 

G. g 

D. 

A. 



Plural. 
— , en, n. 
— , en, n. 

n, en, n. 
— , en, n. 



Masculines and 
neuters in el, en, et. 

Diminutives in 
chen or letn are 
neuter. 

Neuters in e. 

Masculines in 
ur or or. 

The above suffer 
no change in the 
plural. 

The following 
change a, o, u, into 
d, 6, u. 

Those which take 
n in the plural 
(neuters or mascu- 
lines). 

Those which take 
en in the plural 
(masculines). 



III. MA8CULINES. 

Sing. I Plural. 
n. — , — I n, en. 
g. n, en — , — . 
d. n, en: — , — . 
a. n, en, — , — . 



Masculines in e 
take n in the geni- 
tive and all the 
other cases. 

The following 
words are excep- 
tions, and take nS 
in the genitive, and 
en in the dative, 
which is continued 
through all the 
cases. 

All masculines 
(except ^atfaft, pa- 
lace, fourth declen- 
sion, and a few 
others) in ij?, ant, 
aft, et, pij?, it, ar, 
pf>, ent, 09, at, om, 
are taken from the 
Latin and Greek, 
and form their va- 
rious cases in en. 

German words 
in dr, fc, af, I5, lb, 
rr, frf), form all 
their cases in en. 

One neuter, ^etj, 
heart, belongs to 
this declension, and 
is irregular. It 
forms its genitive 
with ens. 



v. masculines 
and neuters. 



Sing. 

N. , - 

g. etf, 
d. e, - 

A. , " 



Plural. 
e, er. 

n, n. 



Words which are 
not mentioned in 
the preceding de- 
clensions belong to 
this declension. 

Their termina- 
tions in the plural 
are e or er. 

Masculines in e. 

Neuters in e. 

Masculines in er. 

Neuters in er. 

Most of them 
change a, 0, u, into 
a, 6, u (compare 
the first and se- 
cond declensions). 

The following 
examples have the 
same terminations, 
and occur in the 
same order as those 
given in this table 
of the four declen- 
sions. 



10 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 



w 




c« 












































c 


















^ 




CD 


















H 






















P 




P 


















53 




hi 


















M 




3 










CO 












<8 

3 






CO 

O 




CD 
O 








H 




-t-3 






ni 
































i— i 




o 

3 




1 — " 


n3 
| 

CD 




'a 




co 

•rH 


co 

CU 




E 




cd 

5 






^3 




a 


CO 


CU 


C8 


p 




3 










c 


CD 


O 


w 




bo 

a 






s£ 




^ : : 


; Ph 


CO 

cT 

^» 

-»■••• 

t h> 


P 





<1 


hi 
o 
o 

cS 

a 
o 
53 
fco 







<3 

E 

h» 




-S ! '. 
*> * c 

.s 




co 

cT 
h< 

■!§'■• 


O 

^ h. c 




g 


53 


.2 
'a 


CD 





^ 


h» CJ 

vr=» ^O ^O 






S 


a> h» C 
A /J va ^> 


.5 


3 


H 

§ 


13 

CD 



w 
















a 


«W 
















p 


O 




P 
















0Q 


ffl 


H 
















W 


H 




DO 

M 
















1 




CD 

s 
















i-s 

p 




V3 
bp 

'h 






<u 

> 












p 
























fc 




c3 






nS 




M 








^ 




22 






T3 













P 

O 




c8 




S3 

1^ 




rP 




^2 

a 

CO 




^ 
£» 


CU 



Is 


53 




ho 

a 




iS 


^i-3 




a3 


cu 


1h 

G3 ' 

CU 


Si 

n3 


O 

CO 

W 




"5b 

O 

CD 
O 

u, 

hi 

3 

P< 

a> 

-a 
+3 






3 

s 






.S 

* w 


! 4^ 


• BO 

h> h> 




U • 2J 


c3 

c • 

3 • • • 

*» ^ ** . 

S 






!_, 








<>> .21 




2 






CO 




O 






!/0 


jO vO 


'0 


^ a * ^ 


«» 



^Ofi^ ^Ofl<1 ^Ofi^ ^Ofi^ ^OP^ 



FIRST DECLENSION. 1 I 







P 














03 














o 














<u 




OD 










-3 




a 








to 


o 




1 








T3 


S 




CO 








-a 


a 




3 
o 








OD 


o 












o 
5 
id 


o 


1 


13 








§ 

a 


CO 

r bJ0 


Oh 

o 
a. 

.2 




O 




.5 


c 


. £ 


• 


e 


s 






-*j 


hfc '. '. 


cd 






£ 


CD 

W3 


o 


: ^ 


: -5 fi 






"a 


<d 


£5 ' ' 


at 

.5 




at 




? 


<x» 

S * ■ 


■Si 

c '. '. 

& . . 

at 


"at 

• £ : : 
at 

at 


at 
o 


'at ) | 

o 

• * - * 


aT 

S3 



yi> y^ -o ^o S A /> A A 



H 

0Q 

PS 

I 

c 

■S I d 

* 1 6 

C ^ *- 

^ 2 !=! ,0 

§ I i 1 -s 

§ I i §< 2 

j-» * *S ™ o 

at n **■* aa 

J ^ e e a> c c g • • • A 

* * :• 3 ■•■?:■:: f 



^t • • • s= c 

a> « C 

(i> at • • • <J) o 

fc» Vt vO Jj l-> ^O 



£OQ^ £OQ«1 ^Ofl<j £OA^ £OQ^ fcOQ^ 



12 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 



Plural. 
le happy 








B 
O 

■(J 




to 
O 




c3 






<2 
1 

CD 

CO 




© 

-<H> 












?H 




03 




o 






O 




O 




3 




3 


; 


03 
C3- 


3 


Sh 




© 

PS 

4H> 

3 

3> . 

j-> 

3 

: & • 






-l-a 
3 




3 




3 








3 
£5 




CO 


3 


; 




3 
o 

3 








*3> 


• 




• 


<3 


3 




c 


3 
^3 






*> • 

3 

C » 3 


• *9 


3 




u 


3 


e* 


J-> 








! .2* S 


3 


cj 


3 




3 




^> 


VO 


v_» 


S-) 








v=> ^o 


jO 


jO 


'" 




sO 





© 






























T3 






























*Sh 






























pO 






























^ 






-»j 








. 












© 




. Oh 
^ Oh 






CO 








© 






g 






-»H> 

o3 




3,3 

s 






fcJD 






*© 


3 

o 






<2 






o 




s -5 






2 






O 


T3 

I— H 






1 








3 
<3 






CO 

03 






-3 

Oh 
Sh 


o 
a 






O 
03 






3 




s-» 




. 


e£ 






03 








£ 

o 

3 
o 
3 






<_r 




1 


3 


3 


3 
3 

-2 


3 


3 


• .a 

CO 

■ eg ; ; 


35 

3 

: & 


3 


3 


3 


3 


3 

^ : 
: ® " 

35 


SH 


"co 








u 


s-» 




3 








S-> 


s-> 






^ 


j-> 


• .° 


3 






3 


Si 


ru> 


• -Si 


o 
3 






J2 ' 




^> 


^o 


• ^ 


«i> 






^ 


vO 


• jO 


s> 






3 





£ o a «i ^on^ & Q «1 ^Ofl<^ ^Ofl<l *OC\< 



FIRST DECLENSION. 13 





























































"■*-» 


























'3 






CO 




















e3 






c 














CO 






f> 






CD 








CO 






In 






o 

* 

1 

'I 

c 


DO 

h-3 




d 
1 








CO 

1 


00 

"8 

a 

Oh 




I 






CO 












s 

o 




T3 

C 

•a 

-5 






1 

Oh 

CO 

d 
O 

t-c 




o 

Oh 
CD 

C 

o» 
C 








1 


1 

CD 

o 




c 






o 


Oh 




c 








<j) ! 


C 




^» 






»o 






<S> 










.22 




*-> 






64 

ft! 


g 












Via. . 


<3 










«e ; • 


o 




c 








*> 


i=j | 




£o 






i*"f 


"c 


• 


o 








s • 


, , .y* 




c 






o • • 






<3"> 








,^> 


® M ! 










e 


«o 


c: 


£ 










ES 








e 






o 
lo 


*-> 




Lo 


JO 

c 

<3 


3 















G 






















d 












bJD 






>^ 








. 






o 

^d 

CO 

CO 






i 

> 




O 1 






CO 

CO 
13 

s 


d 

Oh 




1 








■9 


Ph 

0> 






CD 
CO 


s 

O 




h3 

d 






8 

C3 


1 

Oh 

GO 


o 

Oh 
03 






1 

t-t 


1 




c3 








-d 


+j 






03 


<3 
cu 




CD 
6 






S-> * 

o 


d 

; p 








<S3 


■a 












c 

£ 
o 


^5 






V£l 


£3 ) 




fco 


c 


C 


^S" 




.S 5 


C 


ss 


o C ^ 












a • • 

J-> S-> 


: © 


£ 




J 1 


o w « 




i-* 


^ 
^ 






.5 






jO 




.5 


3 

• £ 





^OQ< &OQ < !2;Ofi^ ^Ofl<J ^On<ti >z;OQ«i 



14 DECLENSIONS OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 



CO CO 

ss b 



8 I 1 



w 



_j 



_ * 2 a s a 

§>...§ § s • • £ 

§ • • • 3 • • • £ & : : : « 

>s • • • -g • • • ™ C rB 



8 



• • I : : : t • , • §■ 

** .. _ _* : : : .1 



c 6* 



£ • • • «- 2 

.^ s s .s : : : s * • ' -2 S S .si 2 

>o v/o >o a C «*— -Xi ./_ vo >d £; 

. O 

w 
fi 

Q 

K 

o 

<X> co W 

CO CP 05 

I 

& Is 

.E CO 

<L> B 





<x> 




K 




w 




>-» 








r^ 




o> 




O) 




► 


Sn 


0> 


s 




fcj 


1 <3> 


£ 


e 


bQ 


3 



^ 



.Si « 



2 » 

B bJD 

rt B 



W 






I ' • • £ 



s : : 


: ^ 

__N 






_> 

£ • • 


8 

CD 



?« 



tioti< £6c\< ^6q< ^dfi^ ^ o a ^ 



SECOND DECLENSION. 15 



2 ^ ^ £ 

S s l I I 2 

I * -a ~ * a 

ef £ ^ e ^ • ! ! P ** 

s • • • «r •&•:•- r • - » 



- "g . . . •« 

2 g • • S3 

4 19 



•e • . . & : : : ® 

s • « . . . 5 

»Q» • • • C* va 



*& : : : s : : : .2 s S .2 ^ : : : « • • • .2 £ 



Hi) 
2 3 "- 

I I I 4 s 

5 -a - !s j 



c 



I : : : ~ - ~ « f : : : £ « 



<£? 



v> 



® 



«' • © 3, s:::b---^-- 

«, *» «, c . . . ^ g ^ ^ *, a : :• • « «» s « 

.S • • • *2i • • • « S j* e .5 • • • ,2 • «££'=; 

£ d A «i ^dfi^i ^dfl^ fc d Q «« £ d A «i fcdfl^ 



16 DECLENSION OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 



















oa 
03 












•~S 




oa 












U 








oa 




J— i 




k» 












ft 








r^H 








O 




CD 

o 

o 








C3 

.9 

0) 








S 




u 

^ 




.a 




Si 








oa 




en 

03 

02 








3 

;§; : 

-3 


; 


• 1 

: "& 

.5 

*<* 

3 • 

4Q 


3 


• © 

c 
*3 




3 




03 

«>> 

B 

© 

3 


s 


Q 

■a 

: § 
: & 


3 
3 


CD 
i-> 

o 

s 

3 
3 


3 


3 


3 


3 




3 


w 


s 




w c 
o 


o 

3 

' -3 . 


en 


»-» 3 w 






• J*; 






















e> o ■ _ > 


io 






!£ 


y^ 


V3 


vQ 


yl> 




CD 




ya 


vO VD jC* 



3 






























O 






























^3 






. 






























O 

^03 




n3 
o 

o 






3 
o 












03 
3 

g 


5- 03 










r* 






.9 




















be 




I 






"42 






0) 






03 


I 03 


■a) 




1 

. 'ft 




•5 






03 
g3 






03 
r-j 
O 






be 

03 


3 










o 


->?> 




JE> 


■« 










+3 
o 


*? 






3 




Xe> 






a 






5b 






E : 




3 


3 


3 • 


S 


• © 


3 


3 


© 


3 


3 




•W) 






-3 






o 




^ 














S 3 


3 


>s> 






VQ 










I*» 






-J 


->rv 


« I 




».» 


S 


3 [ 




A 






«v- 


■W) 


£ 


3 


CJ 


o o 


C?3 




o 


s»> 


^ 




! ^.o 


V) 


S "W> 


3 


W 


ia» 








w ■«> 


3 










« 


«k> 


o <3 












«k> «rf 


"o 






t& 




jz 


jO 


ya ys 


"«^ 






• ' cn 






ya vo 



i^dfl^ ^dfi^ ^dp<i ^dfl^ fc o n <i ^ofl^j 



SECOND DECLENSION. 



IT 



3 

e 
3 






3 

r3 

Oh 

"3 
x 

3 



(9 



»o jo ,/q js- 







T3 






1 






?- 
























^2 












c 






en 






O 






o 
























-*-> 






DD 






<D 


^ 








c 


j-T 






c 


C 


3 c 


jO 






c: 






& 




• 




w 


3 






o 

jO 











o 








pL 








h 








3 






J-i 


p* 






r^ 








Oh 


3 






3 


P, 






cc 


3 






^ 


- v> 






3 










3 








» * 








3 






3 
U- 


Jr" c 


c 


E 


rs 




■Cj 


o» 


© 












3 






■W) 


C 


o 






£35 



S3 



O O »j .3 



C 



£ 



.H 5 
US- 



65 




0) 




A 




3 


r/ 


U~> 


O 





^. 




aj 


be 




a 


,4 


£j 


be 


rt 


:_ 


w 


*a 


— 






<jj 


Ph 


■4 


a 
O 


c 


0) 


= 


~ 


53 



3 ^ 



a* tj a> > 



JO /j V=» v& 



^oflo £o«^ ^oq^ ^ofl^ ^oa^ 



2 £ £ 

-5 




3 








j_, 












o 




o 




o 




+J 




o 




c 




o 




Td 




s-> 




3 




»o> 




3- 












© . 








S <D 




p- ^ 




J*".SP 








J-" r^ 




o 




J= o 








<3 * J 








!? 








m & 




t3 C 


B 


o 'g ; 




? •** 




a "2 ■» 


3 *> 


H Ct «l 


O CS 


H * * 


>=> yc 


fc d p -^ 



18 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 



£* 














tl 




























© 














CO 














5 














o 






e 








cc 


















CO 


© 








B 


















.2 

'w 


a. 








O 

'Eh 








w. 






3 § 

*s bo 

"* P 

© 




O 

o 

<d 

"8 


'to 
S3 

1 

Fh 








P 

03 

a 

b 








o 

0) 






p 




tu 


js 
















"+J 










&£> 


o 
















o 






JO 


• • 








* 


B 
« 




'• 




c 

I 






IS) ' 


c e 


£> • ' ' 

«> w c 


« 


B 


b 


B 


b 

£ 
S 

o 


P 


c 


P 






« 




«... 










,w 








%> 


u 


P 


JJ 


c 


A 


** 










j^ 


c: 




«s 






«J 




W-t 


vQ 








o 
















• • 






































. 




























2 s 




























« 




























B 


• 






^~N 




















rB 








<u 




















O 








03 












. 








C3 




















Si 
















3 




















.s 








O 












Oh 








s ~-' 








o 










d 


3 








■a 

0) 








































. 




99 

P 


fe 








5 








^ 






1^ 




o 
o 


O 

Si 

^2 








p 








o 
t5 






S CD 












o 








<D 






«8 J 




3 


05 


TO 






*Ph 

03 


TO 












c3 




&c 


E 








o 








o 










^ w 

*> 


IS 

« 








P 
« 
*3> 






i 


03 
j-T 


TO 




te> • 




*> 


£>- 










c 


E 


p 


o 










SR 




b 


B 


b 


B 
g 


ttl» 


ej 


o> 


ti> 






TO C 


c 

«> 


« to p c g 






. 


• 






85 






»55 

c 
TO 




o *> «> *» B 

« * • • a 

■*fc-> 


TO 


s 


B 


o 


TO 




C 


-« 


TO 


B a 


ct 




« 


o 


&> 


a» 


o 










j> 






"o 




A 


JO 


ya 


v=» 


VD 


'o 


• 













&6ti< 5^dQ<i ^dfi^ ^ofi^i fe o fi ^' 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



19 



0) 
















be 
















s 

OD 






0) 

> 










03 






as 




CO 






0) 

s 

be 

a 










J5 
'es 




73 








0) 

s 








a 

en 


3 

0) 










<D 

c 
o 






X 






« 




o 




a 












cf 




.xj 








3 




o 












b b 

o 
o 


c e 








OS 






<£L ' 




^> *"* 


C 


c 








s_> 


c 


e 












tk> 




y^ 






. '?K 






g> 




«* 




! o 
















o .2? S 




H 


e 




3 




.25 


•H >Q jO 


VD 


x> 




WO 




!o 






•a 
§ 



-a 
o 
o 
be 



c 



a> 










































be 






























































































































a> 

03 






























£< 












03 






























CD 












a> 
















,0 














03 












s 








03 








cS 














o 












be 

.s 








> 

5 








93 














eg 

^0) 






^3 






">> 








-3 








CD 








Bh 






*+3 






3d 






5 

a> 








s 








i 

o 








03 
0) 
0) 






CD 

be 
a 

1S> 






3 
O 






— 
o 

c 


b 


a 


B 


c3 

3 


B 


B 


B 


o 


B 


B 


B 




B 


C 




B 


c 


o 
o 
be 


B 


B 


— 


B 


B 


u 

o 


B 


B 


B 


B 




5 


B 
at 


3 


B 


B 


3 


B 
5 


B 

61 


*3 






o 








<£. 


->^> 


s 


B 










o 








s 


B 


w ■«> 


£ 


B 


J_, 


m 


£ 


C 


ss 


Q# 


V 


o 


^ 








S-» >£> 


E 


B 


5 ^ 


Cn 


01 


-2J ^J 


o 


^» 


o 


ai 


•^> 




















^» Ck» 


oi 










3 






>Q 


>o 


yj 


>s 


"S 








wo 








>Q S2 


jO 


>Q 


o 






<J) 







&OG< ^OP^ ^O 



c2 



20 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 



03 

be 


o 



.3.S 

ft, 3 



1 

s 

o 



© 



§3 

^ s 

5Q * 

„ O ^i -zj 



«0 jQ VO jQ 



r 



« « 5 



o 

■a 



03 



o 

o 

N 



tis- 
*0- 
« 



£ 

© 



&6Q«3 &OQ «i £ OQ «1 






















.2 
































"55 

































a> 
































a 
















03 














p 


h3 

















co 














.2 


3 


ao 












*cc 


+3 


03 













03 


<4H 

O 


o 

03 












13 

03 


& 


r0 












H3 


03 


03 












"r-0 


S 


03 
F* 












4J 


c3 


rO 












o 


03 


03 
r0 












02 


03 


+J 












i-S 


,0 


„ 














-M 














1 

X 
03 

■3 


bn 
















o 

1 

C 







• 


, 




18 

F-l 




be 


g 


<3 










o 


§ 


<2 


.£{ 






,° 




^ 


i 


03 

o 


JO v/O 


jQ 


jo 






T3 



























S 


'"ol 














,o 


i— i 














sS 
















o 


'? 














*Q 


in 














^j 


h3 
















Fh 














£ 


o 














TJ 


£ 

















be 














£ 













1 




03 


't* 












t> 


O 










o 




O 


j^j 


g 








C3 




03 


<2 


6 

Fm 








-g 




03 


03 
■5 


03 
r0 
03 












o 


«S 


% 








> 




CO 


CD 




JO 








c$ 


e c 

o o o 


.2 


O 


03 

r0 












03 

d 





-+J 


CJ 



o 





© 




•FH 




s£ 








s_> 


C C 


g 


£j 


«j 








o 


m «J o 


^ 


^ 








g 


. • 




03 


o 


C 








^ 




?_ 


Fh 


t t-> 








>e 




03 


03 


O- 








« 




o 


r0 

o 




^ 










-y> £ C 

O O O 






vO 


-/O 


VD 


y» 


'©* 








, 


. 


. 




. 


... 






£0 A<! 


^Ofl <} 



THIRD AND FOURTH DECLENSIONS. 



21 



S 



5 

c 



<£- 






13 






-5 



2 £ 
O 



3 £ 



jO TO jO JC» 







a3 






en 






»4 




. 


£ 




.1 

3 


bo 
c 




Cfi 


<u 




t>> 


,4 




rd 


*J 




a. 


0» 




a> 


■J^ 3 










o 


© 


,_J 


c 


c 


2 


eii *"* 




53 


«o 




P^ 


53 




O 


u e 


&i 


£ 


-^> 


Si 



jQ >1> vO 



cy 

"3 



^ 



S3 



a, ■» 



& 



B e 























03 






















cc 








^ 














rQ 


-4-5 






o 














CQ 


QQ 

o 

,4 






S 
o3 








1 






^3 

bo 
p 


2 






J3 








'53 
>> 

-q 






^3 


03 






.xa 








— 






*3 


~a 






-»J 








rS 






«o 


— 






r? 
















■>» 








» 






3 






<3 


■s£ * 


o 




ct£ 


&j 


o 




o 
d 






© 


at 


e 


e 


53 










«rf 


Jt 


>^» 






?s 








53 






• ^5> 


e ' 






'^ 


->s> 


E 


c 


j-> 


■w 


g 




J-> ts> 


E 


a 


c 


&> 


&> 


o 


«* 


o 


o 


» 


o o 


■=-» 


&i 










>2 






O 


VO VQ 


/^. 


yO 


S 








6) 






■*Z 



^ofi^ ^oq^ ^on^ £op«i ^oc^ ^ofi^ 



22 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 



"3 
O 

t 



CD 

Oh 

CD 



3 



'S 
„o 






2 



<55 



o .2; 



o 



o 

Xi 



s 



CD 

1 

§ 

a 



& 



4 2 

o 
jo 






i 

i—i 



Oh 
CD 
CD 

CD 

CD 
CO 



CD 



CD 



® 






s 

o 

e 



&> 



CO 

1 

•s 

3 
o 

Oh 

s 

O 

o 



jQ ./O >0 ./O 



^Ofi^ 



^Ofl^ &OP<! £ Q «3 ^Ofl^ 



VOCABULARIES OF THE FOUR DECLENSIONS. 



en 
P- 

.9 

1 

en 






o $•■» C o 

vO yO yO TO 



tS 


44 


*= 


o 


SFT 


o 

42 


W 


3 




<4, 




o 


ert 


■J) 




d 


d 




Ph 






-3 




« 




«j 




*fr 












iCy 




-3 



t3 


> 


~ 


rfl 


CD 






u 


Bfl 


CD 






- 


•*-> 


z(. 




g 






o 






o 

^ 


b 


'tr 




- 


/> 


V 




bn 


,,v 




O) 


cd 


^ 


— 


C 


-i— 


o 



o rg 



o ^ 

CD TO 



5 d S3 

t-> &H CJ 

rf c3 CD 

CD CD 



O g 



> 
bo" 



bo 

d 
o 



t3 

cd 



a 








tfQ. 


♦J 


10 






o 


r 




ft) 




M 










ID 




e 


e 




Ck» 


VO 








m 


B 








rfcL 


~«D 








<£. 










>£> 


^0 


^n 


E 


tt 


,_ 


rs 


TSJ 




n 




y=> 


V_> 


JZ> 


7> 


tk> 






£ i2 
• -3 



^OQ^ ^OP^ £ O Q «i 



b< 



CD -n CD 


> 


43 •= -d 




°13~ 


t> 


^ M 


cG* 




d -Z *& 




S ^o 




,cj « 




t£ t> CD 








£ «g S3 




.5 § "2 







3 4^ 44 43 O o 

a, <3 & u B 43 

'S CD <0 "5 CD CD 

-43 43 .43 -5 



<3 >5 



2 -a 

2 5 

CO bo 

* .2 

^ s 

O u 



B 



4> *tt <^> 
fc» © © f» er* 



A /> /> A A /> 



CD 

5 

s 

o 
43 

H 



CD 

-tJ CD 

53 d 

s o "5 






CD 

2 

o 

S an 

CD CD 
CD 



a 



»© 3><£c§ © 



a yi yi a a A 



CD 
O 

d 



o 3 

P r2 



3 C ^ 

-5 - •S -6 -5 -5 



3 - = 5 « S 






yo jO >o jo to yi 



24 VOCABULARIES OF THE FOUR DECLENSIONS. 



1 * 

• H Ml 

. flj CO . l-B . rQ a> 

B 2 oj O 3 B _ cd cd cd cd cd <u cd cd cd cd 

sia^gJg^ ~ ** ~ ~ ~ ** ^ r . ■ - 

^Ss s s;i? • • ■ * • • ■ • ? 

« wT « w - £ ^ *_T ^ i • • ■ ^ 

£P S3 .J^ ?>» 5 «° S- ^"B^V> 



H 



•!!*?« nil iltlt I 

^» C S3 £3 C C G «»»oo«j o e*> o s^> o # ** 

->o "o 'o '«» "o 'o 'S !a !o /) ^ jo jo a Jo jS -^> 







rH 

<-j CD 












5 ^ 

a . *a o ^ o 












B cc? 


o 
o 

03 


>H 


aig^S It 


•- 1 ^ B -s ^ hn 
i — i <u S ° -^ f-" 

oi cj P ,4 «i o3 








CD 


. 03 03 




CO ,0 


C3 

B 
ca 


d (S 83 d cfi cfl 


-3 CU O CU CO CD 
Qj ,jq ^B rB rSi ,£3 
r~i "^3 ^j +j +j +j 


£3 

.9 


CD 
CU 


g3 

c3 


03 g3 




1 


1 ; 






: : : ; ^ : 
; '. ! ! o ; 

B 


CO C> .... 

B g . . . . 

.2 ^ 


"13 

B 








S *T £ £J 

£ <£ *t £* 










^ <tl "^ **=- *^" *5" 

3 3 3 C § § 

eo^ (&3 <^ © ^5 


H «! ^ © eo 










O O O «v 








ej 


o o o t-> o o 








E 


c c 


c e c c 




c c 


c 


e 


£3 £3 S3 C C C 


«J <z* o _«>> o 
A >o ^> jo A 




.^ 


c^ 


IV «b» 


O ^* O «>> 


CJ o 


ej 


&> 


CJ O O O O CJ 





CD 













town 

power 

wall 


hand 
goose 
strengt 
hatche 


rB 

C9 

B 

CO 

rQ 


B 

CO 


"I 

B 


B 

r3 


CO 


S3 

Bh 


CO 

rB 

o 


B 

CO 

-a 

B 


c 


."B B 
fl CU M CO 








CO O CD 


CO CD CO CD 


CO 


co 


CD 


CD 


CD 


01 


<i) 


CD 


o 


S 


C3 


e 


rB rB rB 

-<-S +J -(-i 


rS^ rg r& rB 
-*J -r^ r+3 -(J 


■5 


rB 


rB 
-rJ 


rB 




rB 


rB 


rB 


cS 

JQ 

w 
-3 




c3 

E 
« 


C3 
33 




1 : : 

© B ^ 


« « S tl « 


JO 




£3 
1 




£3 

CS 


JO 

CD 


c? 

C5W 


E 


5 5 .£ S 


c 


£3 




SJ «j *J 


«a <k> o o 


6J 


o 


o 


o 


o 


Si 


tj 


o 



CO 

o 

a. 

r-» 



33 



joy=>yitjt>joyoyoyojayo jo jz> jo jo 



VOCABULARIES OF THE FOUR DECLENSIONS. 



— 










>> 




















:: 




T3 






*d 




















B 
o 


H 


_£T 






_rt 


^> 


o> ^ 








k» 






03 


l 


+4 

a 

93 

> 


ED 

1 

ft. 

3D 


P 

93 

P 






CO £ 

03 'co 

.9 S 


P 

§T3 


° 15 

cd o 
-*-* — 

P s- 
'ft « 


.5 
'7* 


'3 

1 

E 


Ph 

a 
p 


co 

o 

o 

. > 


03 

1 


03 

E 



— 


El 

§ 

E 


a 


99 


a> 


a 


03 


a as 


03 03 


cr o 


- 




Fh 03 


03 


03 


03 


_= 




-= 


— 


— 


-p ja 


xi :c 


o f- 


o 


93 


P ,ft 


~ 


M 


,a 


■*-> 


+-J 


+j 


-i— 




■*— +j 


+J eft 


03 -ft 


w 


r- 


DO +J 


+- 


■♦J 




i — * 































5 o 



*« 






«*— CS **— ,+-» "^7 »£> 

4* 2. *& Jl «" ** ^ *L *» 



>3 3 



g> o § £ 2 
3 jg c ■* ■* 



S?iyii)^^w?;3(fc»SwSgiP^H ^ ^ 






vo ./=> -o yz> yzt sz yzi 






VDv/O-OvO-OjOv/O^vO 



CO >-» CO 

co -ft co 

■1 -§ 'S &2 

p § c3 B ° 



03 
03 

§ £* 

p rt 

^ .£ co « 
P t> kd a> 

ta ^-C ^ P c >^ 

>-»ft^ O • +2 « .-£■ 

I ! uu 111 



9) 



O O 
C P 



J3> 









1 ^ J? « -S' en .» 



/2>JZ>S^i/^VZiJZlJZt/ZiS5S-iJZiSLiVLi 



.2 fee 
a .S 

^3 ^ 

S £ 



f, 



O 03 
feD.P 
U co 
03 03 

o n3 



W 






cr: 






y^ vz js sz> 



en 

. icy 

g o 

s ^ 

s s ^ 

a fa 



J> S. »2 !rr « % 

•^7 ^< *tj <- ^£> VO 

eo f» eo ?p h C?5 



Q 


03 




3 


V 




E 


a 




(h 






03 


s — ■ ' 




CO 

S3 


hi 

93 


03 


E 


~ 


hfl 


CO 

- 

*- 


♦3 

a 


- 

03 
03 



o> .5 £ 
fee ^ to o 



^^ 



93 



r> 03 

r 7n 'To 

03 



03 



c $^ t: z? 






Q K © g © © 



-o j* yz> jz jz yz 



tc 



P 

03 
Fh 

fee 



fee 

_;- 

a 



fee BS| 

C 5 .« Ch o ftn 
O oft OR "S £ -5 



B S 

03 X2 



*2J -o ^L S 
'2 c 3" « 



.— «i> ui_ *3> 



« 



o 2^ 53 -g s o 



ysssszszyzsdy^jsszyzfjztysyz 



P 
O 



o s CO 

.2 -2 .S 



« 2 "5 S 

S^ s 2 « 

2 >< ^ x 

rP 03 H3 03 



<5) 


en en 


5 en 


C J= 


#1 




tt> b » 


8S &*- 


■St 22 


.2 3 



a 








spoon 
grandso 

ie ward 






93 


'co 


CO 
9) 
CO 


P 
p 

03 


03 03 ^3 


03 


93 


— 


Ja ^a ? 




— 










., r 


c£ "a* £5 


§5 

So 


(3 


C 
►3 



jc» jz yz V5 



/J >1» >S jO jO VO 



26 



VOCABULARIES OF THE FOUR DECLENSIONS. 



c 



J 42 

2 w f> 



3 » % 



*-> -Ej Ji> TO 

{§ 8) 64 © 



to to y^ to 



.2 • «: fl 

5 fl g <-> 

2 <i> <u rfs 

^ r^ ^ 

"*-* -*-» -+■» .r 



a 
o 

Ph 

» o 

•5 0) 



-S bo 

s gp a 

fl ~- Oh 

© 2 <u 

^=J rS rS 
•p ** ^3 



1 1 

© © 



*» 5> o 13 
fg- fcs= fc= *g 

&ii© 

, v>'v>'y>'V>'y>'v>'y>'y>'y5 

CSCSCSCSCSCSCSCSCS 
jO /i TO A to TO TO jO ./o 



.£» *5 S 

CJ vfj- TO 

fl.2 it 

^> o ^> 

© © © 



a> co £ 

ffl (S ? 

a> o ^ 

<§ © © 

s_> -w> ■«> 

5 c$ cs 

TO jO TO 



o3 



■3 £ 



S c ffl -J 



q3 
b0 bJD 
C 03 , 

•sb.a s 

•C ° CD -p\ 

<» 2 » ZT 

sfl-i 

3 ». e- {5 

O ^> O o 

© © © © 

-y> ■«> -y> oj> ^> • 

CS CS CS CS CS CS 

/> ^1 /> /) A A 



w o 



© © 





O 










O 










03 










v^/ 


bD 




O 


^H 


1-a 

05 CO 

a g » 




bJD 


cs 

•s ^ 

s 


'o 


3 &D £ 


•l D l « 


1 







ai 


co ,0 rC! 


CU 


a 


« ^ ^ 


<U qj ** 


h 


the i 
the 
the i 


£ 


« ~ bD 




03 

6 


CS 


sis 
& © © 


Si. ^» Si 




c g c 


<£ 


c?i^ © 


c>5 


<>/ S £3 


S_> 


J-> s-> w 


■>& 1S> v> 


■w 


•«>'«>'«) 





«rf «1> 


« « « 





« « « 


jQ 


/> VO jO 


»^> TO >o 


vo 


JO /> A 



.■&■§ 

^ 2 

.a § 

^3 ,£J 



© © 
« s 







44 






>-> 2 




QQ 


° 




a 


^ rQ 


1=1 


?3 


<D P5 


S3 


1— 1 

-a 
a 




03 


2 <u 


^5 




■3^3 



PS 

o 

LO Pj 

rS 2 






TO -« 

s ^& 

« cs 

TO TO 



« cs 

TO TO 



© 



CS CS 
TO TO 



^=J 



i 



in 

o 



CD 'o rfj 

2 -0 •** 



© © ^ 



s 



__ 


ci 


nr; 


0) 


03 


s 


V 


<D 



TO TO TO TO 



-«) ■*» 

CS CS 
TO TO 



r2 ° 

Sh O 

■H-> h3 



«-cs *■* 

855 Q 



be g 



-fa bo 

o ^a 

0) CO 



P3 eo © © #0 



S co 

HJ (— H 

CD Jg 



,_! -^ ~ P^ ^ 

rS S 'l t! ^ <T> 



03 CD 

a ^ 



- a 



TO TO TO TO TO TO 



CD 


c 


r^ 







+r 




SJ 


c 


CSS. 


^e 



2 


-« 


^* 


eo 


» 


■»t) 




« 


-w 


Q 


TO 



TO •«> ^ 

s-> -cs *12 



CS CS 
TO TO 



■WJ 



r2 

'Hh 

a 

Oh 

r£5 



3 



VOCABULARIES OF THE FOUR DECLENSIONS. 27 



M 4 * t 1 



T3 



u 


t.- 


~ 


yO 


" 


.^ 










= 


c 


g 


00 


t- 


09 






/z> 


-»-; 


• •s 


, » 


a 


« 




eg 






Si 


g) 


s 




53 


•^ 


w 


/-> 


<D 


-^ 




n 




o 




Xi 


O 




tt 


0) 


e 


~ 


S3 


4 - 



rt « & o 

O) <U t3 ) bD C 

_2 »-_g © B : : © a « a a 

1 « i 

§> ^3 o 

g *© ~ _g ^ © & <&=; £> £> © & \z& &$ 

^ >i /I TO /i 



e<0 


£ -5 


+J 


£» . . 






•B 72 bo 


<■•> 

« 




a. rt o 






V -° ^ 






^ a a) 


c 

O) 

be 




~££ 


s*» 


S «T a* 




E 


•2: i-> <5 


J^ /j 


<3 


c ^> 


yz 


s>> -3 C 




o 


®©^ 


eo eo 


© 


j_> $_, j_> 


j-> j-> 


;_, 


»> m ^ 


o o 


o 


A ^> /i 


-/!» jO 


yo 



?p 






P* S8 £ ,S '> e Ph 



;|j 5f| if | sin fisUi 

^P^zjo^is^ CL 3 bl).^ ^ Oc3oo r- 2 ^^"^ 



jg sa *s r * 



.J3 -o 



| ^^©^ £®g P-^^g:(3« 



2 >^ a) 



^o -o ys 



C3 



3 « ■ "**- -S **- ^ ^ S^-Q^2 

-" ^ ^> ^ -w « ©oooo 

2 T *r .~ 'o c _ ^ ^3 ^ *g ^d rg 



8 



T3 


o 


F4 




a 


v^> 


<U 




i> 


4r 


&, 


-*-> 




a 


cx 




«d 


@ 


1o 


o 


JO 






c: 






fe* 



O 

be 







^ 


ro 






^H 


Fh 


o 


Td 


pq 


S 


a> 


Q 


0} 


+j 


p0 








~ 




g) 


>t= 




•^- 


55 Q » 



*& «X S o 0)^-5 ^ be*- 



» © <^ *<^ fiw^ 



-O VO >C ,/D jQ jO >& 



28 



VOCABULARIES OF THE FOUR DECLENSIONS. 






0) 

pa 



^ o cd a 



pO CD 



iu 



& ^ Z- „- 

73 s_> t^> « 

& © '-^£ 

$_. j-> i-> *-> 

«j cj cj o 

jo yi vo s^> 



a o 



X CD 



tS Oh 

& ph 

a .22 

CD o 



CD 



O til O u=f- 

i- U j-> j_> 

O O O CJ 

va >o /> yj 



CD 
C 

o 



o 
^ 






c3 



"3 



en 
a 
O 



a 

Oh 
CD 

-a 



E 

o a 

• ~ Oh 

a ^ 

•3 -o 

Oh ~ 

0J g 

pO r? 



-5 .3 o 



o .** 
'a! -^> 
a . 

-is 

^a a 

+3 -p 

&H » 

d Oh 



-*© 



fi, -^ 



bb aj 
a o 

'5 *t> 
•+-> f-* 
^ S -O 

b|)-W CO 

CD -5 Q 



CD 

m s bp a 

1|,§ s 



CD 



CD 



r -S *- pO ,3 



S «f .i ^ *§ «tf c o 
53 & Q £> ^4^ {§ 

SOY2J2S2YOJOSOSO 



S 



rill 






cdcdcdcdcdcdcdcd 

gf :::::: : 
a* e 






^ & & I? fc$ fits 

5-> S-> U> U i-> t* 



vOjOvOvO^JX>^»vO 



C3 O 

CD o 

pP ?H 

CD CD 



s 



P- 

fcJO 

.0 cu 

G a 

Ph Ph 

CD CD 

pP pP 



e- c 



& eo e© ^>- 



<^ 



CD 

pa 

CD 



^ 






.S o cS 

to P a § o 
k» ph a pO o o rQ 

co pQ &J0 Oh « >• c6 
cdcdcdcdcdcdcdcd 

■5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -3-5 -5 












^©»®^^»§ 



/» /i jo /» 



ys ^t yz ja j^ jo jzt 



VOCABULARIES OF THE FOUR DECLENSToN 9. 



29 



I 

IB ? 

no 









P -0 

o 



J s £ § g"3 

'o B &, § cu g 

•«? - 3 ~ 



■•r © ^s ""^ 3 

F «3 °» a> ffi 

- ** ~ -a J3 

S§.ff?"sSS Soft's 



>E> jO VO TO A 






§ 3 

C3 3 



be 



«. _- ; i -rf C3 ,-3 CD 

> O r3 ^ CO O fn 

qjCDcDCOCDCDOCDCD 

-C2^-C3_a^3_Sr^5J3^ 



EX 
CD 



e o 1 o ....... 

Ill ::::::: 

_ ^ w >a 2 

JO *S ^" JO- 3 j=- 3 y^ 

0333;3:3»-3$3:~ 

fe; o9 Q eo -^^5 © © © 51 



VO VO -/O jO wO VO TO 



*3 CD 03 

rt i- 3 co _, 

O 3 <D ^ -^ O ,. S 

s §-|11| i ||| 

3 O +3 co co+j o 3« co '"O 
oCDCdOCDcdcdOCDCD 

I I : : : : : : : : : 

o ic w cs ^ cs 3 





he 




43 U 




Oh 




3 . cd 




w 3 S- t> 




the pair, 
he net. 
, the pou 
the empi 
in, the s^ 
the ship 
the salt. 








£ ~ ^ ^ | £ * 




<?>-£ ^85 (9 © ($) 




If} ">i> *> V> V> -«5 7S> 




cs cs cs cs cs « o 


3 


/D jQ VO VO jO vi >S 


»o 




^ 




c 




3 





_* eo 



— 


Fh 


% 


fcJD -, 3 




*H CD 


3D 

- 


O 

-a 


i 

,£3 


^ 3 c3 - 


3 


C3 ^ 




CD 


O 


S m 2 'S 


CD 


CD (V) 


e 


.1 


o 
c 


V 2 ^ ^; 

- *33 - jo- 
en 3 3 


— 
j-T 
a 


i-3 i— 1 

6^ <n 






■>r> v> ■»» ■»» 


w 


•«> TO 






o3 


c$ « « « 


a 


CS <3 






3 


/i /> ^ JD 


y-> 


VO jO 








CD 

O 




■JO- 








3 




i2> 








CD 




■«> 








3 




yo 








CO 

cd 










be 








o cu 




3 








^ 3 




s 








3 w 










^- CD ^ <u 


CD 


eg 










s 


CD r3 








CJ 


B k 








the ho 

, theh 

the ri 

the ca 


be 










CD 


CD CD 








o *■*— a* ^G 

ct c?" 8b c^ 





W tt W W » « 18 
« CJ CJ CS o o CS 

v/o yo yo >d yi. yz> s-, 



30 VOCABULARIES OF THE FOUR DECLENSIONS. 



CD 


s 


qj 


s 


&, 


Bd 


83 


83 


M 


r-£ 


+3 








"tn 


U> 


*5 




&) ^ 


■>» 


->o 


cs 


rs 


y=> 


>d 



2 a "B 



r CJ • 83 



4| t( . ■ « € * " ~ ^ «& £ -g # JL H 1 £ J: S I 



-o j-> i^ j_> ^ °2 ^ "S ^S °S 



i -s 



83 6J0 <3 

£P 83 83 



■>s> 


V) 


'ft 


'ft 


">ft 


->ft 


v> 


'ft 


->t> 


->o 


« 


« 


« 


« 


« 


« 


<3 


« 


« 


« 


yi> 


vO 


VD 


jO 


-jO 


VH 


->o 


vo 


vO 


VD 



& ^> *<§ .. ^ t- ' . ft. <» 



bJD 



ii s ill J I §f!~f ft tffs*"^rf 

•>ft °ft • w %> j-> ''ft ■«> 'ft ■y) -«>•'.» -y> •«> -y> "«> 'ft 'ft ■*» 

/> VO J; vlj /Zi SZi rri VCJ ^li jO yl> V^ jO /) vO jO ^ .o w/D x> 



§ 5 



c3 



83 



Is 

rQ ►*" fl 83 £ 83 



1 £ 4 i «~ « ^ If ^ « «~ *s 1 1" f 1 

jO ^O >0 Xj A ^i jO >1» /S 7i jd JZ/ /!> /> Xi -/^ 



( 31 ) 
§ 8. FORMATION OF NOUNS. 

I. Q BR MAN WORDS. 

A. Simple ones : 

a. primitive words; as, ber ipctfyn, the cock; bte @ang, the goose; 
ber $lad)g, yarn, flax ; bag s £robt, the bread ; bcr £>ampf, the 
smoke; ber Sib, the oath; ber M, the eel. 

b. Compound words : 
a. with prefixes ; as, 

1. be bet SSeft'l?, the possession; ber s £ericbt, the account; 

bcr 25efef){, the command ; bet s 33etrug, the 
deceit ; bet 23eruf, duty. 

2. ge bag ©efyolj, the wood ; bag ©erour j, spice ; bag 

©eroelf, clouds ; bag @eftf>rei, crying ; bag @e= 
fd)cnf, the present; bag ©eroding, the plant; bag 
@ebet, the prayer, &c. 

3. ent&emp bcr Sntfaf?, succour; (£ntrourf, plan; (Smpfamj, 

receipt, &c. 

ber Srtraa,, produce; (£rl6g, money got, &c. 

ber 3$eebanb, bandage; $erfd)tup, confinement; 
^Bertrag, treaty, &c. 

bie >3erfpaltung, cracking; ^crlegung, dissection, &c. 

ber Unfatt, accident; Unrottte, indignation; bie 
Unluft, dislike, &c. 
8. ur ber Urfprung, origin ; Urenfel, great-grand- 
child, &c. 
/3. with Affixes ; as, 

1. cfjen bag 25lumd)en, small flower; £dugcben, small 
house, &c. 

2. e bie SSeere, berry; £dnge, length; ©djeere, scis- 
sars, &c. 

ber 95ote, messenger ; £irte, herdsman ; ^riebe, 

peace, &c. 
ba^ ©efinbe, servants ; ©emdlbe, painting, &c. 

3. el bie ©cbuffel, dish; 21ngel, hook; Wabel, needle, &c. 
ber Mantel, cloak ; jpanbel, trade, &c. 
bag Uebet. evil, &c. 
ber 23unbel, bundle ; (£nfel, grandson, &c. 

4. en ber 25efen, broom ; bag Stfen, iron, &c. 
•5. er bie £o$ter, daughter ; ber SBdcbter, watchman ; 

bag ©efieber, plumage, &c. 



4. 


er 


5. 


j?er 


6. 


jer 


7. 


un 



32 FORMATION OF NOUNS. 

6. et bie 23tauetet, brewery ; ©etkret, tanning- 
house, &c. 

bie Sauffyett, laziness ; l&odljeit, wickedness, &c. 

bad $efyttd)t, sweepings ; ^Oicfic£>t, thicket, &c. 

bad Effing, brass ; bet faring, herring, &c. 

bie Sfeunbinn, friend ; SurjUnn, the wife of a sove- 
reign, &c. 

bic ©attnetin, the gardener's wife, &c. 

bie ipet&ftc^eit, intimacy ; JDanfbarfett, grati- 
tude, &c. 

bet Jpofling, courtier ; Bating, pupil, &c. 

bie Sintfetntf?, darkness ; bad Steigmf?, event, &c. 

bet SButfyertd?, tyrant ; (Sntericfr, drake, &c. 

bad ©cfcicffal, destiny ; £>tangfal, calamity, &c. 

bad 3fo$fyfel, riddle \ SuHfet, stuffing, &c. 

bet ©efyotfam, obedience ; ©eroctfytfam, safety, &c. 

bie S^tttbfc^aft, enmity ; £etbenfd>aft, passion, &c. 

bad ^atfetrtjum, empire; bet SReic&fyum, wealth, &c. 

bie 23efttebigung, satisfaction ; ^etmimftfnmg, curs- 
ing, &c. 

B. Nouns compounded with other words. 

1. with Nouns ; as, bet $itd)tf)Utm, steeple ; bie Jjau&fyur, street- 

door, &c. 

2. . . Adjectives; as, bad 95tttetnxtfiet, bitter- water ; bie ©d)nxttj= 

pappet, black poplar, &c. 

3. .. Numbers; as, bie $iettelfhtnbe, quarter of an hour; bet 

Staufenbfuf}, scolopendria, &c. 

4. .. Verbs; as, bie ©ingfunft, the art of singing; bet ^>lagegetft, 

troublesome fellow, &c. 

5. . . Prepositions ; as, bet UmftetS, circle ; ©egenjfanb, object ; 

Slufgang, rising, &c. 

6. . Adverbs ; as, bet £>etmgcmg, going home ; bad £>atlef>n, loan ; 

bet £ingang, demise, &c. 

7. . . more than one Noun ; as, bie 2ttmen=$etfotgung$cmjt alt, an 

institution providing for the poor; bie S5r«nbcaffcn= 
3le<$nung$abnaf>me, the receipt of the accounts of a fire- 
insurance, &c. 



7. 


fcett 


8. 


irf>t 


9. 


ing 


10. 


inn 


11. 


in 


12. 


hit 


13. 


ling 


14. 


nifj 


15. 


vic^ 


16. 


fat 


17. 


fet 


18. 


fam 


19. 


Waft 


20. 


tf>um 


21. 


ung 



FORMATION OF NOUNS. 33 

The following are irregularly formed, and signify depravity of 
mind ; as, 

£)er ©cf>abenfrof), a plotter of mischief; ber 9ttmmetfatf, a greedy 
fellow ; ber Xauo,entcf)tg, good-for-nothing fellow, &c. 

II. FOREIGN WORDS. 

A. those which have lost their foreign character by taking Ger- 
man terminations ; as, ber %?o,er, the negro; bie Summer, the 
number; ba$ detail, the metal; ber ©atpeter, salpetre ; bie 
<iftatur, nature, &c. 

B. those which have changed their forms; as, bie ^cutanj, insu- 
rance; bie (Japacitdt, capacity; bie <pf)Uofopf)ie, philosophy, &c. 

C. those which are not changed at all in form or pronunciation ; 
as, ber SSanquier, the banker; bie 2lpanao,e, allowance of a member 
of a royal family ; b«S 2lgio, change ; bie $Intid>ambre ; bag 
Qompenbuun, &c. 

It is necessary to know the Latin, Italian and French languages 
in order to understand and pronounce those words well. 

NOUNS COMPOUNDED WITH NOUNS. 

The first word expresses : 

l.The object of the active, while the second expresses the per- 
former; as, ber jpoljfyauer, the wood-cutter ; ber ^ud>enbarfer, the 
pastry-cook ; ber Sutterfcfyneiber, the fodder-cutter, &c. 

2. The purpose for which the first word is used; as, ber SBetnbero,, 
the vineyard ; ba$ 23iero,(ag, the beer-glass ; ber ipanbfdntf), the 
glove, &c. 

3. The whole of an object, of which the last word expresses one 
part; as, bat SMumenbfatt, the leaf of a flower ; ber ^ferbefup, 
the foot of a horse ; bie jpaugtfyur, the street-door, &c. 

4. The owner of the thing of which the last is the name ; as, bie 
^rebtgergebufyren, the due of a Clergyman ; bag ft&nigSfcfrtop, the 
palace of a king ; bie ©tabtroiefe, a meadow belonging to a 
town, &c. 

5. Similarity ; as, bie SSutterbtrne, a pear as soft as butter; bat 
©eibenpapier, silk-paper ; ber ©tocfftfd), the cod-fish, &c. 

6. Material of which the object of the second word is formed ; as, 
ber ©teintifcb, a table made of stone ; bie ©tafylfeber, the steel- 
pen ; ber (Srb&aufen, heap of earth ; bag ©ilbergelb, money made 
of silver, &c. 

7. The place where the object of the second word is situated ; as, 



34 FORMATION OF NOUNS. 

bie ©arf)tinne, gutter; bie SBiefennelfe, carnation of a meadow ; ber 
^opffttmerj, headache. 

8. The time to which the object refers ; as, bat ©ommerforn, 
summer-corn (corn sown in spring) ; bat 3Ibenbbrobt, supper; 
ber 9?ad)m>dd)ter, watchman, &c. 

9. The instrument ; as, ber Su^tritt, footstep ; bie jpcmbarbeit, ma- 
nual-work ; needle-work ; ber $eberftrid>, stroke of the hand 
(by writing), &c. 

10. The kind or manner ; as, ber -Bettlauf, running for wages ; ber 
Sfcagelofyn, daily wages or pay, &c. 

11. The degree or class; as, bat ^eifterflucf, the master-piece; ber 
.£>aupnncmn,the captain of an army; ber Bunftmeifter, the master 
of a guild, &c. 

12. The cause ; as, ber ©onnenbrcmb, sun-burned ; ber SBafferbampf, 
steam of water ; ber £>agetfcbaben, damage caused by hail, &c. 

PARTS &F SPEECH WHICH MAY BE USED AS NOUNS. 

1. The adjective, if the sentence does not contain a noun; as, ber 
©eletjrte, the learned man ; ber 28etfe, the prudent man ; bie 
©d)one, the beautiful female ; bie $teine, the little or pretty girl; 
bie SSugenbe, the suffering female ; bets? @ute, bat ©cbone, bat Uner= 
roartete, the good, the fine, the unexpected (thing); bat ©cfyroarje, 
bat 2Bet£e, the black, the white (colour), &c. 

2. Numerals are used in the same manner as adjectives ; as, bie 
JDrei, bie ©ed)S, the numbers three, six ; fitter ift §u roentg, one 
is not sufficient; IDrei ftnb ju ml, three are too many; $n>ei ftnb 
genug, two are enough; ber ^efynte, the tenth; ein fritter, a 
third one; Wet, every thing; (Itroat, something; Wifytt, 
nothing, &c. 

3. The pronoun, when it refers to persons ; as, (Sib bat @elb £)em= 
jenigen, roetcfyer juerft fommt, give the money to him who comes 
first ; S^at (£r, ©ie ober fyat tfflan et getfyan ? has he, she, or have 
they done it ? ©enb 3^ fertig ? are you ready ? 3$ fjctbe 3e= 
mcmb gefefyen, I have seen somebody ; (it nxiren nur SBenige bet, 
there were only few, &c. 

4. The infinitive or participles ; as, bat Jporen, the hearing ; bat 
©djreiben, the writing; bat 2efen, the reading; £abe(n ifl leidjt, 
to blame (one) is easy ; $erbeffern ijt fcbrcer, to correct (one) is 
difficult ; ber ©djreibenbe, the one who is writing ; bat @efcbrie= 
bene, that (which) is written, &c. 



DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES. 85 

•5. Conjunctions ; as, bai iBenn, (the if) ; ba$ Stber, (the but). 
0. Nouns which are made adjectives by the addition of fd> or ifd), 

unless remaining otherwise unaltered, lose the capital letter ; 

as, bie ©d)iUerfd)cn ocbriften, the works of Schiller; bie fturfyefftfcfye 

33erfaflung, the constitution of Hessia, &c. 
Parts of speech used as nouns, which are not so, are written with 
a capital letter. 

§ 9. DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES. 

The article is used before names of nations, rivers, mountains, 
forests, and months ; as, bet $rcmjofe, the Frenchman ; bie ©pree, 
the Spree; ber s £rocfen, the Brocken ; ber Spat j, the Hercynian forest ; 
ber 3<*nuar, January. 

The article is also used before the following names of countries ; 
as, bie ©d)n>et$, Switzerland; bie Sau|i§, Lausnitz ; bie 9ttarf\ the 
March,; bie ^ricuufj, Prignitz ; bie 9ftolbau, Moldavia; bie £urfet), 
Turkey, &c. 

When proper names are placed after adjectives or numerals the 
article is not omitted ; as, ba$ gro£e bonbon, the large London ; ber 
berufjmte ©emitter, the celebrated Schiller; ba$ mddjttge ^reufjen, (the) 
powerful Prussia ; 

Names of men are not declined in the singular if the definite 
article is used; as, bee Speintid), Henry; be$ Speintid), of Henry; 
bem ipetnttd), to Henry; ben Spdntid), Henry. 

The use of the article with such names indicates familiarity ; as, 
Spaben fie ben fteinen SEBttyetm gefefyen ? Have you seen (the) little 
William? 

When a pronoun stands before a proper name, or when an ad- 
jective precedes it, the genitive ends in $; as, Seines Speintid)'$ ©etft, 
my Henry's spirit; bie ©cfyonfyeiten unferetf (£affef, the beauties of our 
Cassel; ba$ ©rabmal beg gtofjen SutfyerS, the tomb of the great 
Luther. 

All German and foreign names of persons are declined in the 
singular according to the above rule. 

If the article be used, the plural is declined as follows : 

N. £He jpeinridje, bet Spantide, ben jpeinricben, bie £einrid)e, like those 
nouns which end in the Plural in e. 

If there is no article used before Christian names, surnames, 
names of countries or places, the genitive singular ends in $ or 
en$ ; as, 

d2 



36 



DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES. 



N. G. 

Souife, SonifenS, 
griff, $tt§en$, 



D. A. 

2tbotpfyen, Stbolp^en, (Adolphus). 

£ouifen, Souifen, (Louisa). 

Srifcen, Stiffen, (Sricbrict), Frederick). 



5tfercmbet, 21leranber$, Sllejtanbern, Sllercmbetn, (Alexander). 

In speaking of a native of a country the preposition au$ is 
applied; as, bie jungen S^enn ft'nb au$ ^nglanb, those young gentlemen 
are from England. 

In speaking of inhabitants of places, or of remarkable buildings, 
the preposition *?on is used ; as, bin £inroof>net *>on <pari$, the inha- 
bitants of Paris; bie ^trcfym son bonbon ftnb jafylretc^, the churches of 
London are numerous. 

EXAMPLES OF THE DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES. 







Singular. 




N. 2Botf, 


Sutler, 


Seibnig, 


©olon. 


G. SBotfa 


Supers, 


Sieibntfj (ens), 


©olonS. 


D. 2Bolf(en) 


Sutler (n), 


Seibntl? (en), 


©olon. 


A. SBotf (en) 


Sutler (n), 


2eibnt$ (en), 
Plural. 


©oton. 


N. SBoIfe, 


Sutler, 


Seibntfje, 


©olone, 


G. 2Bolfe, 


Sutler, 


2etbnif?e, 


©ofone, 


D. SBotfen, 


Sutfyern, 


£etbnt£en, 


©otonen, 


A. Botfe, 


Sutler, 


£etbmfje, 


©olone. 



All names of countries and towns, if they do not end in £, f<$, and 
$, are declined as the preceding example, Solon; as, SStymen, 
Bohemia; ©d>roeben, Sweden; atom, Rome; SBarfcbau, Warsaw ; 
©tocfyolm, Stockholm ; 2In)en, Athens ; Berlin, Berlin, &c. 

All names of persons ending in a, o, i, », belong to this rule ; as, 
(£otta, £>ibo, ^Ricotai, SSalfcbefSfy (in the genitive dottaV). 

All those which end in en and d>en ; as, $arften, 2)otd>en, 3fe 
cfyen, &c. 

Some names of persons from the Latin and Greek ; as, <£ato, 
<£tceto, 9Mand)U)on, 5Iaton, (pi. (Satone, Slatone, &c.) 

In using the names of families the genitive takes g ; as, (£t if! 
bet ©cfyuljenS, he is at Schulzens ; 3Bir getjen ju ©cbmtbtS, we are 
going to the Schmidts. 

The names of towns which end in $, r, and 5 are not declined ; as, 
<pati$, SEBorlifc, ©tag, (Sabir. 



FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. .JT 

When speaking of a town, the preposition " of" is never used ; as, 
the town Hamburgh, bte ©tabt Hamburg. 

Names of persons which end in c(, er, and en, suffer no alteration 
in the plural ; as, Sing, ber ©cbtegel, PI. btc ©d)tcge( ; Sing, ber 5ftul ; 
ler, PL bte Gutter. 

When names of generations are united to proper names, the latter 
are not declined ; as, btc $r6mmg be$ $6ntg$ ©ttyelm, the coronation 
of King William. 

When the article does not stand before names of generations, the 
proper names and the numeral are declined ; as, ber £ob $6nig Sub= 
rotg$ beS 33terjef)nten, the death of King Louis the fourteenth. 

In using the Christian names or surnames of the nobility, the name 
which is placed before the preposition t>on is declined ; as, UlricfyiS 
t?on £utten£ £f?aten, Ulrich of Hutten's deeds. 

Latin words are declined in the singular according to the rules 
of that language. 

§ 10. FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. 

A. Radicals; as, He in, little ; gr op, large; ftatf, strong; gut, good; 
alt, old; jung, young; fyatt, hard; roetd), soft; fefr, firm; &c. 

B. Derivatives; as, e^rbar, honest; [corner jfyaft, painful; menfd)= 
Itch, human; madjttg, powerful; fmbtfd), childish, &c. 

C. Compounds ; as, finntetd), sensible ; gtunbfatfd), erronous ; blut* 
butjUg, bloodthirsty ; efytmutbtg, venerable, &c. 

The derivatives are formed by the affixes bar, fam, en, cm, tg, td)t, 
ifd>, lid), and tyaft. 
The affix bat is derived from barcn (bdren), to bear, to bring forth; 

as, frud)tbat, fruitful ; i. e. which brings forth fruit. 
The affix fam expresses the sense of the noun, which it renders 

an adjective in its fullest acceptation, and expresses desire or 

wish; as, arbettfam, industrious, i.e. wishing to work; folgfam, 

obedient; fparfam, sparing; furcbtfam, fearful, i.e. shewing 

fear, &c. 
The affixes en, n and em are only added when the noun expresses a 

material, which noun changes the vowels a, o, u, into a, 6, u ; 

as, jtctytem, of steel (©tafyt, steel) ; f$jern, of wood (jqoIj, wood); 

bucfrm, of beech (SMtcfce, beech-tree) ; ft'lbcm, of silver (©tlber, 

silver) ; ftetnem, of stone (©tein, stone) ; lebem, of leather (2e= 

bet, leather); 



38 FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. 

The affix tg shews that one, or a thing, possesses a thing or a 

quality ; as, ber Stcmbe ift guttg, the stranger is kind ; ba$ 

Sanb if! ftetntg, the land is stony ; fctn 5luge if! fem% his eye is 

ardent ; et ift abetig, he is noble. 

If a conjunctive possessive pronoun precedes an adjective, the 

latter expresses the gender of the noun ; as, mem gutet $afer, my 

good father; betne gute 5tau, thy good wife; fern guteS 55uc^>, his 

good book. 

If a demonstrative pronoun precedes an adjective, the former shews 
the gender of the noun. The adjective always ends in e ; as, biefet ftetne 
(Barten, this small garden; jene atmc $rau, that poor woman; baflfelbe 
neue 33ud>, the same new book. 

The affix id)t shews the similarity of one thing with another ; as, 
erne fupfticfyte ^afe iff cine folc^e, tt>eld>e rate $upfet auSftefyt, a cop- 
per-like nose is one which looks like copper. 
The changes in sense caused by the following variations of the 
terminations of adjectives, en, em, tg, td)t, can only be learned by 
practice. 

The following adjectives are the only ones which can be used 
with all the above terminations ; as, eine fydtene £5ecfe beflefyt au$ 
jpctaten, a cover made of hairs; eine fyatige £>e<&, a hairy cover, a 
cover with hairs at the top ; eine fyattd)te £>e<&, is a cover similar 
to one made of hairs ; eine ftemetne 9ftauet bejfefyt au$ ©tein, a 
stone wall consists of stone; eine ftetntge ©egenb fyat ttiete ©tetne, 
a stony country has many stones ; eine ftemtgte 23irne gletd)t einem 
©teine, a stony pear resembles a stone ; eine 23an! ift fjotjetn, benn 
fte beflef)t au$ ^>olj, a bench is wooden because it is made of 
wood; eine ©egenb ift t)ot$ig, roetf ba tnel £>ols ift, a country is 
woody because there is much wood; eine SKube ift f>oljicf>t, benn 
fte gletcfyt bem £>otje, a turnip is woody, for it looks like wood. 

The affix tfd) signifies that an adjective is derived from the name' 
of a person, country, or place; as, £utf)ettfcf>, is all that contains 
the religious principles of Luther; ^rangojtfc^, all that belongs 
to the French nation; as, gtcmjofen, Frenchmen; except, 
Berliner 3$lau, (not SSerlmtfcfy), so called because it comes from 
Berlin. 

The affix lid) is probably the root of the adverb gtetcfr, 
similar. 

It signifies : 

1. A similarity ; as, gotmcb, godlike, i.e. resembling God. 



COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 39 

2. Means by which an object is obtained ; as, fiufltd), to be ob- 

tained by purchase. 

3. Ease in accomplishing any thing ; as, leferlid), legible. 

The affix fyaft, added to a noun, shews that the object is full of 
what the noun consists of; as, fefylerfyaft, containing faults; 
ftebert>aft, feverish ; jTatterf>aft, full of flattery. 
Compound adjectives; as, blutarm, very poor; jlocfjinfter, as dark 
as in a prison. 

When adjectives end in el, en, er, they lose e before I, n, r, when 
declined; as, 

1. golben, of gold; as, ber golbne 3fting, ein golbner 9Ung, golbner 9ving, 

the gold ring, a gold ring, gold ring. 

2. fmfter, dark ; as, bte ftnftre ©tube, eine pnftre ©tube, ftnjtre ©tube, 

the dark room, a dark room, dark room. 

3. eitet, vain; as, ba$ eitle SSeftreben, ein ettleS 23ejlreben, eitleS 23e- 

jfreben, the vain endeavour, a vain endeavour, vain endeavour. 
The student is referred to the declension of adjectives given 
with the declension of Nouns. 

§ 11. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. The regular comparison is formed as in English. 
Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 

jafym, tame jcu)mer, tamer sat>m(e)ft, tamest, 

jtolj, proud fbljer, prouder ftotjejt, proudest, 

runb, round tunber, rounder runbeft, roundest. 

These do not change their vowels a, o, u into a, 6, u. 
The case is the same with the following ; as, frot>, joyful ; gefunb, 
healthy ; glatt, smooth ; gerabe, straight ; fyofyl, hollow ; fafyl, bald ; 
farg, stingy; [a^m, lame; lo$, untied ; matt, faint; nacft, naked; rof), 
rude, raw ; toll, mad ; coll, full. 

The following examples change their vowels a, o, u, into a, 6, it, 
and lose the e before ft in the superlative ; as, 

Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 

(ang, long langer, longer (angft, longest, 

gtob, rude grober, ruder gtobft, rudest, 

jung, young junger, younger jimgjt, youngest, 

fcfyatf, sharp; t>orf>, high (fyofyer, higher); furj, short; trotf?, red; 
fdmxitj, black ; fc^road), weak; fd>mal, small; t?art, hard; fait, cold ; 
except nap, wet (na£er, nafjeft) ; fran!, ill (franfer, franfetf). 

The e before \t in the superlative is omitted for the sake of 
euphony in ber langjle, the longest ; bet fcinfle, the finest ; ber jiingfte, 
the youngest ; and in all adjectives which end in ig, licf>, bar, fad), 



40 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 

fam, cm, en, and et ; as, bet gndbigfte, the most merciful ; bet fyettlicfyfte, 
the most magnificent ; ber tfyeuetfte, the dearest. 

Adjectives lose e before et and el in the comparative ; as, bitter, 
bitter ; bittrer, more bitter ; ettel, vain ; eittet, more vain. 

If one adjective is followed by another in comparison, mefyt is 
used instead of the terminations et or t ; as, 2)ie ftttfcfye ift mefyt ton? 
aU reif, The cherry is more red than ripe, ©et tylann roat mefyt roetfe 
ate teid), The man was more wise than rich. 

The positive is sometimes preceded by the adverbs mefyt, more ; 
fef)t, very; ungemein, uncommonly; auf3etotbentticf;, extraordinary; 
t)ed)ft, most; ctufjetft, extremely; as, ©ie ift mefyt a,to£ ati flein, She is 
more tall than little ; (£t ift fefyt ftuo,, He is very clever ; ©ie ftnb 
ungemetn fybfftd), You are uncommonly polite. 

The comparative by the adverbs ml, much ; roett, much ; nod), 
still ; tmgtetd) unequally ; bet roeitem, much more ; as, ©te ftnb ttiel 
bejfet ati tcr;, You are much better than I ; 2>u btft roeit gtoj^et alt fte, 
Thou art much taller than she ; £>et 23aum ift nod) fyofyet alt bat S^aut, 
The tree is still higher than the house, &c. 

The superlative by the pronoun aliet, all, most, and forms one 
word ; as, ©et atletftemfte 2lpfet ift nic&t reif, The smallest apple is 
not ripe. 

The superlative is also preceded by am, auf'S (auf, bat), jum, tm ; 
as, am beften, best ; auf t or auf bat ©d)6nfte ; jum ©c^cnften, finest ; 
tm 9JUnbeften, in the least. 

2. The irregular comparison is formed as in English ; as, 
Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 

nafye, near nctyet, nearer bet, bie, bat ndcf;fte, the nearest am ndd>ften, nearest. 

balb, soon efyet, sooner am efyeften, soonest. 

gut, good beffet, better befte, the best am beften, best. 

t?te(, much mebt, more metfte, the most am metften, most 

roentg, little minbet, less mtnbefte, the least am mtnbeften, least. 

(roentget) (am roemgften) 

When the article in English is not used before the superlative, 
the word am is used in German, and the adjective ends in en ; as, 
am beften, best. 

The following adjectives have no comparative ; as, 
bet du£ete, the external bet duferfte, the most external, 

bet tnnere, the internal bet innerfre, the most internal. 

bet fjmtete, behind bet funtetjte, the most behind. 

bet ohete, above bet obetjle, the uppermost. 

bet untete, the low bet unterfte, the lowest. 

bet ootbete, before bet wtberfte, the foremost. 



VOCABULARIES OF ADJECTIVES. 41 






-e 



D 



o 


e> 


> 


*j 




^ 


a 


OJ 


OJ 


U 




M 


w 


co 


ad 








be 
q 


15 



« a iri §aai|liiSs||a 
|jaja^55sa2|Jaja|ja 

^^^ coif^^^s-is^^^.-^^^- 
? gf=~~ 1 Ss££ t s-|j<tM 



►a o 



7S .2 d « ti 5 u a> 2 ^ i" *■ ,2. 2 ',= ■- 43-3 



3 _ .... . . 

eg v<o 

a ■ j» . . . . .... 

+» y» 

«<- 

© j-» 

« x ::::.:::::: : 

Q> _ y=i 

II < | L 8 Jill . a -gl 

* S SMll s^S- .2 2 -1 1 



$= . 


CO 


- co 


W 


> 


> 




H-l 


H 


^ Si 


U 


^ Oh 


fa 


- 3 


•-5 


^. CD 

12 CO 


9 















■r: 








CO 




OJ 




















3 




*Q 


TJ 


pC 






3 


OJ 


rrl 






>> 


CO 


-»-> 


+j 


tn 


U 




O 


"7" 1 


Uh 


OJ 


9J 


.a 

s 
? 


co 

Fh 
O 


12 

03 

bC 

CO 


CO 

1 

CO 
Fh 


cd 

■a 

o 


bo 

c 

5 


CO 

_] 

OJ 

O 
1 


a 


2 


69 


O 

Fl 


g 






- g 5S*co^' S coco^ 3 ^ « ^^^^ 

^ B ^^g.^^ co ~< £ £ ^co 3 £ co co £ 

ijj I ^ " 'b a * * a g i a s e J a s | a 

ts ^ b § «! ° t 1 f « - J. 1 - «" S i J S % 

2 g © 'g 3 y S S § | 1 fe.f ^ § «fi .5 1 § 1 



CJ 

^ -, ^ 3 

X> CO ^ TO ^. rcJ 

?1-SS?o co^ ^£ 



M 



•- ^2 ^ 's_s^a. oS ^a «3 



2 •- ^"StSf^^.gS^^SE^^ 



H, co ^5 o ' b *» c c » _ . t £- „ - -°" H i s S s 

3 ^r>^^3333i-.^7Sv2^S3^r«Jt J j-. 

CT 1 ««CS8««««va>0»0>0>CJ3 1 D»0»0 



42 



VOCABULARIES OF ADJECTIVES. 



5 «S » 






O 






t!s £ 'B ^ -3 



cs s >o fl&Dgj <x> ""3 -9 «£ 



s § 



QJ 

• c >-rt Cu ■** "'-' i^ jj . >"-' "t? cL -»j ~ T " 1 -*^ O-t 






> i rv ~ - e^ **— <*- 3 +* 21 i-£h h-i i** .2: (*2- 

11 2 S i; e. ~ e <*> e *» ^: «+- ^tj^. ~ ^ «- « « cj >@- 



.t3 Ci- ^±2 e "tf <^ Ti ■>— • t>> .2J <5 «>>s C2- >-^ i~ *-^ ■.<*> -ii t3 t3 3 v* 
S^t$ 5 5 ? ^ § S «> S> J* J& »£ S5 ^ ~ 3 o .!=> £ 3 3 .3 
>0 yli jO yli vO vO yO ^j o o o O o o U— '-i_ t*__ 'j__ 'j— o— t*__ U— U— 



vO 



S « ^'o^^s 3 is ^3 5 

1 I -§ o 'S B< &,"§ ^ 3 J g J S 



o 



%*-•-» CJ.^-» *j ••^ .-w . _> j_j j_> j_^ j_> j,^ j_» ^j ^j ^j j^ «-^j 7^ t-* T-^ v> 

>£> v^ va ^> vO ^» X) o^> 00 ^» o ^ tt^ u— u.^ u^ *^- ^^ t*— tfc^ ^^ 



^> ys jO jO jO /j .^ooooooo ti— u— *-»— u— '-i— u— i^_ t^_ u— 



VOCABULARIES OF ADJECTIVES. 43 



§ 13 53 S p .2 _s 5n —• ^ 

i ^IirifilHlill .^--|*l I 

. S ^ t» -5 +j fan ,±2 M 0XJ g^rn d o O^-^-tJ <U ^ fl ^ +) 

d| £ ^ -5 ~ "1 o *r £ - * £ £ ^ § If is iT £ ^ & *? «r ~ 

«» (±i. ^ tt ^ rs 5^^f "P^ "J^ ••- <*> P vr> ^rr d £ 3 *c cr> <=^ 2^ •— 

c 

■sz 



yz> 



P +5 

O 

s 



I 






S ^ , j2 -TV'S w ^ a, a; -s O O V 



^?^ !J?^s,^a 



fe F b 2 






'O '3 S cs « c s-. td- 



d 

o 






Hi 






03 

t3 


S3 


!>-. 




d 




o 


03 


nd 




^-! 


Si 


Ft 


-C 


£ 


o 




O 


<X> 


Ph 


n 


d 

> 


P 


09 


c 


M 

V 

'5 


a> 


<D 


d 


be 


Oh 

r* . 


oj 


c 


o 


0) 


P 


o 


= 


2 


o 


o 


— 


H 


„ 






a 


a 


„ 


•o 


t> 


r; 






o 


*^ 




« 


3 






*3 


<5 

at 




53- 


,2. 
o 














J^V 
















« 


<r: 


W 


W 


en 


cr> 


en 









d 












05 












(h 




O 


d 






.O 






o 






ba 


s 


d 


ft 


_ 




T3 


h 


> 


£ 




d 


53 

in 

a 


3 
n 


d 



u 

p 


p 


"53 

d 

03 

OS. 

3 




1 


C 

£ 


O 

5 






a 

5-T 




S 

ft! 


e 






2^ 






S-) 




g s 


ES 


-a 


en 


« 


CTj 


<5) <5^ 


en- 


CT; 



5 OJ 

o +j "S So 

i a ^ ^ I § e -2 ^ — -2 

* 8,81^1 1111 HUM. 1 1 1 1 3 ;J I J 

#J « g i 1 1 1 :ff| f If I i 1 1 J I f I f 



44 



VOCABULARIES OF ADJECTIVES. 



to 



5 2 ^ 



bD 



O 02 

o 



~ -2 bC 



^H CO 



□Q 

03 

CO +j 

§ O 
3 S 

CO rd 



2 -d pd - 

rQ -H -P „ «>> ■+-> 



CC CO 02 

Ph-,2 CO 

^ ^ *S 

a * 

CD CD 

CD _d cj 

^ 13 rg 



6 



<s=- 



_ o 

%^-g 5 



a 
?h 

- ^ s ■§ 
13 8 a 

s ° & • § 

O 2 § &,^| 

fl C r O -p 
d g co „ 

2 £ co « <~ 



02 

CO • 

bJD 02 

^ .-Q 02 

2^2 

*% ji *& 



CO O 

.2 § 



CO 



CO Jh 
> ° 
CO rd 

■a 2^ 



02 «* 

co «5 

O ^ 
CO CO 

J** 






CO i£L 5 



g. £ j§. .5 s .ij r« :« 



r£ ^T ^ oi o <tl «F It 

-3 « « e ^ -3 i« w 

.ZZ. «-» SU— \H-> SH-f W~» *!_. «-, 



^ & s- S IT 

„o *» o o «-« 

^O J3- vC- -JS- -J3^ 

jo • - • • 

o* .... 



O CO CO 



CD f- 1 -" 
^ ^ ^ Rr5 ^ 



o 


CO 


02 

CO 


3 




£ 


o 


o 


r-S 


02 


£ 


CJ . TJ o 


Oh.2 
co is 



bL ' 



m 
CO « 



CO 
Cfi 



CO 



co 
o 9 



O fL, 

fl CO 

l C^ IT ^^ - ^ r2 



° r2 «2- en S- •.£{ 



« 02 






^o ^ o ^ *« -"o "S -^ -» 

-J> v£> v£3^ -X> >T> >.£> sO- -X> >£> 



ft* _ 

■g.3.sf 1 |t if I 

S-> jj -« «•« ^3 « <5 C v3 



CD <U 

S ^ M 

^ _2 fe 

1. s I- 



•a. 



Q 






S»3 



CO rd 



cd 
co 'o S 
.13 Js -2 

O ^ ?J 



f£ §11 

Ph &^ d co £ 



a ^« 



r§ 1 en @ .5 en lg ^5 « 

«g- w "^ ^s ^ c ^s -s ^ s 






be ?h co 

B c8 i> 



. s « g >> 



co 



g » 2> 8" ^ 

=s « « c v=: 



o 3 -i 






VOCABULARIES OF ADJECTIVES. 45 






9 

•"d U3 rj 

•-^ «3 

- +* i- m -u j-S O 

ffi ^ tc H) 



i? <4— ^ en n -w -w • «-» ^c- --» w» w* 



| 1 a a 1=11 g.| | | a s s 

III « S || 1 1 1 1 * 1 1 * | * | J «j iJ8 s 





o «-3 o rzi «-« ~o _£ "72 

££££££ee 



— 



>^ 



>o 







o 



3 ?H 



46 



VOCABULARIES OF ADJECTIVES. 



1 M fri* 



- 3 8 § "g 



^ 5 «• s ^SIN^g'Ss . 1 



en 

O 



3 ^1s?is«3 ? :g, a J 






», 



iff f s& tit issii til #■#£$£* 



jO 



a 



-B ^ 



.3 



B 2 ^ 2 J? 





b£ 
cd 






^ 






S-. 






o 


CD 


3 


o 






a 


Oh 


CD 




Fh 


cd 




O 

0) 




CD 


0Q 


01 


B 


CD 


s 

3 


CD 

o 


o 

s 


o 


o 


cd 


r^ 


EJ 


„ 


s 


«■ 


cfi 


S-T 


CJ 



* p * § h « I ■ i. § S*881II!'I * f . 



1 1 1 1 1 -I IS s s i i § I -a a s i ; * i i 

1 t es a £ I ,- j 3 i a * - - - a g | j g | s 
.i.i'g-fS' a _ el § 1 1, VS §f j J g s „- s „-.§ 

«o -li .;2 -2Z -3 va tfc p w w « 4) <4_ otjrsr3 3*.oo3S^ 



8 * I"- § - 1 Ml 1 i "Sf--f i g-8| | 8.JS 

»o ._» .is .^2 -3 VO t p w w « 5) tw_ Ojj33r3 00 3 ^ 

V 



VOCABULARIES OF ADJECTIVES. 47 




ft 1*3 1 u ill 



•e «* 



V S 2 "S 1 3 £ ,5 £_ g g g £ g ^ g £ £ jl IE *& £ S .: 






* 1 *l1 .a 1 * 1 s ^ I - 1 3 fl 6* S 1 ^ 



AS 



S >§> ^ «ti ^ .£ g £ £ « S *f g 1 § g S *sr « ig c^^ 

*2 2 s .1. S £. <^ *. g g g £ g g £ g § .a S g <s « ■- 



48 VOCABULARIES OF ADJECTIVES. 



.a . 

.22 'O aS • 

U , ^liilH.jlll .1 

! *? 1 * J li . ■ * ■ . fl 8 f 1 E ° - * 1 ■ * .S 1 






<D 



t w w qj " " — 

« • 



• 5 
"en 



^3 ^ ft oj 03 -P 



11 „ ■atllfi'l'l j ri I 



w 2 ~ 53 2 S 1* ^^ 

3 m £ -2 -g g« § .§ ^ ^ .S « 

rrtCO r! & b ft R iii 'g 

r^3 03 03 

' «* ,rt IB O m fl w 



I s a - 

ft o 



s i 







j_» ^£3^ »C^ «C> sO 



si. ^. ^i. ^. ^. ^^ —^ ^. 



VOCABULARIES OF ADJECTIVES. 



49 



o 
> 

a 

CD 

.a .a 



■M ^ +) ^ 



S5 « 

&Q "£ +- 



1 « "§ 1 S 

+Z CO t; g <JJ 

'2 ° ° S _3 

^ ? o -a <j- 

^ cu A •** cjs. 

- •*> - JO 

■5- & -s> g 1 

a s e e a 



03 c3 

.s s 

co © 

£ « ^2 

IS 3 g 

o3 5 _• 

+j o3 3 rfl 

g a, cr-'g 

qj co co +j 

o o w 

£ B B S 

^ <d <o fl 

*>"-£ rS S 

fw ■+->•♦-* CD 

;3 c£=. c~ _ 



»o «MO mo 



fcD cu -5 





a 


- 


CO 

v 

-_ 

- 


a 

- 


a; 


— 
*d 




be 




~ 


c 












e 


u 


ro 


4d 

aa 


3 

CO 




j. 

o 

a 

Cl) 


CO 

O 
= 


o 


00 

o 

a 




S 


--3 


3 


-3 




" 


D 


+J 


a 




~ 


o 




„ 










+d 




a> 


tSs: 




-6 


S-l 


ttl. 

B 


a 



^ !? -^> *rr 



*rr :_, *« „o 



*0 MO MO MO MO 



o o 

c5 OS 

S« co -3 

2 S S 

w o ^ 

3 t» 

► i = 

"•5 »£> "£ 



I -a 



> * 












t « 




s 




V 








<3) 


r3 

O 
3 









- 






CO 

3 



u 




3 
OJ 

-3 

CD 

fa 

3 


3 

3 

:? 

3- 


00 

3 
3 


Sh 
<D 

d 

CI) 


3 

.2 

3 
ID 


u 


o 


3 

= 


M 










+J 


n 




TO 


3 




3 

'-> 
u 


3 

i-T 

J— 




a 


3 




»3 




o 


-j 


rfi 


e 




t-i 


- 


B 


3 


£ 


S 


MB 


*« 


<z 


HO 



CD 

3^3 







K 


-3> 


3 


'd 






— 
3 

3 

be 

QJ 

^3 


-3 
3 

- 

.3 
CD 

o 


:o 

CO 

o 
3 

CD 

o 
Fl 


a 
a 

3 
3T 
.3 

C 


1 

3 

CD 

CD 


g 

'3 

3 
"3 
CD 




u 


CD 


a 


- 

O 


Eh 



a 


3 
93 




a 




tS 


a 


a 


•S 


- 


u 








o 




—• 




CD 


« 


/-_. 




TO 






c 


^o 


&l 






td 


vO 






u 


&i 


Sn 




£* 


~ 


-a 


a 


a 



5? c 

{> ** J3 
M i- ♦" 

fe bo ^ 
^ o bX)_ » 
co ^.S % c 

is ii 

q. CD «Si ■•-; 

o C-l $» 5> 



.= 



^ C8 
O O 



co 2J 



tlJll" 1 



CD 

„* -w CD O 

23 *fl <« fe 

^fl ^ "S ^ 

s 



S S 3 fl CD oj 



CO 

b£) cd —< 

«-fi I ill 

.q. « ^ TO « 3 S ^ 



„ -•3'£p^«S-£*e~ v £?2>TO3. J o3? 
*^ *~ ** MO " ' <:> ' <s ' <0 'OMO«o3s3iJ«) 



fj 



«5 , 

;fl c 

-I 

vo to. 



50 VOCABULARIES OF ADJECTIVES. 

5 s> tt «S ^ "£ M ^ 

^* lo ft* « CD *3 

fe v2- •*> .Si o >■£> c 

"" ft* ^"-\ CD /^v Q. O ft* 

a> >^> cd ^ w^e^ 



rP O r3 .0) 



o 



^ sT .. ~ S -«> rO 



• rH • l-( ' i»> K_ . cv ^ ft* U* r" 

■si a& g g * |S*t *| s § 

- © <l_, d _ -^« ^ « £» 5? d d ri 



& 



~ » O t^ O"^ n CD o Oft* •*» ~ O t* 2 ~ 

« rt «fl sD A 



» 2 S Si 3 a ^ « 



s£> 03 =S 



dk w C_i 



*° £* CD - _j .. 



-d •£ o o3 



U2 ' S_( SW _j 



bjo 



•S g ... I $3 •» §* d 

•eg ^ t i 1 & 1 1 sljs a> ^.r.l^3 

o^ rrt ^ ° -S ^ c^ .^ ° pa S d-^dS^S 

■^ . y 0! . +J ^*3 zi f-< -n p_4 r-_, •!-( ^O O O ■ * 

•S^o^^^csd ^^ ^^d-S 5 !s S « 

S» Ti CO ^^^CD Oft* -+J +Z ~* ^d_r3 w < -T 

-+J <n. ft* -i_T -^> -^> 5R rr-5.^ Sv^ft*^ r^l o ft* ft* ft* ft* 

Sl'llaie l' J? ^5= § § § § § 

p>-^ p « p 'S-s ft* 



■si i i a it^jr 



i-d ?h CD *J" >— < 

M-tfCD_T^ic: O s - / ^ 



o 


o 






CD 


d 
o 
o 

03 


p,«S 


c3 >-. 




o o 




„ •>— s 


»s> 



O CD 

^ I "-S . 1 



do O CD _k « -d SJ> .^ «« 

O ... . CD *- h^. 



o 




CD 




ft 


d 


£ 


03 


c3 


?H 


„ 


CD 


en 


CD 



o 


03 

d 






3 




a< 


•2 ^ 






CD 

s 

o 

d 
o 


o 

CD 


CO bJD ^» 
CD '^ t/2 




03 

d 


a 


03 


•H 5 „ c 




?-> 


03 


► 


s«-§ 


« 


vO 




a> 


ft* o C 


*s 


Si, 


w 


>£> >0 -X> 
« <3 « 




♦3 



VOCABULARIES OF ADJECTIVES. 51 



6 <u ^ 
1 S ^ =2 |;| 1 . 6 Z i . S | 3 1 



'35 


•-5 
-■d 


d 


02 

s 



X 


C/J 

o 
n 


,S 


V 

o 


o 


u 




> 


r0 


ed 


■•a 




? 



i 1 1 g s f | In I *fct 1 lUlf- 5 



a "5 

*1* * 1 «_**« 






111 I I 1 3 ! 1 1 s £ I 1 g>-s £"1 1 

* * -el 2 S 3 I -. "-=?l^ 5 * § <S 4 J I B - f 1 rf 



S> J. S- &■ s «3 § SSgg£S£ast.'§. , 5.= .3 



.HP K^ (T! C 



be 



o t, .a 9> 



2 'o °> o fl1 <-> br> <u 43 5 t- ^ o ^ on 

111*3 l^lilll^lr-alfla Ai 



r^_,^»O^^CS^JcjO.S0-Sar-J 



r=! es O 



1/2 bJD 



o § o-^^^^ o £ -r ^ fc > o aa ^ 2 era — .a o 

.5 r 
e2 



^O ^O >T) .O ^o yi» ya o «rf O o o ^> ^><5)C^<?)cr><S>^>'?5<y>0^<y)<^ 



52 ADJECTIVE. 

The following participles govern the dative. 
35etid)tet, announced to; empfofylen, recommended to; entgangen, 
escaped from ; entlaufen, run from ; entrcacbfen, grown out of; ent= 
jogen, deprived of; and others. 

The following govern the accusative. 

All adjectives expressing measures, weight, age, time, or the value 
of a thing by a numeral, govern the accusative case ; as, (£t iff met 
Sctfyre, etnen 9ftonat, unb etnen £ag alt, He is four years, a month, and a 
day old. 

Adjectives which do not fully express the nature of the object by 
themselves, and are not followed by an explanatory noun, require a 
verb which governs an infinitive ; all adjectives expressing possibility, 
(9Jtoa,tid)feit) ; facility, (Sletcbttgfeit) ; difficulty, (©cbrDtetigfeit) ; necessity, 
tfftotyroenbigfeit) ; duty, CPflicbt) ; desire, (23egterbe) ; and others ; as, 
2)a£ ift m6g(id> &u marf)en, That can "be made possible ; £>aS if! Uidjt 
ju bercerfftetftgen, That can be easily realized; £)aS ift fc^roer ju be- 
fcbreiben, That is difficult to describe ; (£t ift bereit ju felgen, He is 
ready to follow. 

Adverbs do not require ju before an infinitive ; as, ipter ij? gut 
roofjnen, One can live well here. 

Adjectives governing the same cases as in English ; as, (£t ij? 
be$ £ugen$ unfctytg, He is incapable of lying ; €s rcirb 3bren 2Bunfd)Ctt 
angemefien fetjn, It will be according to your wishes; ©te roaren lange 
»on bet <Btabt abroefenb, They were long absent from town. 

The English preposition to is often translated, gegen; as, @te 
rcaren 3We t>6fTicf> gegen micb, They were all polite to me. 

The following adjectives do not correspond in both languages. 



acbtfam auf, heedful of. 
aufmetffam auf, attentive to. 
bange yot, afraid of. 
befyattlicb auf, tenacious of. 
begtertg auf, desirous of. 
befcbcunt ubet, ashamed of. 
beritymt butcb, famous for. 
bofe auf Semanben, angry with one. 
bbfe auf <ltna$, angry at a thing, 
bltnb auf betben Stugen, blind of both 

eyes, 
bltnb gegen, blind to. 



bereit ju, ready for. 
eifetfucbtig auf, jealous of. 
eitel auf, vain of. 
ef}tget$tg auf, ambitious of. 
fdfytg ju, capable of. 
fvot? ubet, glad of. 
futd)tfam »oc, fearful of. 
ftud)tbat an, productive of. 
geijig nad), avaricious of. 
gierig auf, greedy of. 
geringer aU, inferior to. 
gut ju, good for. 



NUMERALS. 



53 



gefiifytfoS gegen, unfeeling towards. 

franf an, ill of. 

franf eon, sick of. 

leer an, void of. 

nac&lifjta, in, negligent of. 

often fur, open to. 

paffenb fur, adapted to. 

forgfam auf, careful of. 

fcblimm fur, fatal to. 

ffolj auf, proud of. 

ficber r-or, secure from. 

fd)ud>tern r-or, shy of. 

fparfam mit, sparing of. 



taub auf beiben Ofyren, deaf of both 
ears. 

ta ugticf) ju, fit for. 

unbefannt mit, unacquainted with. 

ungercaf? in, uncertain of. 

unfd>utbig an, innocent of. 

unroiffenb in, ignorant of. 

r-erliebt in, in love with, fond of. 

rerroanbt mit, related to. 

t-erfd)roenbertfd> mit, lavish of. 

j.irr(id) gegen, affectionate to, ten- 
der of. 

jroeifetyaft uber, dubious of. 



§ 14. THE NUMERALS. 

The numerals are divided into cardinals and ordinals. Ordinals 
are derived from cardinals, and answer to the question rote tnel ? how 
much? The fundamental cardinals are those from 1 to 10, and from 
100 to 1000; the others being formed from them by addition of 
gig, jig, and ft. 



THE CARDINAL NUMBERS. 



1, ein, einS. 

2, mxi. 

3, brei. 

4, pier. 

5, funf. 

6, fed)£. 

7, fieben. 

8, ad)t. 

9, neun. 

10, $ef>n. 

11, elf (eilO- 

12, iMf. 

13, breijefyn. 



14, tnerjefyn. 

15, funfjefm. 

16, ferf)$ef>n. 

17, fteborfiebenjebn. 

18, acfoefyn. 

19, neunjefyn. 

20, jroanjtg. 

21, ein unb jroanjig. 
30, breipig. 

; 40, Pier jig. 
1 50, funf jig. 
| 60, fecfoig. 
70, fteb or fiebenjig. 



80, acfoig. 
90, neunug. 

100, f>unbert. 

101, fyunbert unb ein (ems). 
200, jroeifyunbert. 

1000, taufenb. 
10000, jefjntaufenb. 
100000, fyunberttaufenb. 
1000000, jebn fjunbert taufenb, or eine 
sjmaion. .. 
1847, ein taufenb afyt fjunbert unb 
fieben unb rierjig. 



OBSERVATIONS ON THE CARDINALS. 

1. In counting, ein£ is used instead of ein ; but when a noun or 
another numeral folloAvs, ein is used ; as, ein ^funb ^ucfer, a pound of 
sugar ; ein unb jroanjig, one and twenty. 

2. ein, eine, ein, one, is declined like the indefinite article, if it stands 



54 CARDINAL NUMBERS. 

before a noun, or is used without an adjective ; as, em $ftcmn, eine 
$tau, em $mb ; one man, one woman, one child. 

The form is the same as the indefinite article ; as, em 33aum, eine 
23(ume, ein 2anb, a tree, a flower, a country ; but when used as a 
number it is to be pronounced longer than when as the indefinite 
article ; viz. the definite article ber, bie, ba$, the, compared with the 
demonstrative pronoun bit, bte, ba$, that. 

3. If the definite article, or the demonstrative pronoun, stands 
before it, it is declined like the adjective with the definite article, 
and is considered a noun, being written with a capital letter ; as, 
bet (£ine, bte Sine, ba$ Sine, the (masc), the (fern.), the (neut.). 

4. If not preceded by the definite article, and not followed by a 
noun, it is considered as a noun, and is declined like the adjective 
without an article ; as, gutet, gute, guteS ; as, Sinet nur if? bem £obe 
entgctngen, Only one has escaped death; Sine fyctt fein jpetj geroonnen, 
One has won his heart ; SinS rottb et nxfyfen, He will choose one 
thing. 

5. The numbers jroei or btet are declined, without distinction of 
gender, like the definite article bte in the plural ; as, IDie 5n>ei obet 
£)tet, The or those two or three ; 2)tefe obet jene 93tet obet ©ed)S, 
These or those four or six. But if they are not preceded by the 
definite article, or the demonstrative pronoun, the genitive plural is 
%miet, £)teiet, of two, of three ; and the dative plural is £n>eten, 
£>teien, to two, to three. 

6. If a demonstrative or a conjunctive possessive pronoun stands 
before the numbers jroet or btet, the latter are not declined ; as, £>te 
Stufiage jenet &n>et obet biefet btet sSeugen, The evidence of those two or 
of these three witnesses ; OJttt feinen neun £unben ging et ctuf bie 3«9k> 
He was going to hunt with his nine hounds. 

7. When two things or persons are spoken of, the word betbe, 
both, is used in preference to $n>et, and is declined like the plural of 
the adjective when declined without the definite article gute ; as, 
beibe §ufje, betbe ^afen, betbe Slugen, both feet, both noses, both eyes. 

8. If the word beibe is preceded by a conjunctive possessive pro- 
noun, or by the definite article, it is declined like the plural of the 
adjective with the definite article ; as, $Retne beiben 23tubet f>aben e$ 
gefagt, My two brothers have said it (supposed that one has only 
two brothers) ; £>te beiben ^ttye ft'nb wthuft rootben, The two cows 
have been sold. 

9. If any numeral is not followed by a noun, or preceded by a 
preposition, its dative has the termination of the dative plural of an 



CARDINAL NUMBERS. 55 

adjective, and is written with a capital letter ; as, ©te fnecht auf alien 
23teten, She crawls on all fours ; £>et tfutfrfjet fd>t mit Secbfen, Tlie 
coachman drives six. 

As the genitive plural cannot be expressed in this case, the pre- 
position i>on is used with the dative ; as, (St wat bet Sigentbiimet »on 
funf jpdufetn, He was the owner of five houses. 

The preposition ton is likewise used with the dative singular 
when, in English, the prepositions of 'or from are used. In that 
case it expresses a different meaning ; as, (£t fptad) ^on feinem £obe, 
He spoke of his death ; (St etfytelt ron feinem Watt? etnen s £ticf, He 
received a letter from his father. 

10. If the definite article of the feminine gender precedes the 
numbers, they are written with capital letters, and resemble nouns ; 
as, bte (SinS, bie jtoet, bie £>tet, the one, the two, the three ; and form 
a hundred with the neuter article ba$ ; as, ba£ jpunbett, the one hun- 
dred ; ba$ £aufenb, the one thousand. 

11. When counting or playing at cards, the plural is formed by 
the addition of en through all the cases ; as, wet (Einen, four ones ; 
btet 'fteunen, three nines. 

12. A noun is formed by the addition of et to a digit, and is 
used with the definite or with the indefinite article ; as, 

Sing, hex or ein (£inet, the or a single number ; PL bie (£tnet, the 

single numbers. 
Sing, bet or ein jtoetet, the or a whole two ; PL bte stoetet, the 

whole twos. 

13. Numbers which are formed by adding the affixes ling, fad), 
fdlrig, mat, and lei, are declinable, except those compounded with 
the affixes mat and let. 

ling bet Bnxtltng, the twin ; bet IDtetltng, a silver coin used at Ham- 
burgh ; bet ©tilting, trines ; bet <3ed)6ltng, a silver coin used 
at Hamburgh. 

fad) etnfacb, single; hvoeifad), double; bmfacfc, triple; tnetfad), 
fourfold. 

fdltta, etnfatttg, simple ; jroetfdlttg, twofold ; bteifdltta,, threefold. 

mal einmal, once ; jroetmal, twice ; btetmal, three times ; tnetmal, 
four times. 

let einetlei, one kind; jroetetlet, two kinds; bteietUi, three 

kinds, &c. 

14. If these numbers precede nouns which signify parts instead 
of the whole (pars pro toto), in that case those nouns are not de- 



56 



ORDINAL NUMBERS. 



clined in the plural ; as, ©ed$ tylann ©olbaten (not banner, man), 
six soldiers ; ^n>61f ©tucf Od)fen (not ©tucfe, pieces), twelve oxen. 

15. They have also no plural if they signify measure or weight ; 
as, 5l$t 23ud> papier (not 2$ucf)et, books), eight quires of paper ; $tet 
$uj? fyocb (not $u$e, feet), four feet high ; ©ret <pfunb unb ft'eben Son) 
$afe (not spfunbe, pounds ; not Sotfye, half ounces), three pounds and 
fourteen ounces of cheese ; 

Those in e are exceptions, and have a plural ; as, bie SBocfye, the 
week ; bie ©tunbe, the hour ; bie €tle, the yard ; bie 9M(e, the mile ; 
bet Xag, the day ; ba$ 3<u;t, the year ; bet $opf, the head ; and all 
names of coins ; as, bet ©cfciUmg, the shilling ; ba$ ^pfunb (<5t.), the 
pound. 

The word 3<*f)t is used in the singular and in the plural ; as, ©ie 
itf btetjefyn 3<*f)t or 34re alt, She is thirteen years old ; (£t febfe merjta, 
Safore (not 3a^r) in (Snglanb, He lived forty years in England ; (£t 
roofcnie jroet 3af)te in bonbon, He lived for two years in London. 

2. THE ORDTNAL NUMBERS. 

The ordinal numbers are declined like adjectives, with the defi- 
nite, the indefinite, and without an article. They are formed by 
adding te to the cardinals from the 1st to the 19th, and from the 
20th, fte ; except bet etfte instead of bet einte ; bet brttte instead of 
bet btette. 



1st, bet, bie, bat etfte. 

2d, jroette. 

3d, btitte. 

4th, tnette. 

5th, funfte. 

6th, fec&jfc. 

7th, ftebente. 

8th, a$te. 

9th, . . .... neunte. 

10th, jefntte. 

11th, etfte. 

12th, jrcftfte. 

13th, .. ... . . bteijetjnte. 

14th, tttetjefmte, 

15th, funfjefmte. 

16th, fecfoef>nte. 

17th, ft'eben jefynte. 

18th, ad)(t)5ef)nte. 



19th, bet, bie, ba$ neun&efmte. 

20th, jroanjigfte. 

21st, ein unb &n>an* 

Stgtfe. 

30th, bteigtgjfe. 

40th, tnet&tgjle. 

50th, funfjigfte. 

60th, fecfotgtfe. 

70th, ftebenjtQffe. * 

80th, ad)(t)5t9^e. 

90th, neunjtgfte. 

100th, f>unberttfe. 

101st, fntnbettunberffe. 

200th, jroetfyunbettfte. 

1000th, taufenbfte. 

1847th, taufenb a$t f>un= 

bett unb ft'eben 
unb tnetjiajte. 



NUMERAL PRONOUNS. 57 

1. If they are not followed by a noun, but preceded by the defi- 
nite article, they are written with a capital letter, and resemble 
nouns ; as, ber, bie, bat (£rjte, the first. £>er, bie, ba$ Slnbcre, the other, 
is used in the same way as ber, bie, ba$ C£r|Te. 

"2. Several nouns and adverbs are derived from the ordinals by 
means of the affixes tel (n>tl), f>att>, and n$ ; as, £>a$ 3n?ettel, 2>rittef, 
QSiertet, jSroanjigftet, the second, third, fourth, twentieth part ; anbert= 
fjatb, one and a half; brittefyatb, two and a half; jefyntefyalb, nine and 
a half; erftenS, firstly; jroeitenS, secondly ; brittenS, thirdly ; tuertentf, 
fourthly, &c. 

NUMERAL PRONOUNS. 

The following are declined as the adjective when without an 
article ; as, guter, gute, guteS. If not followed by a noun they are 
considered nouns ; as, We$, every thing ; ba$ WeS, the whole ; We, 
all (people) ; (EtntgeS, something ; (Eintge, some (people) few. 

Wet, atte, alleS, all, signifies the whole of a thing, and is followed 
by a noun; as, Wet 2Bei&en bliifyte, All the wheat was blooming; 
Me 2Irbett roar i>ergebltd>, All the work was in vain ; MeS ©etreibe ttf 
tfyeuer, All grain is dear; Wet btefer 2£ein, All this wine; We jene 
©elefyrfumfeit, All that learning; Me$ biefeS @elb, All this money. 

3<?ber, jebe, jebeS, rarely ; jegticfyer, jeroeber, each ; signify that all 
the things spoken of are of one kind. It is declined as the former, 
alter, c, e$, and preceded by the indefinite article em, but can be used 
without it ; as, (Sin jeber 9ftenfd) mug teiben, Every man is obliged to 
suffer ; %ebet 9Kenfcb begetjt Seller, Every human creature commits 
faults. 

(£tmge, some; (Stnige, some (few people); <5tntge$, something; 
etlicf)e, several ; &tlid>e, some ; (StUdjeS, something ; signify some part 
of the whole, and are declined without an article. These are only 
used in the plural, except their neuters take the terminations of the 
singular ; and when written with a capital letter they are considered 
nouns ; as, (£mtge 23bgel !6nnen nid)t fftegen, Some birds cannot fly ; 
(£$ roaren nut (Stntge ba, There were only few; (it fagte §mtge$ unb 
fcbroteg, He said something and was silent. 

9ftcmd)er, mcmdje, manned, many, signifies that several things of the 
same kind are to be considered single. It is declined like jeber, 
and used without a noun like it ; as, Wanfyet SRetcfje roirb arm unb 
member %me reid), Many a rich man becomes poor and many poor 
rich. 

Reiner, $eine, £ein$, none, not one, is used without a noun, and 



58 NUMERAL PRONOUNS. 

declined like the numeral (Stnet, (Sine, (£mS, one (person or thing). 
$etn, him, h'm, no, requires a noun, and is declined like the indefinite 
article em, cine, ein, a ; as, Reiner or fein ?Wenf4) ift unftetblirf), No one 
or no man is immortal. 

©dmmtlid), fdmmmcfyet, fdmmtlirfje, fdmmttid)e£, all together, is declined 
with the definite article, and can be used with the demonstrative 
pronoun this, biefer, biefe, btefeS ; as, £)et or biefer fdmmtficbe Setfud) if* 
gelungen, All this experiment together has succeeded ; 2)te fdmmtucbe 
or gefammte Samilie ift auSgegangen, All the family is gone out ; &a$ 
fdmmtticbe $etm6gen ft'nb fyunbert Stealer, The whole fortune is a hun- 
dred Thalers ; <£t fyat ©dmmtUcfceS tterloten, He has lost the whole. 

93te(, much ; rcenig, little ; mefyr, more ; roeniger, less ; have no in- 
flection if neither preceded by an article or pronoun ; as, (£t tyat met 
©elb, roenig $reube, mefyt Setben, He has much money, little joy, more 
suffering; (£t fyctt $iel unb ft'e f>aben 28enig, He has much and they 
have little. 

They are declined, when preceded by an article, pronoun, or 
preposition ; as, £)a$ fciele ^Betmogen rourbe auSgegeben, The great for- 
tune was spent; ©ein meteS (Mb nu£te U)m Sttcfcta, His great amount 
of money was no use to him ; Wlit $tetem fann mann ml n)un, One 
can do much with much property ; sjftit SBenigem mu£ man au$f ommen, 
One is obliged to manage with little fortune. 

&tvoa$, ttwat, something, some ; genug, enough ; 9?icbt$, nothing ; 
are changeable and uncertain, and are sometimes used as nouns ; 
as, 3$ fyabe £>tr <£tm$ m fagen, I have something to tell you; jjaben 
©ie £tn>a$ gefyott ? Have you beard any thing ? 

They are used as adverbs ; as, %$ rcerbe if>n urn etm$ ©elb bitten, 
I shall ask him for some money. 

SBtet and rcenig are applied in the same way. 

Sfti(k)t$ is the same as mrf)t etn>a$, not any thing ; and is used both 
as a noun and adverb, but is never declined ; as, 3$ t)abe 9}td)t$ 
geroonnen, I have gained nothing ; (£t fyatte nid)t$ mefyt $u fagen, He* 
had nothing more to say. 

The same rule applies to ganj, quite ; fyatb, half; mefyt, more ; 
lautet, only, nothing but ; as, (£t ift in ganj ^tanftetd) getetft, He has 
travelled through the whole of France ; ©te ftnb in fyalb 2lmettfa 
gercefen, They have been half through America ; (£r fprang sor (autet 
gteube, He was jumping with great joy. 

Derivations from pronouns are formed by adding the affixes hi, 
mat, fdlttg, and fctdb ; as, aftertet, all kinds ; feinerlet, no kind ; man= 
cfyerlei, many a kind; tnetetlei, various kinds; attentat, each time; 



PERSONAL PRONOUNS. .')'.> 



lis 5- i HI i $* . 

w 3: ^ *» .is s « <2 ^5 *: s ' 

o 2 S o ~ 5 E ~ . 2 ^ 

\C «**- 03 

.2* cc 

^P /> 03 s-. 

a S^S 

2 | & ~ c 1 I J 



E 




P w 




« 








•^ 
a 






-^ 






> 






p 


P 






*a 


22 




05 6~l 


p 


£ 




^> 


rS 


«i 









c 




In "*» 


■Si 


cc 


8 




p TO 


p 




p 





-a g 


P 



+» 




^> « , 


-t-j 


c 
p 




s 1 


13 











*<3 




ITS 


,0 


E 




< 






+j 




£ 




P *> 
« 




. »-, 




-2 G 


s 


GO 


u 


03 ^ 




O 

a 

■{3 


T3" 


^ CD 

52. .- 


e 


CO 





| 

'p 

OS 


CO O 


&-> 
3 


- 
> 


S 


£ © 


*? 


*3 

E 


«5 

*<3 


J O 

03 a 








bT"^ 3 


'e 


£ 




0. .V 

£r 

P-. X 


^» 




^ 





CO 



1 






'-P 


'•§ 


«^ 


=3 


p 
d 

E 


E 

E 




E 


00 
p 


53 1 


3" 




_c 


co 




& » 


e§ 





3 


p 
•1-1 


CD 


E 


> 


K 



l^"1i li°.!-l' 





P 5 ^ j2i ^ ^ jS 

6JD g 03 

to C 



03 o ^ P 

« Ph 03 P 5 






O -s 'S 5 2 *: .§ . ?»^ - 

^.Qrtpj^^ ^P^« JP ■ t! S, 






-*J 


Q 




^«o 


5«H 




| 


CO 




P 
O 


c§ . 


s 


Ji 


cu 




^ 


i 





< 


p 


n 



POJ Oco S g ,p -. I^O^ . 



^ p S J ° §* "P^ g « ~ £ 

ens £ s£fil iS. S- «• & 

<U 5 o3 

J) tC O 

Si 0> *i 

o _cj <u o 2 

si ^ |. £?.§ 

^P PO-UO) ►^.^^rv 



« -v 



— 



1# rf!5i «•«* 

PS ^>^>va^> ,r ti >e *& 

■+J Oh . . JE> = =3 3 

OO S §•— 000 

P *-> ° 2 

<s So ~ 

03^ So a p « 



CO O 

p p 



O 



S<sJ 3 CO 

O C4_ P 



P Sh -S 



8-3 *811 s § § § 



^Ofi<1 ^Ofl^ 



60 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

Remarks. 
The genitives meiner, beinet, fetnet, are frequently compounded 
with prepositions in the singular and the plural (as, fyalben, roegen, 
roiflen), by changing r into t in the singular, and by the addition of 
t in the plural. 

Sing, metnetfyatben, bemetfyalben, feinetfyatben, for my, thy, his part, 
memetroegen, betnetroegen, feinetroegen, on my, thy, his account. 
mcinctanltcn, beinetroillen, feinefroillen, for my, thy, his sake. 
PI. unfettfyatben, (£uren)atben, ifytet or Sfytetfyalben, f° r our ? your, their, 
or your part, 
unfettroegen, (£utem>egen, if)tet or 3f)tetn>egen, on our, your, their, 

or your account, 
unfetmxllert, Sutetnxtfen, ifjret or 3fyretn>itten, for our, your, their, 
or your sakes. 

The third person is also expressed by 3em<mb, some one ; 9?te= 
manb, no one ; <§:iner, €ine, £in$, one (or one thing) ; man, one, they; 
*$, it. 

The three first are only used in the singular, and are declined 
like the definite article : the two latter are not declined ; as, (£$ iff 
3emanb f>ter, There is some one here ; 3ft ka$ 3emanbc^ £unb ? Is 
that anybody's dog ? 3$ fyabe ^iemanbcn ( s 3ftemanb) gefragt, I have 
asked nobody ; (£mer t>on ifynen rcirb t?crurtf)Ctft rcetben, One of them 
will be sentenced ; tylan beflagte ft$ ubet ©ie, They complained of 
you ; (S3 tegnete bis jrootf Ufyr, It was raining till twelve o'clock. 

The datives mit, to me ; bit, to thee ; ifym, to him; tf)t, to her; 
un$, to us ; (£ud>, to you ; tfyrten (masc), to them ; 3fynen, to you ; 
ifynen (fern.), to them ; are explained in the following examples ; as, 
3$ fyctbe mit etnen Sput gefauft, I have bought a hat for myself; 3$ 
njerbe e$ £>tr morgen fagen, I shall tell you to-morrow ; (£$ fjat tfjm 
gegtucft, He has been successful ; (£r ttetf) ifyt, fparfam ju fctjn, He ad- 
vised her to be sparing ; ©ie gaben un$ em 23ud>, They gave us a * 
book; 2Bit rooltten £ud> n>of>t, We wished you well; 2)te $inb<>t 
btad)ten ttmen baS $teifd), The children brought them the meat ; 'Bit 
ttetfyrecben eS 3fynen, We promise it you ; <5ie frf>enften iJ>nen S3tobt, 
They gave them bread. 

The reflective pronouns mid), myself; bid), thyself; fid), himself, 
herself, itself; un$, ourselves ; (£ucb, yourselves ; ftcb, themselves ; 
are shewn in the following examples ; as, 3$ tufyme mid), I praise 
myself; £)u freuft 2>t<$, Thou rejoicest; €r fcbnetbet ftrf>, He cuts him- 
self; <5ie futd>tet ft<$, She is afraid ; (£g roitb ftcb balb dnbern, It will 



CONJUNCTIVE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 61 

soon change; 2Bir drgerten un£, We were angry; 3fyr rounbertet 
<g.ud), You were astonished ; (5ie roeigerten ft$, They refused ; (£r ant- 
roortete fetbft unb fein Smberer, He answered himself, and nobody 
else. 

£)u, thou, is used when speaking familiarly to inferiors or to 
children. <&ie, you, is used when speaking politely or to strangers. 
(£r, he ; fte, she ; 3fyt» y ou (plural) ; are used when a superior gives 
commands to his inferiors. Formerly it was used in writing and ad- 
dressing people in general ; as, £)u bift mein einjujer $reunb, Thou art 
my only friend ; £>u bift cin cuiteS $inb, Thou art a good child ; ©ie 
ft'nb mir rotftfommen, You are welcome to me ; (£r mug ficb eilen, You 
(he) must make haste ; <5ie mug fyeute nod) au$ meincn IDienften 
gefyen, You (she) must leave my house to-day ; 3fyt fer>b ein unban!= 
barer 9)?ann, You are an ungrateful man. 

CONJUNCTIVE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS 

are declined with a noun. 

Singular. 

1st Pers. Sing, mein, meine, mein, my. Plural, metne, my. 

2d bein, beine, bein, thy. .... beine, thy. 

3d fein, feine, fein, his. .... feine, his. 

3d fein, feine, fein, its. .... feine, its. 

3d U)r, ifyre, u)r, her. .... ifyre, her. 

3d 3t)t, 3*)te, 3^r, your. 3f>re, your. 

Although the pronoun unfer, (Suer, ifyr, is in itself a plural, it is 
used with nouns in both singular and plural. Its declension is 
shewn in the following examples. 

Plural. 

1st Pers. Sing, unfer, unfere, unfer, our. Plural, unfere, our. 

2d euer, eure, euer, your. .... eure, your. 

3d ifyr, ifyre, ifyr, their. .... u)re, their. 

Examples of the Singular of Conjunctive Possessive Pronouns. 
S. Sftein 25anb, my volume ; meine 2eud)te, my lantern ; mein 2Kef[er, 

my knife. 
PL 2fteine SBctnbe, my volumes ; meine 2eutf)ten, my lanterns ; meine 

Weffer, my knives. 
S. £)ein <2d?irm, thy umbrella ; beine SBiefe, thy meadow ; bein ^ferb, 

thy horse. 
PI. £)eine <5d)irme, thy umbrellas ; beine SBtefen, thy meadows ; beine 

<pferbe, thy horses. 



62 ABSOLUTE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

S. ©etn Setnb, his enemy ; fctne Sreunbinn, his friend ; fein £au$, 

his house. 
PL ©cine Seinbe, his enemies ; feine Sreunbinnen, his friends ; feine 

jpdufer, his houses. 
S. 3fyt ©djroager, her brother-in-law ; tyre ©tyroefter, her sister ; if>r 

£ieb, her song. 
PZ. Sfote ©imager, her brothers-in-law ; tyre ©tyroeftern, her sisters ; 

tyre Sieber, her songs. 
The above are declined in the singular like the indefinite article, 
and in the plural like the definite. 

Examples of the Plural of Conjunctive Possessive Pronouns. 
S. Unfer ©aft, our guest ; unfere %eit, our time ; unfer (£ifen, our iron. 
PI. Unfere ©dffe, our guests ; unfere Beiten, our times ; unfere (Sifen, 

our irons. 
S. Suer S&irty, your host ; eure $irtye, your church $ euer $etb, your 

field. 
PI. Sure SStrtye, your hosts ; eure $trtyen, your churches 5 eure Selber, 

your fields. 
S. %t)t Strctum, their dream ; tyre jpoffnung, their hope ; tyr 95ett, 

their bed. 
PI. Sfyre £rdume, their dreams ; tyre £offnungen, their hopes; tyre 

33etten, their beds. 

The above are declined like an adjective without the article, ex- 
cept in the neuter, which is the same as the masculine ; as, guter 
Straum, gute £>offhung, guteS 25ett, good dream, hope, bed : 

ABSOLUTE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS 

are declined without a noun. 

Singular. 

1st Pers. Sing, ber, bk, ba$ metntge, mine. Plural, bie memigen, mine. * 

2d betntge, thine bie beinigen, thine. 



3d feinige, his. 

3d tyrige, hers. 

3d 3fyrige, yours. 

3d feinige, its. 



bie feinigen, his. 
bie tyrigen, hers, 
bie 3f>rtgen, yours. 
bie feinigen, its. 



Plural. 
1st Pers. Sing, ber, bie, ba$ unfrige, ours. Plural, btejmfrigen, ours. 

2d eurtge, yours bie eurigen, yours. 

3d tyrige, theirs bie tyrigen, theirs. 



ABSOLUTE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 63 

The singular, when used with the neuter article, applies to pro- 
perty, but the plural refers to persons ; as, 

S. SEBtr fyaben ba$ Unfrtgc r-erloren, We have lost our property. 
PI. £>te Unfrtgen ftnb roofjl, Our family is (are) well. 

Examples of Conjunctive Possessive Pronouns, and Absolute Pos- 
sessive Pronouns, in the Singular and Plural, with or without a 
Noun. 
In the following examples the questions contain conjunctive 

possessive pronouns, while the answers have absolute possessive 

pronouns. 

Singular. 

1. 3tf e$ mem ©cfmeiber, metne 23ud)fe, mem 2cmb? Is it my tailor, 

my rifle, my land? (£$ i\t ber, bie, ba$ meintge, It is mine; 
Plural : <£$ ftnb bte meinigen, They are mine. 

2. $kr eS bcin 23acfet, betne Oftagb, betn ©tegel ? Was it thy baker, 

thy servant girl, thy seal ? &$ roar bcr, bte, ba$ betntge, It was 
thine ; Plural : <£$ roaren bie bemtgen, They were thine. 

3. 3ft eS fetn £>unb, feme £>anb, fetn 3etd)en ? Is it his dog, his hand, 

his sign? (£$ tft bet, bte, ba$ feintge, It is his; Plural: So fmb 
bte femtgen, They are his. 

3. 2Bar eg it?r £>egen, tf>re ©eft alt, if>r ©rf)Io§ ? Was it her dagger, 

her figure, her castle ? <£$ roar ber, bie, ba$ tfyrtge, It was hers ; 
Plural : (Sg roaren bie tfyrtgen, They were hers. 

4. 31* e* 3t>t 93ogel, 3*>te $rau, 3*>t ftiflen ? Is it your bird, your 

wife, your pillow ? (£$ ift ber, bte, ba$ 3t?ttge, It is yours ; PI. 
<£&■ ftnb bte 3fyrtgen, They are yours. 

Plural. 

1. 3Bctt e$ unfer better, unfete 25afe, unfer $enfter ? Was it our 

cousin, our cousin (f.), our window ? (5$ roar bcr, bte, ba$ 
unfrige, It was ours; Plural: £$ roaren bte unfrigen, They 
were ours. 

2. 3ft e^ euer 6rf)tad)ter, eure Slrbeit, euer ©etubbe ? Is it your butcher, 

your work, your vow? (5$ if! ber, bie, baS eurtgc, It is yours; 
Plural : <£$ ftnb bte eurigen, They are yours. 

3. SBctr eg if>r ©eflet, tfyre ©pur, tf>r 23ecfen ? Was it their seat, their 

trace, their basin. 
These absolute possessive pronouns are declined like the adjective 
with the definite article, and if written with a capital letter they are 
used as nouns. 



64 ABSOLUTE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

Remarks on Absolute Possessive Pronouns. 
If the absolute possessive pronouns are used after a verb, being 
preceded by a noun, they signify merely a possession or property 
of a person or thing, and take the terminations of the conjunc- 
tive possessive pronouns mein, bein, fein, like the adjective when 
occurring after the verb; as, bzx ffiann ift gut, The man is good. 

1. S. £)et ^nctbe ift mem, The boy is mine. 

PL £)ie $naben ft'nb mein, The boys are mine. 
PI. ©inb bie $naben mein ? Are the boys mine ? 

2. S. £)ie @an$ toax bein, The goose was thine. 
PI. JDie ©dttfe roctren bein, The geese were thine. 

3. S. 2>a$ $ag ift fein, The cask is his. 

PI. £He gaffer roaren fein, The casks were his. 
PI. SBctren bk $dffet fein ? Were the casks his ? 

The pronouns bet, bie, ba$ metntge, beintge, fetnige, tfjtige, 3f)tige, 
are declined like the adjective with the definite article, in the sing, 
and pi. ; but when the neuter article precedes them, and when they 
are written with a capital letter, they are not declined in the plural. 
They then refer to property; as, 3d) fyabe ba$ 9fteinige settoren, I have 
lost my property ; £>u tjaft ba$ £einige *>etfd>enft, Thou hast given 
away thy property ; (£t hat ba$ ©eintge fcetfcfyroenbet, He has squan- 
dered away his property; ©ie fyat ba$ Sfyrige ernwtet, She has 
expected her property; ©ie fyaben ba$ 3fyttge erfyatten, You have 
received your property ; 2Bit fyctben ba$ Unfrige retfauft, We have 
sold our property ; 3fyt fyabt ba$ (£urige ttetpctcfytet, You have let your 
property by lease ; ©ie fyctben ba$ 3(?ttge ererbt, They have inherited 
their property. 

The preposition t>on (of) with the dative of the personal pronouns 
are used in German where the absolute possessive pronouns would 
be used in English ; as, (£t ift ein $ern>anbtet tton mir, He is a relative 
of mine ; ©ie xtat eine £ante son bit, She was an aunt of yours ; (£r 
roar ein ©efpiele son ifym, He was a playfellow of his; (Sie voat eine 
Steunbinn j?on tfynen, She was a friend of theirs ; ©ie roaren Wiener son 
Sfynen, They were valets of yours. 

When, in English, the conjunctive possessive pronouns are used 
before a noun, the Germans use the definite article ; as, <£t fyat feine 
gctfyne im (in bem) $Kunb, He has no teeth in his mouth ; <Sie Fann 
nicht butd) bie 9Me atfymen, She cannot breathe through her nose ; <£r 
tyatte ©taub in ben 5lugen, He had dust in his eyes. 

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

The demonstrative pronouns refer to the presence or absence of 



DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 65 

a person or thing. The principal are : berjentge, bicjentge, ba$jento,e, 
that or he; biejenio,en, those; betfelbe, btefetbe, baffelbe, the same; 
btefelben, the same. 

These may be abbreviated into bcr, bie, bat, that. PI. bie, those. 

They are declined with the definite article, in the same way as an 

adjective with the definite article. They are followed either by a 

noun or the relative pronoun rcetcfter, roeld>c, roeldjeS. 

©crjenige (bcr) £fyetf etneS S5ucf)e$, roetcber gut a,efd)rieben if!, rctrb am 

meif!en gelefen, The part of a book which is well written is 

mostly read. 

£>tejenio,e (bie) £)ame, roettfje ©ie fafyen, tft mctne <5d>n>ef!cr, The lady 

whom you saw is my sister. 
2)a$jento,e (bat) Spaut, roetcfjeS am ndd)f!en Uegt, roerbe id) faufen, The 

house situated next this I shall buy. 
X)at (baffetbe) n>a*> (roetd>c^) id) je£t fagc, if! rc>al;r, That which I now 

say is true. 
3d? roiirbe baffetbe getfyan fyaben, I should have done the same thing. 
Derjenige (ber) n>e(tf>et am rcutbigfien if!, foil ct fyaben, He who is most 
worthy shall have it. 

btefet, btefe, btefeS, (bteS, biefj)> this ; btefe, these. 

ber, bie, bat, . . . . that ; bie, those. 

jener, jene, jeneS, . . . . that ; jene, those. 

fotdjer, folcfje, {o\d)et, . . . . such; fotcfye, such. 

These are all used like the adjective when declined without an 

article. Such a, is always rendered in German by a such ; as, tin 

\old)et 25ud>, such a book. 

If the pronoun btefet btefe, biefeS, is not followed by a noun, or 
stands at the end of a sentence, biet or btep (this, these) is used 
instead of btefet, biefe, btefet, btefe, without any distinction of gender 
in the singular and plural ; as, 



Qiet (btefO ift mein 25tubet, This is 

my brother. 
X)iet if! eine £t(ie, This is a lily. 
X)iet if! ein tUinct S^aut, This is a 

small house. 
3ft biet (bat) 3fr,t greunb ? Is this 

your friend ? 
SBeffen ©atten tftbteS (bat)? Whose 

garden is this? 



£>te$ ft'nb meine 23tubet, These are 

my brothers. 
X)iet ft'nb Allien, These are lilies. 
£)te$ ftnb Heine Jipdufet, These are 

small houses, 
©tnb bieS (bat) 3f)te ^reunbe ? Are 

these your friends ? 
©cfien ©dtten ft'nb biet (bat)? 

Whose gardens are these ? 



The following will shew the difference in the declension of the 
demonstrative pronoun when occurring with or without a noun. 

F 



66 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

Singular. With the noun. Plural. 
N. bcr, bte, bctS, that; tie, those. 

G. beffen, beten, beffen, beten, 

D. bem, bet, bem, ben, 

A. ben, bte, bctf, btc. 

This pronoun is used instead of the relative pronoun rcelcbet, 
nx'ld>e, roeldjeS (who, which), and is an abbreviation of it. It is also 
preceded by tcr;, bu, er, rotr, ttjr, <Ste, (you) ; and followed by roetc^ev, 
roelcbe, roekbeS. 
(£t ttanf ben 5Betn, ben (roetcben) id) tfym »orfe§te, He drank the wine, 

(which) I placed before him. 
<l$ ftnb bte S5lumen, bte (roelcbe) id) 3fynen gegeben fyabe, Those are the 

flowers (which) I have given to you. 
£ier tfr bag SBrobt, ba$ (roelcfceS) id) gefauft babe, Here is the bread 

(which) I have bought. 
3d), bcic id) ii)m banfte, routbe ntdjt beacfyter, I, who thanked him, was not 
noticed. 

Singular. Without the noun. Plural. 

N. ber, bie, ba$, bte. 

G. be$, beffen, beren, beS, beffen, beret. 

D. bem, bet, bem, ben, benen. 

A. ben, bte, ba$, bte. 

RELATIVE PRONOUNS 

refer to persons or things already mentioned, which need not 
have connection with the whole sentence, and may be considered as 
adjectives or participles in another form. They are therefore both 
pronouns and conjunctions. 

Declension of Relative Pronouns. 
Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. 

N. rcelcbet, 



ndit,' X N - mW ' W ! 1 ° . ] N. rcer, who, • ) N. m«, what. . 

Zwl X G. tafct, I G. rceffen, whose, I G " mvm > °^ om > 

roetcbeS, S ' ' 

redeem, -x 

roelcbet, y I). roeldjen, \ D. rcem,to whom, I D. n>oju,towhatend. 

roeldjem, ) -* 

\ A. roelcbe, j- A. roen, whom, i A. roaS, what. 



G. rcelcbeS, 
roeldjet, 
roetcbeS, 

D. rcelcbem, 



A. roelcben 
roelcbe, 
roelcbet 



RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 67 

SBefdjer, roctcfc*, roeIcf>e$, is preceded by ber, bit?, ba$ (he, she, that). 
Its abbreviation is roet, who, both masculine and feminine. 

The genitive of the singular of roeldjer, roelcfye, roefcf>eS, is only used 
when it is connected with the proper names of persons to whose 
qualities it refers ; as, 

Gicero, roetd)e£ cjro^en 3Rebner$ Scbriften tch befi^c, nxrb niemate ate ©chrtff^ 

ftetfcr crfcfjt roerben, Cicero, the works of which great orator I 

possess, will never be equalled as an author. 

2)ef[en, beren, beffen, of whom or which, whose, and the plural 

beren (of whom or which, w T hose), are used, instead of the genitives 

rcetcbeS, n>eld>er, roeld>eS; as, 

£)er ©irtner, beflen fttnber tch ftmne, ift fyeute gejtorben, That gardener, 

whose children I know, has died to-day. 
£>te 3Mume, beren flatter erfdjetnen, tjt roeifj, That flower, the leaves of 

which appear, is white. 
2)aS$inb, beffen §ttern fefyr reid> ftnb, ift jetyn 3afyre alt, That child, whose 
parents are very rich, is ten years old. 
2Betd>er, roelche, .roetcheS, is followed by a noun, and is declined like 
the adjective without the article; as, cjruner, a, tune, a, nines, green. 
It may be used indiscriminately instead of ber, bte, ba$. 

The pronoun roer, who, is not followed by a noun, 
(ber, roetcber) 3Ber ^Pfftc&ten tjat, (ber) mu$ ft'e crfutlen, He who has duties 
is obliged to fulfil them. 
SBefien 23uch eS iff, roei£ tch nicfyt, I do not know whose 
book it is. 
(bem, roeldjem) 5Bem er fetn @elb fytnterlafien rcirb, iyt frfjon befannt, It is 

already known to whom he leaves his money, 
(bte, roe(d)e) 5Ben er fyetratfyen n>irb, beren $ater ift ©efanbter, The father 
of her whom he will marry is an Ambassador. 
Its genitive was formerly abbreviated into rocp (of whom), and is 
followed by bep (of him); instead of rcefien and befien ; as, 
38e$ bag jjerj »otI tjt, beg gefyt ber 9)iunb uber, Where the heart is full 
the mouth overfloweth. 
The pronoun roaS, what, is used as a relative pronoun ; as, 
2Ba$ fyter tit, (bag) ift metn, What is here, is mine. 
3d) roeifj , rooc<on (pon n>em) er fprtcbt, I know of whom he speaks, 
©agen ©ie mtr, roofron ®ie efien rootfen, Tell me of what you like 

to eat. 
(£r rougte rooju er bie $uo,et gebraudjen !onnte, He knew to what end 

he was able to use the bullet. 
5Ba$ id) gefagt fyaU, ba$ ift roaf% What I have said is true. 
f2 



68 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS 

When the relative pronoun roaS (what) expresses the end or 
purpose, rooju (to what end) is used as its dative. 

It is sometimes preceded by ba$ ; as, 
2)a£, roaS er *>orfd>(ug, roar ntcbt ratfyfam, .What (that what) he proposed 
was not advisable. 

INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 

Interrogative pronouns are declined like the relative pronouns 
roer? who? roaS? what? but are never used as adjectives before 
nouns, as in English ; as, SBelcber ©freit iff gcfd)lid)tet rcorben (not roas 
©treit) ? What quarrel has been settled ? SBeld)? ©efafyt f>at er aufc 
geftanben (not roaS ©efafyr) ? What danger has he endured? SBetcbeS 
23erm6a,en fyat er fyinrerlaffen (not roaS 93e.rm6gen) ? What fortune has 
he left? 

Declension. 

N. roer? who? roaS? what? 

G. roeffen? whose? roooon? of whom or what? 

D. roem? to whom? rooju? to what end? 

A. roen ? whom ? roaS ? what ? 

Neither of them have a plural, and roer applies both to the femi- 
nine and masculine genders. The genitive of roer only is followed 
by a noun. 

2Ber ift f)ier ? Who is here ? SBeflen 5fcif& ^abel, 23anb, ift ba$ ? 
Whose table, needle, ribband, is that? SBem fyat er e$ gefa^t ? 
To whom has he said it? Sen roirft £)u befucf^en? Whom are 
you going to visit ? 
2Ba$ ift bort? What is there? 5Beoon rcbet man? Of whom or 
of what do they speak? SBoju befennt er ftch? (To) what does 
he confess ? 3Ba$ or 2£ie inet bejafyten ©te fur bag Sleifcfc ? What 
or How much do you pay for the meat ? 

The English expression, What sort of, What kind of, is always 
rendered in German by roaS fur ein, eine, ein (what for a), or by roaS 
fur (what for) in the singular, and roaS fur in the plural ; as, 2£a6 
fur einen ©artcn, roaS fur eine $a£e, roaS fur ein ©djaufpteujauS, fyaben ©ie 
gefefyen ? What sort of garden, what sort of cat, what sort of theatre 
have you seen ? 58aS fur Setter roar e$ geftern ? What sort of weather 
was it yesterday? SaS fur ©drren, $a§en, ©cbaufpielfyaufer, fyaben ©te 
gefefyen ? What sort (kind) of gardens, cats, theatres, have you 
seen? 

Contractions are formed by the combination of the adverbs roo, 



INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. ()!i 

where; b«, there; with the prepositions burd), through; uber, over; 
nacb, after ; aug, out ; with the interposition of the letter r, except 
rooburd) (not roorburd)) ; as, (buret) roelcbeg) rooburcb, whereby, by what 
means ; roortiber (uber reelcbes), about what ; (nacb n\'ld>em, nacb rocm) 
n>ornacb, concerning what ; rooraug (aug roetcbem), whence, on what ac- 
count ; roortn (in roetd)em), wherein ; rooran (an roelcbem), whereon ; as, 

3cf? fann ntrfjt begretfen, rcoburcb; er fo arm cjeroorben iff, I cannot com- 
prehend by what means he has become so poor. 

Sr rcujjte, roortiber ber 2tnbere bofe rccrben roiirbe, He knew why the 
other would become angry. 

Sr rannte bag s&iel, roornad) cr jieten fottte, He knew the object at which 
he should aim. 

3Boraug fjat er bag gefcbloffcn ?• Whence has he concluded that ? 

5Boran erfennen Ste bag %>ud) ? How do you know that booK ? 

3Ber=aud>, whoever ; roag^aucr;, whatever ; rcc^aud), wherever ; rcie^ 
aucb, as also, much ; are always separated in a sentence ; as, 
2Ber eg aud) tt>un roirb, eg rotrb ifym ntcbt cjettngen, Whoever will do it 

will not succeed. 
SBag jie aucb fagen rcerben, ifl roafjr, Whatever they say will be true. 
5Co er aud> iff, tft er unjufrteben, Wherever he be he is dissatisfied. 
3Bte fefyr ft'e mid) aud) r>erfotcjen, fo roerben ©te mid) bod; ntd)t erretcben, As 

much as they pursue me, yet they will not reach me. 

The following are used both as adjectives and pronouns, but 
when not followed by a noun are considered as nouns ; as, alter, alle, 
a(fe$, all ; jeber, jebe, jebeg, each ; trgenb etn, eine, etn, any ; irgenb Siner, 
Sine, Sing, some one ; PI. Stntcje, some ; betbe, both ; Siner, Sine, 
Sing eon SSetben, one of either ; etn jeber, eine jebe, ein jebeg, each (of), 
every one ; manner, mancbe, mandjeg, many ; ftetner, $etne, $etng ron 
25etben, neither of them ; fetn, feine, fetn, no ; Reiner, fteine, $eing, 
none ; etn anberer, eine anbere, etn anbereg, another ; PI. anbere, others ; 
etroag, some ; roenta,, little ; met, much ; foldjer, fotdie, fotcbeg, such. 

From these the following are formed, which are used as nouns 
only ; as, 3emanb, anybody, some one, somebody ; 3t'bermann, every 
one, everybody ; Meg, everything ; Reiner, £eine, $etng, no one, 
nobody, nothing ; Siner, Sine, Sing, one, one thing ; 9?tcbtg, nothing ; 
Sm>ag, anything, something ; SBentcjeg, few words ; SSteleg, (much) 
many words, many things ; 3eber, each ; £>afie(be, the same thing. 

9)?an (one) is used when, in English, the third person of the 
plural, they, one, or you, would be employed. 



70 AUXILIARY VERBS. 

Examples. 
Wan fagt, ber ^onta, fet> tobt, They say the king is dead. 
tylan follte auffyoren, They should leave off. 
9jRcm t)at e$ ntd)t getjort, They have not heard it. 
Wan ift rticf)t immer aufgelegt ju arbeiten, One is not always inclined 

to work. 
Wan fonntc nid)t fyoren, n>a$ ft'e fagten, One could not hear what they 

said. 
Wan fann e$ faum ajaubcn, One can hardly believe it. 
Wan fann in £>eutfd}lanb bte 93ud)er rooi?lfei( bcfommcn, You can get 

books cheap in Germany. 
Wan tann fur fed>$ pfennig nad> Qfyetfea fasten, You can go to Chelsea 

for sixpence. 
Wan fann einen guten Rod fur brei ^funb ©terling faufen, You can 

buy a good coat for three pounds. 



§ 16. AUXILIARY VERBS. 

Auxiliary Verbs are so called when they are used with the past 
participle or infinitive of other verbs for the purpose of forming 
tenses. 

They are considered as ordinary verbs when used by themselves ; 
as, 3<$ fyabe ben £unb, I have the dog ; 3$ bin cin $nabe, I am a 
boy ; 3d) roerbe ein Ufyrmacfyer, I become a watchmaker. 

AUXILIARY VERBS OF TENSES. 

jpaben, to have. 
Infinitives (Mgemeine ©predjart). | Participles (OJftttelrcort). 
Present', jpaben, to have. ! Present, £>abenb, having (in= 

bem man fyat, whilst 
one has). 
Past, (Btyabt, had. 

Compound, &e\)abt fyabenb, having 
had (or nad>bem 
man Qtfyabtfyat, after 
having had). 

In all verbs, when used in ordinary conversation, the compound 
participle is more generally expressed by nacbbem. 



Compound, ©efyabt fyaben, to have 
had. 



AUXILIARY VERBS OF TENSES. 



71 



Present (©egenrcart). 



Indicative (SSejUmmte (Screcban). 


Subjiincticc (Ungerciffe ©prednin). 


id) fyafo, I have. 




id) t?abe, I may have. 


bu f)Oft 




bu bflbeft 


er (fte, e£, man) fjat 


et fyctbe 


rcir f>abcn 




n>it bctben 


tbr babt 




it>r babet 


fte fyaben 




fte fyaben 




Imperfect (Sung* 


U $3ergangent;eit). 


icb f?attc, I had. 




id) fydtre, I might have. 


bu barreft 




bu f)dttejt 


er batte 




er t>dttc 


n>ir batten 




rcir batten 


i\)t fatter 




tbr fydrtet 


fte fatten. 


Perfect (<Be 


fte fatten 
rgangenfyett). 


id) tjabe gefyabt, I have had. 


id) fyabe gefyabr, I may have had. 


(like the Present.) 


(like the Present.) 



Pluperfect (£dngfte $ergcmgenbett). 

id) fyarte gefyabt, I had had. | icb fydtre gebctbr, I might have had. 

(like the Imperfect.) (like the Imperfect.) 

Future (©egenrcdrtige Bufttnft). 



icb rcerbe fyaben, I shall have. 

bu roirft fyctben 

er rcirb fyaben 

»w rcerben fyaben 

tf>r roerbet fyaben 

fte rcerben fyaben 



icb rcerbe fyaben, I shall have. 

bu rcerbeft fyaben 

er rcerbe fyaben 

roir rcerben b<*ben 

i\)v rcerbet fyaben 

fte rcerben fyaben 



Past Future OBergangene 3 utun ft). 



icb rcerbe gebabt fjaben, I shall have 
had. 
(like the first Future.) 

Conditional (©egenrcdrtige bebin= 

genbe £ett). 
icb rcurbe fyaben, I should have, 
bu rcurbeft (jaben 
er rcurbe fyaben 
rcir rcur ben baton 
if>r tcurbet fyaben 
\k icurben fjaben 



icb rcerbe gebabt fyaben, I shall have 
had. 
(like the first Future.) 

Past Conditional OBergangene 

bebingenbe 3dt). 

icb rcurbe gefyabt tyabcn, I should 

have had. 

(like the first Conditional.) 



72 



AUXILIARY VERBS OF TENSES. 



Imperative (23efef)Ienbe ©presort). 



Singular. 
fyabe (bu), have (thou). 
J)abe er, (have he), let him have. 



Plural, 
fyaben rotr, (have we), let us have. 
fyabt (ifyr), have (ye), 
fyaben fte, (have they), let them have. 

Singular ((£tnfyeit). 
Spabe (bu) ba$ @elb, Have (thou) the money, 
jpaben ©ie ©ebulb, Have (you) patience. 
£a£ tfyn bte 35lume fyaben, Let him have the flower. 
2a£ unS 35etbe 3faum fyaben, Let both of us have room. 

Plural CWeMeit). 
%a$t or 2affct unS bte 23ud)er fyaben, Let us have the books. 
Spabt (3f>r) ©ebulb, Have (ye) patience. 
%a$t or Saffet fie 25ucber fyaben, Let them have books. 
£affen ©ie un£ bte 2luSftcfyt fjaben, Let us have the view. 





©enn, 


to be. 


Infinitives. 




Participles. 


Present, fewn, to be. 




Present, fejjenb, being (inbem 


Compound, gewefen fetjn, to 


have 


man ijj, whilst one 


been. 




is). 


Future, feim roerben, to be 


Pasf, geroefen, been. 


about to be. 




Compound, a,eroefen fewenb, having 
been (nacbbem man 
geroefen tft, after 
having been). 




Present. 


Indicative. 




Subjunctive. 


tcf) bin, I am. 




id) fen, I may be. 


bu bift 




bu fet)ff 


er iji 




er fet) 


roir ft'nb 




rotr feijen 


ifyr fet)b 




U)r fe»b 


fte ft'nb 




fte feijen 




Imperfect. 


id) roar, I was. 




id) rodre, I might be. 


bu roarft 




bu rodreft 


er roar 




er rodre 


rotr roaren 




rotr n>dren 


it>r n>aret (roart) 




tfyr rodref 


fie n>aren 




fte rodren 



AUXILIARY VERBS OF TENSES. 

Perfect. 



Indicative. 
id) bin gerocfen, I have been, 
(like the Present.) 

id) roar gercefen, I had been, 
(like the Imperfect.) 

id) roerbe fewn, I shall be. 
(like the Future.) 



Subjunctive. 

id) fen gerocfen, I may have been. 

(like the Present.) 



Pluperfect. 

| id) roarc gerocfen, I might have been, 
(like the Imperfect.) 

Future. 

id) roerbe fenn, I shall be. 
(like the Future.) 

Past Future. 



id) roerbe geroefen fewn, I shall have 
been, 
(like the Past Future.) 



id) roerbe gerocfen fewn, I shall have 
been, 
(like the Past Future.) 



Conditional, 
id) rourbe fewn, I should be. 
(like the Conditional.) 



Singidar. 
fet) (bu), be (thou). 
fct> (cr), be (he), let him be. 



Past Conditional, 
id) rourbc gerocfen fewn, I should 
have been, 
(like the Past Conditional.) 

Imperative. 

Plural. 
fenen roir, let us be. 
fei;b (if>r), be (ye). 
feoen fie, let them be. 

The present participles fenenb or roefenb are mostly used as com- 
pounds ; as, bafenenb, being there ; abroefenb, being absent. 

Examples of the Imperative. 
Singular. 
©ew fo gut, Be so kind. 
©e«en ©te fo giutg, Be so kind. 
£ajj ifjn fletfug fewn, Let him be industrious. 

©ei; (£r ntcfct fo grob, Be (you) not so rude (in addressing a peasant). 
©ct) ©te rufyig, Be (you) quiet (in addressing a countrywoman or 
a servant girl). 

SaJTet or 2agt un$ aufmerffam fetjn, Let us be attentive. 
©ct)b ruing, Be quiet. 

2affet or tag t fie fparfam fettn, Let them be sparing. 
Sajfen ©ie fie etnig fet)n, Let (you) them be unanimous. 



74 



AUXILIARY VERBS OF TENSES. 





SBetben, to become. 


Infinitives. 




Participles. 


Present, roetben, to become. 


Present, roetbenb, becoming 


Compound, gerootben fewt 


t, to have 


(inbem man tritb, 


become. 




whilst one be- 


Future, roerben rcetben, to be 


comes). 


about to become. 


Past, gercotben, become. 






Compound, gercotben fewenb, hav- 






ing become (nad)= 






bem man gewotben 






ift, after having 






become). 




Present. 


Indicative. 




Subjunctive. 


id) mtbe, I become. 




id) roetbe, I may become. 


bu rottft 




bu n?crbefl 


et roirb 




et rcerbe 


rott rcetben 




rcit rcetben 


ik nx-tbet 




if>r n^erbet 


fte roetben 




fte roetben 




Imperfect. 


id? rcutbe, I became. 




id) tmitbe, I might become. 


bu routbeft 




bu routbeft 


et rcutbe 




et rcurbe 


toit routben 




nut routben 


it>r routbet 




i(>r routbet 


fte tmttben 




fte tmttben 




Perfect. 


id) bin gerootben, I have become. 


id) fe» gercotben, I may have be r 


(like the Present of id) bin.) 


come. 






(like the Present of id) few,) 




Plupi 


jrfect. 



id) mat gerootben, I had become, 
(like the Imperfect of id) roar.) 



id) nxtte gercotben, I might have 

become, 
(like the Imperfect of id) nxtte.) 

Future. 

id) tt>etbe rcetben, I shall become, i id) metbe rcetben, I shall become. 

(like the Future.) (like the Future.) 



REGULAR ACTIVE OR TRANSITIVE VERB. 75 

Past Put lire. 



Indicative, 
id) roerbe geroorben fetjn, I shall have 
become, 
(like the Past Future.) 

Conditional. 
id) rourbe roerben, I should become. 



Subjunctive. 
i<$ roerbe geroorben fe»;n, I shall have 
become, 
(like the Past Future.) 



(like the Conditional.) 

Imperative. 



Past Conditional. 
ich rcutbe geroorben fetjn, I should 
have become, 
(like the Past Conditional.) 



roetbe (bu), become (thou), 
rcerbe (cr), let him become. 



roerben roir, let us become, 
rocrbet (ifyr), become (ye), 
roerben fie, let them become. 



The augment ge of the past participle, when used with another 
past participle as an auxiliary verb, is dropped ; as, 3d> bin gefud)t 
roorben (not geroorben), I have been sought for ; (£t ift gerufen rcorben 
(not geroorben), He has been called. 

Examples of the Imperative. 
Singular. 
SBerbe (bu) fletfng, Become industrious. 
$ag it>n ein ©d>neiber roerben, Let him become a tailor. 

Plural. 
Saffet or Za$t un$ ftug roerben, Let us become prudent. 
SBerbet (3t?t) aufmetffam, Become ye attentive, 
^aflfet or la$t fie ttorficfytig roerben, Let them become cautious. 



§ 17. THE REGULAR ACTIVE OR TRANSITIVE VERB. 

Regular active verbs express both an action and a suffering ; as, 
3d) tabe ben $ranfen, I comfort the sick ; £>er $ranfe roirb gelabr, The 
sick is comforted. 

They are conjugated in the same way as td> fjabe, I have ; ich labe, 
I comfort. 

Their compound tenses are formed by fyaben, to have. 



76 



REGULAR ACTIVE OR TRANSITIVE VERB. 



Infinitives. 
Present, laben > to comfort. 
Compound, a,elabt fyaben, to have 

comforted. 
Future, laben roerben, to be 
about to comfort. 



Participles. 

Present, labenb, comforting (in= 
bem man labt, whilst 
one comforts). 

Past, gelabt, comforted (nacbr 
bem man gelabr fyat, af- 
ter having comforted). 



Present. 
Indicative, 
id) labt, I comfort (I do comfort), 
bu labft 
er labt 
rotr laben 
it?r labt 
ft'e laben 

Imperfict 



Subjunctive, 
id) labt, I may comfort, 
bu labeft 
er labe 
rotr laben 
U)r labet 
fie laben 



icb labte, I comforted (I did com- 
bu labteft [fort), 

er labte 
trit labten 
tf>t labtet 
fie labten 

Perfect 



id) labete, I might comfort. 

bu tabeteft 

er labete 

roir labeten 

ifyr labetet 

fie labeten 



id) tyabe gelabt, I have comforted, 
(like the Perfect of fyaben.) 



id) \>abe gelabt, I may have com- 
forted. 
(like the Perfect of fyaben.) 

Pluperfect. 



id) fyatte gelabt, I had comforted, 
(like the Pluperfect of fyaben.) 



id) \)dtte gelabt, I might have com- 
forted, 
(like the Pluperfect of fyaben.) 

Future, 
id) roerbe laben, I shall comfort. | id) roerbe laben, I shall comfort, 
(like the Future of fyaben.) (like the Future of tjaben.) 

Past Future. 



id) roerbe getabt baben, I shall have 
comforted, 
(like the Past Future of fyaben.) 



id) roerbe gelabt fyaben, I shall have 

comforted, 
(like the Past Future of fyaben.) 



REGULAR ACTIVE OR TRANSITIVE VERB. 



77 



Conditional. 

id) rourbe laben, I should comfort. 

(like the Conditional of fyaben.) 



Singular. 
labe (bu), comfort (thou), 
labe er, let him comfort. 



Past Conditional, 
id) n>utbe gelabt fyaben, I should 
have comforted, 
(like the Past Conditional of fyaben.) 

Imperative. 

Plural. 
laben nnr, let us comfort, 
labet (tfjr), comfort (ye), 
laben fie, let them comfort. 



Examples of the Imperative. 
Singular. 
%abe (bu) ben $ranfen, Comfort (thou) the sick. 
£a£ u)n ben Unglucfltcben (aben, Let him comfort the unfortunate man. 

Plural. 
^affet or Za$t un$ bie fttanfen laben, Let us comfort the sick. 
Sabet (3f>r) bie Unglutf lichen, Comfort (ye) the unfortunate. 
2af)*et ft'e bie jpungtigen laben, Let them comfort the hungry. 
Saffen ©te un£ bie £)urfttgen laben, Let (you) us comfort the thirsty. 



§ 18. PASSIVE VOICE. 



Infinitix 

Present, gelabt roerben, to be 
comforted. 

Compound, gelabt morben fetjn, to 
have been com- 
forted. 

Future, rcetben gelabt roetben, 
to be about to be 
comforted. 



Participles. 
Past, gelabt, comforted. 

Compound, gelabt rootben, been 
comforted. 



Present. 
Indicative, 
id) roetbe gelabt, I am comforted, 
(like the Present of roetben.) 



Subjunctive, 
id) n?etbe gelabt, I may be com- 
forted, 
(like the Pres. Subj. of rcerben.) 

Imperfect. 



id) nuirbe gelabt, I was comforted, 
(like the Imperfect of reetben.) 



ich rourbe gelabt, I might be com- 
forted, 
(like the Imperf. Subj. of rcetben.) 



78 



AUXILIARY VERBS OF MOOD. 

Perfect. 



Indicative. 
tch bin gelabf rcotben, I have been 
comforted, 
(like the Present of fet)n.) 



Subjunctive, 
id) fet) Qthbt morben, I may have 

been comforted, 
(like the Pres. Subjunct. of fet)n.) 



Pluperfect. 



id) nxit getabt roorben, I had been 
comforted 
(like the Imperfect of fet)n.) 



id> rcdte gelabt rootben, I might have 

been comforted, 
(like the Imperf. Subj. of fet)n.) 



Future. 

id) roetbe §elabt rcetben, I shall be 
comforted. 

(like the Future.) 



id) roetbe getabt metben, I shall be 
comforted. 

(like the Future.) 



Past Future. 



id) roerbe gelctbt wotben fet)n, I shall 
have been comforted, 
(like the Past Future.) 

Conditional, 
id) rcittbe gelabt roerben, I should 
be comforted, 
(like the Conditional.) 



id) reerbe gctabt rcotben fet)n, I shall 

have been comforted, 
(like the Past Future Subjunct.) 

Past Conditional, 
id) routbe gelctbt rcotben fenn, I 
should have been comforted, 
(like the Past Conditional.) 



The Imperative is like the Present Subjunctive where the pro- 
noun is placed after the verb. 



19. THE AUXILIARY VERBS OF MOOD. 



Saffen, to allow, to let, to permit. 
Present. 



Indicative, 
id) laffe, I allow, 
bu Idffef* 
et ta£t 
roir tafien 
tt)t lagt (lafTet> 
fie faf|Vn 



Subjunctive, 
id) (affe, I may allow, 
bu raffcft 
er laffc 
rcit laffen 
i^r laftet 
fie lafifen 



AUXILIARY VERBS OF MOOD. 



79 



Imperfect. 



Indicative. 
ich lief, I allowed (did allow), 
bu liefeft 
er hep 
n>ir ttefen 
ifyr lief t (liefet) 
fie liefen 


Subjunctive. 

id) liefc, I might allow. 

bu liefeft 

er lief e 

roir liefen 

i\)t lief et 

ft'e Uefjen 


id) fyctbe gelaffen, 


Per 
I have allowed. 


feet, 
id) fyahe gelaften, I may 
allowed. 


id) ijatfe gelafien, 


Pluju 
I had allowed. 


>rfect. 
id) fyatte gelaffen, I might 
allowed. 



have 



hav 



Future, 
id) roerbe laffen, I shall allow. | id) reerbe laffen, I shall allow. 

Past Future, 
id) roerbe gelaffen fyaben, I shall have I id) rrerbe gelaffen fjaben, I shall have 
allowed. allowed. 

Conditional. Past Conditional, 

id) rcurbe laffen, I should allow. | id) rourbe gelaffen fyaben, I should 

have allowed. 
Imperative. 



laf (bu), allow (thou). 
Iaffe er, allow him. 



laffen a>ir, allow us. 
fofiet ((aft) if>r, allow (ye), 
laffen fie, allow them. 
None of the auxiliary verbs of mood, with the exception of this, 
have the imperative. 

£affen corresponds with the English verb to let. There is an 
active and a passive voice ; as, 

3d) lajfe ben ©arten, I let the garden (for hire). 
£>er ©arten rotrb gelaffen, The garden is let (for hire). 
The following examples shew the difference of idiom in Ger- 
man and English : 

2af u)n %\\ ipaufe bleiben, Allow him to stay at home. 

Sajfen ©ie it>n avbeiten, Let him work. 

laffen <3te ba$, Leave that alone (commanding:). 

3d) lief ben jtofynarjt tommen, I ordered the dentist to come. 

<S$ (iefe fid) ^ieleS fagen, One might say much. 



80 



AUXILIARY VERBS OF MOOD. 



If there is an infinitive in a sentence, the participles of any of the 
auxiliary verbs of mood are changed into infinitives, and placed at 
the end of the sentence ; as, 
9Bir fyctben bte $inbet au&jefyen faffcn, We have allowed the children to 

go out. 
£)et 9Urf>fet i)at ben SSetbtecfyet auSteben taffen, The judge had permitted 

the criminal to finish his speech. 
£)te !Kegictung rottb tyn feinem %atet fyctben folgen lajfen, The government 

will have permitted him to succeed his father in his duties. 
3d) wutbe mit* hie $leibet fyaben mac&en lajfen, I should have had the 

cloth made for me. 

Mujfen, to be obliged. 
Present. 



Indicative. 
id) mufj, I must (I am obliged 
bit mu£t 
et mufj 
rott mujfen 
ifyt tmifjt (mujfet) 
fie mujfen 



Indicative, 
id) mufjte, I was obliged, 
(like the Imperfect of the regular 
Active Verb.) 

Perfect. 

id) \)tbe gemufjt, I have been 
obliged. 



Subjunctive, 
id) mujfe, I may be obliged, 
bu mujfejt 
er muife 
n?ic mujfen 
ifyt mujfet 
fte mujfen 

Imperfect. 

Subjunctive, 
id) mufjte I might be obliged, 
(like the Imperfect Indicative.) 



id) fyabe gemufit, I have been 
obliged. 



Pluperfect. 



id) fycttte $emu£t, I had been obliged. 



id) fyatte gemufjt, I might have been 
obliged. 

Future. 

id) roetbe mujfen, I shall be obliged. | id) roerbe mujfen, I shall be obliged. 

Past Future. 

id) roerbe gemugt fyaben, I shall have | id) n?etbe gemujjt fyaben, I shall have 
been obliged. I been obliged. 



AUXILIARY VERBS OF MOOD. 



81 



Conditioned. 
ich tmirbe muffen, I should be 
obliged. 



Past Conditional. 
icb rourbe gemujjt fyaben, I should 
have been obliged. 



Examples. 

©ie muffen ft'cf) anfletben, You or they must dress. 

5Btr mu£ten einen 55efuch mad>en, We were obliged to pay a visit. 

%)ex £>ienet fyat cuiScjefycn muffen, The valet has been obliged to 

go out. 
%)a$ #tnb \)at feme ©tern wrtaffen muffen, The child had been obliged 

to leave his parents. 
Ztte ©cbufer roetben folcjen muffen, The pupils will be obliged to 

follow. 
<£r rotrb bte <5tabt fyaben t?erlaffen muffen, He will have been obliged to 

leave the town. 
2>u rotirbeft e$ tfyun muffen, Thou shouldst be obliged to do it. 
3d) rourbe ba$ ®efrf)dft fjetben aufgeben muffen, I should have been 

obliged to give up business. 



©otten, to be compelled, to be obliged. 
Present. 



Indicative, 
id) foil, I shall (I am compelled), 
bu faUtf 
etfatt 
n>it fatten 
$t fattt, (fottet) 
fte fatten 



Subjunctive, 
id) fatte, I may be compelled, 
bu fatteft. 
et fatte. 
n>ir fatten, 
tbr fottet. 
fte fatten. 



Imperfect 
Indicative. 
td}fottte,I should(I was compelled) 
(like the Active Verb). 



Subjunctive. 

ich fottte, I might be compelled. 

(like the Indicative). 



Perfect. 



id) fyctbc cjefottt, I have been com- 
pelled. 



id) fyctbe cjefottt, I may have been 
compelled. 



Pluperfect, 
id) fycttte cjefottt, I had been com- I id) fykte gefottt, I might have been 



pelled. 



ipelled. 



82 



AUXILIARY VERBS OF MOOD. 



Future. 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

utrcerbe fallen, I shall be compelled. | iitrcerbe fallen, I shall be compelled. 

Past Future. 

icb roerbe gefallt tjaben, I shall have 
been compelled. 

Conditional. 



id) roerbe gefottt fjaben, I shall have 
been compelled. 

Past Conditional. 
id) rotirbe gefoltt fyaben, I should 
have been compelled. 



id) roiirbe fallen, I should be com- 
pelled. 

Examples. 
SBtr fotlten @ute*> tfyun, We ought to do good. 
©otticMt&un? Shall I doit? 

£r f)cttte feine ^flidjt tfyun fallen, He should have done his duty. 
<5r fallte ifym wrgeben fyctben, He might have forgiven him. 
£)er ©tubent (©tubirenbe) fall ben %jt erftodjen fyaben, The student shall 

have stabbed the Physician. 
SBenn er ju ipaufe bleiben fattte, (fa) roiirbe et franf roerben, If he should 

stay at home he would become ill. 
©otlte e$ nad)tf)etlig fur <3ie fewn? Should it be disadvantageous 



for 



you 



2Ba$ fall bat fyetpen ? What is the meaning of that ? 



SBollen, to be willing. 
Present. 

Subjunctive 
id) rootle, I may be willing, 
bu roolleft. 
er rootle, 
roir roollen. 
if>r rootlet. 
fie roollen. 



Indicative, 
id) roill, I am willing, 
bu rotllft 
cr roill 
roir roollen 
ii)x rooltt (rootlet) 
fie rootlen 



Indicative. 
id) rootlte, I was willing. 

(like the Active Verb). 



Imperfect. 

Subjunctive, 
id) rootlte, I might be willing, 
(like the Indicative). 



Perfect. 

id) fyabe geroottt, I have been willing. I id) tjabe geroottt, I may have been 

willing. 



AUXILIARV VERBS OF MOOD. 

Pluperfect. 



Indicative, 
id) batte geroodt, I had been willing. 



Subjunctive, 
id) fyatre gereotft, I might have been 
willing. 



Future, 
id) roerbe rootlen, I shall be willing. | tcb roerbe n>ol(en, I shall be willing. 

Past Future, 
id) roerbe gerooCU fyaben, I shall have I icf; roerbe gerooUt fyaben, I shall have 



been willing. 

Conditional, 
id) roiirberooUen, I should be willing. 



been willing. 

Past Conditional, 
id) roiirbe geroollt fyaben, I should 
have been willing. 

Examples. 
$Btr roollen e$ oerfudjen, We will try it. 

©ie roolten un$ gem fefyen, They were much inclined to see us. 
2)u \)a\t e$ nid)t oerfytnbern rcotlen, Thou hast not been willing to 

prevent it. 
©ie fyaben tyn nur be$ SlbenbS fprecben roollen, They were only willing to 

speak to him in the evening. 
(£t roirb e$ nicbt fyaben tyun rootten, He did not like to do it. 
£)ie ftinber rourben fyaben fpielen roollen, The children would have been 

willing to play. 
2Bollt 3t>t ruljig \t\)n? Will you be quiet? 



£)urfen, to dare, to be allowed. 



Present. 



Indicative, 
id) barf, I dare (I am allowed), 
bu barfft 
er barf 
rotr bur fen 
ifyr burft (burfet) 
fie bur fen 



Subjunctive, 
id) burfe, I may be allowed, 
bu burfe jr. 
er burfe. 
rotr bur fen. 
ifyr burfet. 
ft'e bur fen. 



Imperfect, 
id) burfte, I was allowed, j id; burfte, I might be allowed, 

(like the Active Verb). (like the Indicative). 

g2 



84 AUXILIARY VERBS OF MOOD. 



Perfect. 



Indicative, 
id) fjctbe geburfr, I havebeen allowed. 



Subjunctive, 
id) \)ohz geburft, I may have been 
allowed. 



Pluperfect. 



id) fyatte geburfr, I had been allowed. 



id) tjdffc geburft, I might have been 
allowed. 



Future. 

id) roerbe burfen, I shall be allowed. | id) roerbe burfen, I shall be allowed. 

Past Future. 



id) roerbe cjeburft fyaben, I shall have 
been allowed. 

Conditional, 
id) rourbe burfcn, I should be 
allowed. 



id) roerbe o,eburft fjaben, I shall have 
been allowed. 

Past Conditional, 
id) rourbe geburft fjaben, I should 
have been allowed. 



Examples. 

©ie burfen nicht laut reben, You dare not speak loud. 

2Bir burfen ju ifym fommen, We may come to him. 

©cine &6d)ter burften auf ben SSatt gefyen, His daughters were allowed 

to go to the ball. 
&$ burfte nicht fpdter <d$ jefyn Uf>r fet)n, It ought not to be later than 

ten o'clock. 
©te fyctt u)re ^reunbinn befucben burfen, She has been allowed to visit 

her friend. 
(Er \)at ben ^(an entbecfen burfen, He had been allowed to discover 

the plan, 
©te fydtten nidjt ofyne Srlctubnifs au&jefyen burfen, You dared not go out 

without permission. 
3d) roerbe ©ie einlaben burfen, I shall be allowed to invite you. 
28ir roerben ben tnerten October beenbigt fyctben burfen, On the fourth of 

October we shall have been allowed to have finished. 
3d) rourbe auf ben Sftarft gefyen burfen, I would have been allowed to 

go to the market, 
©te rourben ba$ 2teb fyctben anfangen burfen, They would have been 

allowed to begin the song. 



AUXILIARY VERBS OF MOOD. 85 

.Vtonnen, to be able. 

Present. 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

id) fann, I can (I am able). ici> tonne, I may be able (I could). 



bit fcmnfr 

er farm 

rcir fonnen 

it>r fonnt (rennet) 

fie fonnen 



bu fonneft 
er forme 
roir Fonnen 

ti?r fonnet 
fte fonnen. 



Imperfect. 
id) fonnre, I could. I tch fonnte, I might be able. 

(like the Active Verb.) (like the Indicative.) 

Perfect. 
icf; t)Ctbe cjefonnt, I have been able, i id) tjabe ijefonnt, I may have been 

able. 

Pluperfect. 
id) fjatte cjefonnt, I had been able, i icf; fydtte cjefonnt, I might have 

been able. 

Future. 
tch roerbe fonnen, I shall be able. | icf; rcerbe fonnen, I shall be able. 

Past Future. 
tch roerbe cjefonnt fyctben, I shall have | icf; roerbe cjefonnt fjaben, I shall have 
been able. been able. 

Conditional. Past Conditional, 

id} roiirbe fonnen, I should be able, icf; rourbe cjefonnt fyaben, I should 

have been able. 

Examples. 

3cf; fcmn nocb fefjcn, I can still see. 

(£r fann e$ ^ie(Ieicf)t ernjrfyaft meinen, Perhaps he may mean it seriously. 

2Bie fonnten ©ie e$ gjcutben ! How could you believe it ! 

Sie fonnten e£ t>crfucf;en, You might try it. 

3cf; f;abe e$ ntcf>t ofyne fte tf;un fonnen, I have not been able to do it 

without them, 
©er Sift&er f?at ben M ntct>t fancjen fonnen, The fisherman could not 

(had not been able) to catch the fish. 



86 



AUXILIARY VERBS OF MOOD. 



3<$ roerbe ba$ @etb ndcbften 2)onnerftag empfangen ftmnen, I shall be able 

to receive the money next Thursday. 
5Btt roerben cS mtt @en>if?bett fyabcn ernoarten fcnnen, We shall have been 

able to expect it with certainty, 
©ie rourben e$ ofyne ^lad)t\)d\ ettauben fonnen, You could permit it 

without disadvantage. 
©ie nxirbe e$ fyaben utrternefymen fonnen, She would have been able to 

undertake it. 



Indicative. 
id) mag, I like, 
bu magft 
er mag 
rait mogen 
if)t mogt (moget) 
fie mogen 



9Kogen, to like. 

Present. 

Subjunctive, 
id) moge, I may like, 
bu mogeft 
cr moge 
n>ir mogen 
tfyt moget 
fte mogen 



id) mod>te, I liked. 

(like the Active Verb.) 



Imperfect. 

j id) mbd>te, I might or should like, 
(like the Indicative.) 



Perfect. 
id) tyabe gemodtf, I have liked. | id) fyabt gemoc^t, I may have liked. 

Pluperfect. 

id} \)atte gemod>t, I had liked. i id) fjdtte gemodjt, I might have 

I liked. 

Future, 
id} roerbe mogen, I shall like. | itf> roerbe mogen, I shall like. 

Past Future. 

id> roerbe gemod)t fyaben, I shall i id) roetbe gemocfyt fyaben, I shall 
have liked. have liked. 



Conditional, 
id) n>urbe mogen, I should like. 



Past Conditional, 
id) rcurbe gemocf>t f>aben, I should 
have liked. 



AUXILIARY VERBS OF MOOD. 87 

Examples. 

3cb mag fefjr gem in ©efetlfcbaft fcnn, I like to be in company very 

much. 
©ie mocbte feine ^tafylerei nid>t, She did not like his boasting. 
ffibfyten ©ie gem einc $tafd)e 28ein fyaben ? Should you like to have a 

bottle of wine ? 
(£t t?at it>n nirf)t jtur&en megen, He did not like to ruin him. 
(Sic tjaben jie ntc^t eettatfyen megen, They did not intend to betray 

them. 
SBerben ©ie batum bitten megen ? Will you like to ask for it ? 
©ie rcurbe Ueber bie SBabtfyeit reben megen, She would have preferred 

speaking the truth. 



§ 20. IRREGULAR VERBS. 

There are about 200 irregular verbs. Irregular verbs are those 
which deviate from the conjugation of regular verbs in their im- 
perfects and past participles, and in the latter case the imperative 
retains the vowel of the 2d present indicative. 

Some have their imperfects in te, and their past participles in t, 
with the augment ge before them like the regular verb ; as, 

3$ roeip, I know ; id) roupte, I knew ; gcroujjt, known ; roiffe, know. 

The vowels of the present indicative in all irregular verbs are 
changed, as, e into a, a into ie, ie into 0, a into u ; as, 

3d) befefyle, I command ; id) befafyl, I commanded ; befofyten, com- 
manded. 
3d) laffe, I let; id) tie£, I did let; getaffen, let. 
3d) gietje, I pour ; id) go§, I poured ; gegofien, poured. 
3d) fd)(age, I strike; id) (d)lug, I stroke; gefd)lagen, stroke. 

These form their past participles in en, and their imperfect sub- 
junctives in e, and change the vowels of their indicatives, as, a, 0, 
u, into a, e, u, like ordinary irregular verbs. 

There are six classes in which changes take place in the 2d and 
3d person of the present indicative, the imperfect indicative and 
subjunctive, the past participle and the subjunctive. 

GENERAL VIEW. 

The imperfects of irregular verbs generally end in a consonant, 
and the past participle in en. 



88 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 





CD 


c3 


CD 


CD 


CD 




> 


P> 


> 


t> 


t> 




























Cfl 


cd 


Cd 


cd 


cd 




?H 


Fh 


« 


^H 


s-i 




CD 


CD 


CD 


0) 


cd 




o< 


&< 


»H 


Oh 


c^ 




£ 


a 


S 


a 


a 


<3> ft» 


HH 


HH 


HH 


H- 1 


hH 


C "£ 


O 


O 


O 


O 


o 




£££ Jzjfe 



CD Q 

a §, 



"fifc 



s 






<5) 



2 ^ 22 « ? g g ? ? « s « =1 s H§o 

vO -JO 
CD 
r43 



£ B e .2- S £ £ 



UOUUUOUVU&IUOu ft> ft> ft> 

<3>cr><nc?>cn<?>cr>cf>c?)<s>cr>cn<35 c» ^ ^ w 

CD 



<D 



Oh 

** ^ a _ ~ *» s 



( Qh a, 
'o 



•I 



llf-l s.j-|-| ||gi 1 g.$$ 

g -e- ::::::::::: : | ^ f 



,4 



«3 -+j o ft> "^ C2 « 

5 ^ M ■« _ 



CD 



*£> 



Oh IE- 



a 



CD 


























• l-H 


f> 


























Fh 






























-+J 


























CD 


c« 



fe 
























^G 


.a 

*CD 


1 


ft> 
E 




ft* 
.5 n 


**— 




E 


E 

e 


« 3 




c 
c: 






EJ 


_<m 


» 


a 

CD 


rG 




*r> 


JD A 


vO 





« 


a a 


C 


^i 


& 


S 


£ 


en 

CD 


a 




!§ 






















.G 

H 


^ 




























CD 




























w 




























CD 

r4 
H 














CD 










£ 
















CD 










^3 






1 

-S 

1, 
t 


3 


^ rG 


s 

cd 
O 

-t-3 




G 




■a 

CD 
O 


CD O 
M CD 




Id 

CD 



+J 


CD 




G 
Fh 

O 

■♦J 




G 

3 


CD 










ft> 


g B" 


e 


e 


e 


« s" 


s 


E? 







c 










.5 E 






e 
E 


&1= 






1 


£ 












>£> jO 


JO 


SM— 


SB 


a a 


c 


.0 


£ 


£ 





■J3 

>0 



w ^> e 

,ft> -*i, <35 

ft> ft> ft* 



G 
cd 

a .a 

1 %* § 



S* c 



ft» ft> 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 89 



s . = • . o o B •—► 

JR o B «- • • ^rj- CO tE- IE- B 

g ^r .5 *j 'S s £ £ E tr 



£ ■§ ^ -5 H - £ 


= 
= 

2 




•B- CO CO CO Cf> en CO 


« 



1 


s s 
£ 1 


B 




B 
at 


b 


b 

en 
E 


B 

o 


e 


S 


1= 


B 


B 


B 


B 
efi 


--^ 


B 


B 


B 
--. 
E 
B 
o 


b 




l-l 






O- 






at 


3 1 


o 




- 




•^ 


7Z 




^o 


*zj 


vT> 


vO 


■SJ 






en 


, ^— 


>i 


en 


B1 


n 








O 




■o 








£ 






a> 


^-. 
















en *o 


CO 


cr; 


tgi 


en 


Ctt 


«l 




o 


CO 


Cfi 


« 


cr: 


t, 


es 


Cfi 


en 


«5 




^S 






































Ot "73 


























/-^~ 










=: 


r§ 


























(j 










a 








/" 


N 
















P 














T"» *-» IB- E «-. «-cs -a .>o *ej 2" T^iH o s ;>£>> c >*-«c3e73S 






«s SS^c^ "E b 

ST « o B <3 « $_ ^. ^ s-> B B s-» t i°. « o «vi « o'rr o 



S -s ^ ! H >S ^ - ^ ^ ^ ft? 

i_, »B- niloo •— c >*- r- u^. «— i^» -^ vO ^> — ^ c z 3 2 

-•-^ ^£ =^ >E£ ^^tJ^S-r; g 



^DvO vOvO>OV3 ^>o oo O iB- O © gj «) (J) c) C5 

.53 • .... . . . . • • • • a» .S • o .JS 

I I 



gB .S r^ i 73 BO 0-£ B^^aJfli? 1 ^ 





hi 






> 




1) 




V 


CD 


— 




o 


o 


„ 




B 


B 






vj 


•ti 



c o 



-P- E S « 



>S 5 B X ^ §> «S. 



B 2 e « fi ,«* ^ 



o* 3 .S JS j^ fc» J->B BiJ ks= Boooo^oo 

^O »B- *0 *0 >^ .O v^ o o o o <B- Cf) 5) O O (J) o C 



90 IRREGULAR VERBS. 



1 

«U , . fS ^> ft> 

3 ^ 



b*J I fMf If llM s ; * If 



r3 



«.» ^ ./-* ^f) 



HI Ig||I IllJiiilllllit 1 



CO 

cococbcbcococococbcocOcbcOcbcocbcbcbcococo 



— ^ 

IS :S 

IS 4 -5 s £ o o O 

1 3.3 It tflf-l-lllIIIStltltlttaa f 

g^ ._ «•- _ W- » •— *- *- »-► j_, t_ l_ >— t_ ._ i_ ._- l_- «— - «—«_«_ q 

s *& •»•&••- "^ 

N — ► o -— ^ 

— g 

<&. ,- co 5 e c _ ~ *2 

tf _. g> e ^| cp g^ § | | | co^c g *§ 1§ 

g _. _ „S J2 ^S £ C S g^S-22-32-2.»^li2.i c i« c i*2-.B:,»: 

*S -y> *& • <D 

■♦» *» — • C2-i 

ce 

I - _ o 

£ jo 1 * ' g o ^ S 

S _F aa. fe -5 '■&•*> e. _: *_ 

** jBr ^^ w ^ o £ „ co 



o ._ 



co £ e c 



_g 5 i^cofl|'S^_B£So C o_^ogf ^ 

X_lSJ^f^8'-|i&;SS££:£££SS££ 1 
_::::::: ^ ^ :::::::::: : g. 



^ 



CD ^ ^O .S ^ be o 

i*sL hlgllj'i'i **1 ■■at 

.iff ili||flliiift|igif 

X J 1 1 # § f # f « S S _ S ;f £ <E <§. £ £ _ 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 91 



1 



* 5? .- 8 « S | 



■£ «> e s e g £ c r 

£c- ttee.eij sit? 8 8 8-1 



CC 



Si £ 






-M 

t ISSSSSll * is I £ 1 1 '§ & i 



s 
















o 


— 






• 


































O 


^ 




























• »v 


| 


g_ « « <3 <3 <3 

i& c~ cjs. £=. c~ c~ 


vO 


<4— 




« 

id 




•in. 

<3 
CO 

3-» 

S> 




8 8 


B 

8 


8 

MO 


2 s 
.^1 


■"1 


^ . 














» 


^ 


























































„ 










>C~ <73 




































































>-s 










"■a 

a 


» 




/— >. 




















^s 


















8 
I 

2 

ft. 


i: «v e» «v> o .— 
i& c~ ex cji. C=- Ci. 




§ 

S-l 

a* 


§£ 

O 
«* 




IB 
u 

61 


<*> 

& 

en 




8 '1 

b> O 

8 8 


C 

8 


& 

MO 






g : 
















r§ 

















llllll§ll-ill If If sf 

£c»e.^c|£es i i & S 888fe § 



92 IRREGULAR VERBS. 







<x> cd 






f> > 




» 


•43 -43 






03 o3 






fi %-t 




a 


<v S 




fc 


Ph Ph 


u 


a. 


. s a 


a 

CD 


^ 


3 3 £ ««£; 






CD 

.s •§* 

03 *" v2 & g ^ .^ « « 3 «== g 15 •£ 3 « .St s" >e *§ ^ >& 
?h vo ^ >c i4- a ^> >o vc- ws2^5C«-^»j-.s-»«ii- c±iii-tii. 

CD ^>^>0^>00^>^>^>^>^>^>^>^i>0^>0 tl> ^> o 



.9 






































CD 


s 




































■^ 


s 




































.2 


1 


3 


3 


o 




3 
en 


3 


3 


^- tin. ti— 




3 






O 






J Si 

^e <■& ^ 
«^— i^— »*— 


CD 










































































Ph 






































cc 

Oh 
02 

03 


1 




3 


*-> 




US- 

3 

o 


3 


o 

3 


I?" «£L «*- 
J^ ^ w 




I 




ja- 

o 






5 


1 




P-. 














"*"* 
























Ph 












































































CD 
^3 




































/-*N 










































s? 


9: 
-« 

3 




3 


£5 








§ 


















-<3 


.9 

CO 


^1 


•-CJ 




^ 
«.<j 
j- 

sO 


3 




-<3 




(J2. 




















o 

CD 

a 




3" 




£2 

cs 

*-> 

J3 




3 
3 


3 






o 




5S- 








1 


^& ^s- ^ 




« 










^ 































































^ O i Pi 

C2 CD ,?H O CD Ph 

,P * :fl &h 'C ^ .9 « „i ^ £3 nr ^ « 



llsNs^iJtggji^&i: 111 

H ^ o 3 o^ - o o o- o o 3 3 o o I - I ^3 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 93 



I 4 



^ 1 1 si & £ '§> £ ^ ^IiSi«;i5!&|i!S 







I^IIiffll-f fit 

5 cd>r> N r>u±enenenen.j^i£N>£ 



*£1 CT, *> enenenenenenenen 



o 






§ *©■ IB I >g> • • • ' 









^ :::::: : £ ^ 

O p Pn 



en 

c 
res 



en 

n 



=: 






*£■ 










e 

i 


Cq5 












en 

c 




t 


o 




-o 








Oh 


* 






r<5 














■s g 


6i 






8 


at 












en en 


at 

--• 


«5 


en o 
es "S 

»0 «fc- 






S : 












^C3 




^e 






























s 

Fh 




































OJ 

O 




CD 


























CD 




T3 




CO 














a 






c 




«+-. 


09 

CD 










CD 























o 


__ 




02 




>> 


^ ^2 










| 


QD 

« o 
o ~ 


O 


CD 
«B "EH 

o S 

-t-J 


Fh 

Ed 

ft 
o 



to 
o 


cd 

03 

s 

o 

CO 

o 


H 


1 


CD 

o 
n 


CO 

O 


b-3 


Is B 

o ^ 

bD o 

o *1 


CD 

O 

4H 


O 

s 

QD 

o 


1 -o 

•— ' CD 

o m 

*- o 


o 

e 

o 




'8 e 


i2t 


g s 


ft) 


c 

s 










e 
'Er 

Si 


J-. cs 


en en 


*3) 




e^ g 





94 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 

















O 
















«0 














^ 








'xi 








5> 














<x> 








.?» 






















IS 








"■S 








e 














a 








e 


















& ^ S- JS ~ - . S S 

^ ^ ^ £:£:£.<£ & g 













1 







, 


^ 












.1=f 
s 


S 


u 

§ 













CO 



CO 

s 


^ 




















4B 








.& 














CD 






CO 


•& 








1 
a, 


a 






S 


l s|l si si 1 

^^^-e-^^^.tiS co 

«-.— U— C— L. t«— •-«— U— 1-* J_» 


e 


O 






CD 

> 

a 

CD 


S3 
ft, 





CO 




«.> 
CO 



£ 




•^j 


&i 


s 


ej 


0«>«l>Sj«i>^>ri>00 





a 






Oh 




«> 










« 


GO 


© 


CO 


C0COCOC0C0COCOS> $> 


CO 


^ 






.a 




co >o 


>£> 
















-a 
















s 




















_&H 


1 








* 














CD 
Oh 






rS 








4 


o 




!§ 


o 


^j ^; £ c S 2 .- ^ <S) 

^> ^q. ^ ^q- ^. £ i: O O 




e 

£ 


O 
St 

•2J 






•-d 

9 

g 




6=5 



CO 




CO 

£ 


a. 


^— < 


ft- 


s-> 


"a 


CZ-x^-uz-iz-*5±<i2-<ZZ-u $> 


J> 






a. 


^J1> 


>o 


>£> 


§ 


!§ 












CO 






•1— 1 


4 


r§ 


• 




s 




























"5 

3 






CO 
CD 










•v» 




















r H H 


h4 








1 

1 


-4-< 


a 




'2 


£ £ it £ £ £ £ | $ 




CD 




CO 
CO 

►J 



Oh 


* 





CO 


a 


£ 


s 


^ 

















H 
Eh 


# a 


N 


^e 




• 
















cT 




*CD 

^3 




*** 


' 













































fl, 


H-J 
























^f 5 " 






























CO 






s 
























tl— 






























<3 






.a 

CO 









































8 














CD 
Oh 






•e 


1 








P 














03 


^ 




CD 


s 








K 

^ 




a 






"g ^ 'S - 1 ■- *g> ^ ^> s> 
3 3; S e £ "5 "S >g *§> 


a 


O 

iX! 

CD 
O 


CD 
CD 




Oh 

.a 

# Sh 

*CD 


£ 







CO 


CO 

£ 




§ 












CO 


C3 





I 




J 

CD 
02 
CD 

H 




r§~ 










CD 






cd _ ^ 

§ 1 fc g S 

-a -* jf ft * ^-s § 

BoSS a o|-- 

f tr 'S s •- ^ « - ^ 

^e ^ ,*e ;e & £_ £ | | 

»^- «^- «^- t^- \^— L^- U^- $> J) 


^1 






CD 


CD 


t 


1 

O 

e 


to 

O 


o 


0) 


-^ 

c 
'3 



£ 




Oh 

a 


a 

CD 

-a 
H 


e 

03 
O 






f 


1 

2 


*cu 


CD 



c 

CO 



.a 
.5 

CO 

£ 






• — > 


a 


s-> 


*■* 




CO 








s^> 


vO 


vO 



IRREGULAR VERBS 95 



Ph 



£ 


b 


^» 




<a 


<u 


o 


+j 


o 


o 


o 


C3 


Ph 


.fc 


.Ph 


a> 






1 e e >P- ~ g g n g o e c c ^Si-e:c H 

^ ill II s*$t* * * ititl i 

*£*?£.£,£ 12. £<£-£- ^ ^ fc t«iJ§ c «i *& 

V. ^» «rf j_> i-> ^ j_, o ti> o ** *i. o o o o o o 

CS5 O <3) *> «* o o O CT> <*> <5> <?> O C5 O O O CS 1 ) 



s. >o >r> vo S £ S S iC <&. (C- li- 5=- <£lcno<^<35 <^> 

*fj 4? ■ • • • ■» HB* • • • • -& • *6" • • <«> 



W 






g -X> %£> vO o «* o^> t»— <3=- li- <3i- <*^- <*— <S> <J) O <5) 



o c> o 



§ " w 1 | » t 

2 al «■«=■£.* g, 



If 5^ * ^ * 



Is ? M 1 

a ^> « t &l o si 1*1 it iji *&- **?- <£L en en <s) <?> *<$> 

*9* ; . • oj> ^ • • • ■ ->» • • ^ ■ • ^ 



a. 

i k I I f § ? * £ § I £> ! 

|§^a^ S 8 >5^ J I cS I 8 s § "> 

%>*■£ o o o 3o^^^ ^ « * c8 ^ p, o 

< c o ~ 3 ^ - o S o o o 3o-^o 1 

5 tf * S 5 «I§IS § 5 5S~«~g E 

^ g * it S f s 1 4r 1 1 f J 



96 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 






Sf*g£f ss.s 



c3 J3 cS 

CD CD CD 

g> S .Si .£ ci o ego o Jq -2 



A 



sSi « 



s Si-fa 

^> ^> ^> ^^ ^> ^> *j 

« O (S) O (J) «) <s 



w JB £ 



S « ^3 £ H 2 

*&• ^ »©• *9* *&■ *& *& 



o o 

s s 

"8" ^ 



CDCf>cr><3)<3>Cf)CJ)<3}<S)<5}<3}<5} 



If.: : : : : s r§ : 



?> $> lSL t= -» 3 ^ -S -o 
tS f f f f I®" f f !§! f 



• -w> ^ 



•» ■>©■ 



s r§ : : : : : sS : 



■3 £ 












#o 



<to CD u> 

I *° /-s :§: 






O s3D »£Q 



^B 



g >e 



->» ^g 



c: *- c c a •— 



be 

a 






— o 2 ° 






y£J «>» 






^ CO 



03 
tl 

o 






CD <d 



3 ° ® ^ 3 



^ as s 



O- cr ^> v- 



^©- *©• ^S~ .^S 1 






g c 

^S 2 

2 e 



*5 e 

-e- .St 



•in 
"s-» 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



97 





co co* co <v 




CO 






CO 




e 




> > > > 




> 






-> 




3 








































CO co co CO 

M C & f-i 




fi 






Eh 




''- 


9 


CO CO CO CO 




CO 






S 








Ph & a & 




Oh 






Dh 




~ 




a a a a 


%> 


a 






S 




n 


H HH H 

o o o o 


_o 


1— 1 
O 


at 




o 


at 
J5 


nrJ 




^^^iz; 




£ 


& 


a 


£ 


at 


P 

CO 




































CO 


.S< 
















2 


.§ 


c: 




c 










CO 




Ja *£ en g 




o 
lE 


o «>t 

en vQ 


at 


C 


o 


r~ § 1 £ 


o 


o 


O 


Q 


Q 


en 








""£ 


8 


fi 


P 


o 


~ 




O «k> O ^> 


















<3) en CO S> 


s> 


» 


en 


« 


en 


CO 


o 
X3 



<*i .o S o ^ 

gi ^O 'O -O i* £ g 'O -O .Q Cp 



wg- -y> vg- • -yj *g ., 





a. 














B 














a> 


en 






s 






c 


— 


^/ 


« 






-o 


JQ 


,« 


« 


g 


o 














c 




























so 














CO 














j> 


.& 


























CO 


« 




e 






e 


CO 


e 
ft. 


•8 


a> 


J2> 




33 


a 




ja 


/5 


14. 


a 


E 








at 


Ol 


■^ 


o 






en 


en 


CO 


^T; 


en 






























r^ 




























^ 














fl 














CO 


4 
























aj 




1 


•a 

-3 


en 




at 




CO 




« 




' 


* 





£ ^ *= en £ £ ° 3 

s c~ a a & & » 



Ctt *£> en 
O O 

2 S 



2 ^ «?» .t! 



»g- to *©■ 



** -is 



e co 



03 



•B 



>o ^ cd »3 £ 






at 






e -so 



. >» 



T3 
CO 

a 

co O 

.£ « 

CO ^2 
co O 



O ^ 



O c O s- 

^5 -u +j *t 



a> 



en va ;3 ^ 



co 

' CO pCJ g 

_ '53 cB 

o 2 * £ 

- e o o 

e g *» *» 

2t io ** § 

— ► - — . en vO 

S SI 8 



'co CO 

3 o 



S -st 



^ o 
o 

2 g 



« CO 



2 ^ 

CO 

o 



-3 I 






CO 








CO 

a 


ft. 


AJ. ° *> 


aa 






<£i en vt o 


v^' 


•ft 




a 




s2 ^ ^ « 


g 


a 




& : : : 




£ 




CO 

bo 




CO 




*H 





1 1 2 -fc 1 1 

^ 5 o o 3 o 

"S g. g ^ -^ 



CO 






+- ^ ^ * 



98 



NEUTER OR INTRANSITIVE VERBS. 






s? 4? ~ si ^F ;§: 

^ ._. — j g. « « « « 



o" «> ^ *^ ^> «i> ■&> o 



^ ft> 3-> 

^•§•3 8 



-3 -» "? 

£ 8 8 






fi. 



^ .5 J* 8 *g 

& : : : : 






rs- 






£ 



i 



Q .2 



1 8 

be £ 
o o 



c3 

■8 

CO 

CD 

o 

cd 
s-< 

o3 



CD 

-a 

03 






bs 

CD 



CD 



*& 



*3 &■ 

o o 

S 2 c e i | 

« Q w CD ^O «i=- 
*5» g, « <3 O O 
£ ^.\2r £ S 8 



.<-» CD i-i 



6? 



CD 
•r* 03 



-a J 

03 +» 

CO P> 

H g 
a* 

s 



i 

CD 

1 

o 



^5 

CD ;£j 

CD . .£} o 

CO -fl - 



D-. 03 
CD 



&,1 






fl .13 
O s-» 
&o cji. 

S-i «J 
CD <S> 

P* „ 



o 
o 

s 

CD 
CD 



O 

03 
co 

CO 
CD 
U 

Ph 

K 
CD 



$£ E 

CD- ^ 

ol 2 Q 



Hi- 
ss- 



• r3 CD 






CD 



CD 



2 . 03 £ S 

t-i ^h en to <4-i 



CD 
Cfl CD 

cd rS 



&! CD 

CD § 

>■ CO 

o3 .j 

■* c 
S'-S 

i-i fH fl o 2 

bJD S ^ ^ ^ 




>5 * ^ ^ ® 

1 ^ « i -a 



to ^ 



»- 03 



o3 cd 

§ B 

CO 

Ph 
CD 

P^ 



NEUTER OR INTRANSITIVE VERBS. 99 



- a * 111 1 . 1 

^ £ « g 

I si 



rt 



0) S 5§ r/2 Vi .S C ei 

g ^ ^q _a> eg § ... J ; ; : : ; ; £. £ ; ; ; 

13 c^'s ?s S ^ : ; • • : • Z & ■ 

• 5 ^ & £ So-* 3 w j§ 

^ .. .2i es o £ fl 

- w © S g § ^*5 ^ 



o 

c 

h2 



100 



NEUTER VERBS. 



















•«* 






9. 


. 


























-d 






I 


. 41 . 


** 




*J 


. 


















-3 








vD vO vO 




til 

=3 

t2- 


a 


j^ -W O 

«+^ <Ji ^C- 
























«»«>«> 


o w 


5-> 




O *> ^» 














-d 




-cT 








O tS) CO 


CO o 


ej 


o 


CO CO CO 








^~\ 


/»-"■> 












"6 




■3 

P 
03 
■u 

g 

03 


g 
P 

O 

fr- 
ee 

p 

03 


a" 


o 
•S 




02 

03 


! 

1 


^ 5 £ 

<3 "« ^O 
»0 .A jO 


s 1 

o ^» <^» 

^§ S tt 

»- w w 


a 

w 
-ct 

& 

s-» 


** -w O 

"cj *v2 «> 

t4— CP- »£> 




p 

03 




03 




> 


P 


fl 






















i— i 




a 




ired himself by runni 
,nging their vowels, a 




P 

Sh 




S : : 












• 1— 1 


o3 


r 03 






02 

rP 


p 
























03 

p 
o 

p 
o 

o 






l 

^ 


03 

1 

M 

c 

CO 


m 

o 

rP 

rG 

p 

03 

-d 
;d 


geteift, I have t 
led through Ita 


CO g 
C « 

11 

CO >£> 


e 

e 

c 

en 

CO 




si 


«0 

1 


O C3 


;o throng 
ten, catch cold 


a 


03 

c3 P 
w -tf 03 




g 


1 




^ 
£ 




^ 




-4_3 03 






M 02 C6 

1 o a 




O 


o3 "t^ 
c2 * cS 




H^rP 

o 

-w 


l& 


03 

rP 


!§ 




CO 


^P !>, 

O 02 

2 "5 








3 «s 

.t2 -« «,o 


o u «* 


a 


o 3 3 










M 






^3 o 

H c5 








jd /> a 


/> N— / 


^^ 


o 


U_ <JZ- ^£Jn 






















en 




c^ 






"S s 


- o 


























C 
^<3 






■i 

en 


^L P 

o p 








Sat: 

O cs o 

>C> /> JO 


P 

CO ^ 

II 


S3 


a 

S 


« S "S 

t=S fc: <+-- 
U— 1X2- sT> 


















03 


I 3 






«i> O O 


O J-» 


j-> 


5^ 


<^> *> ^> 






A) 














02 

03 




CO CO CO 


CO o 


6> 


O 


CO CS3 <T> 
























vis- 






O 


gl 




.£ 


O 


o 


o 




■2J 

a 


■ti* 






o 




's 

an 

o 

GO 


P 
03 

.5 


3 

O 
fe- 
ed 

p 


e 

DO 

ea 
cu 

CO 

p 


1 s 

3*5 >• 




CO 

G 
5° 




S a £ 

«3 <$ o 

j=> yO JO 

r§ : • 


co -£J 


to 


« 
a 


tea «tl 
o> o cs 

US. fce. J3v 


^ 
















03 




"33 

43 




o 


03 
O 

P 


2 

no 

03 
> 


^ 03 

«l 

03 

P 


3 


S 




b 


-d 


03 
P 


a 

03 




o 




O 

'2 




«i> 4-» 

11 

CO vO 


'55 

i 

.P 

03 

a 

o 


be 
P 

1 

03 

^P 


"<3 

o 
6 s 




to 

1 
f 


ten, to pray 
mpfen, to smoke 
rren, to become d 


'o 
o 

03 ^ 

bp s 

P bb 
3 3 

.a ^ 


o 

03 

O 
+j 

C 


a 

o 
o 

03 

o 

a 
« 
e 


c^ * "£ 

o 3 3 

*r P tt*" 
c: o £ 

^» ICQ. -w 

5=f o «tr 




















3 

<5 






O <3 W 


i-» ^ 


t-a 


3-> 


« -«i « 
























J^ jO jO 


jO t>> 


o 


Q) 


u— 02- js^ 



NEUTER VERBS. 101 



_R. 








.^ c 






















CD 




.J 


3 
^2 




s-'S sp^S 2 2 
v c o- s. ^ £ S 




S" 


<30 *J 

Si 3 




*B 


3 


2 
















-^ 


a> O «b» o 


-- --- 


"^3" 


tl" 






^-. 


--/ 


~— 


«> 




CJ 






en 


'T> 


o ci cr <r! 


en en 


en 


CR 


<?) en 




en 


en 


en 


en 




8 


'e3 




























































o 


«+2 
































"** 


? 
































QQ 


o 
c 

-♦^ 

CO 

B 




4 

a. 




~£ 


*» ~ £ ~ 


2 2 


g> 


o 


•a* 

B JS 

1> -3 






gi 




s 




•to 




5 

*1 






"e = £ g 


^ & 






aS 




*<s 


^5 


2 


03^ 






CO 






€ 
















<§ 








«T 
























M 


















o 










_£ 








c« 


^ 


B 












m 










"C 










s 


t o 












^ 2 










-r 








B 


e 


es 






/. 




■~^ 


ce pQ 










CD 
ED 








J^ 


CJ 


£ 






— 

CD 
~i. 

a 
■z 
c 


CD 

o 


to be useful 
to soak 
to suckle 
to ring the be 


m, to swing, si 
wen, to water a 


a 



o 


o 

- 

-t-T 
ta 
O 


CO 

a 

£ cc 

5 o 
c: 




o 

— 

CD 

> 

■a 

o 


o 


r±4 
U 



o 


B 
O 

o 

C3 


O 
e$ 


C3 

1 


en 

B 

"S 

B 

^> 
^> 

o 






b 

X2 




e C C C 


1 i 

2 2 

^2: 




4J 

B 


en ^* 

B >£ 
.2: '^S- 




b" 

s 


b" 




B 


CD 

9 

b£ 

a 












CO 

C3 


























































B 
















^ 








/— V 










O 








-S 








-t-. »~ 






E 


B 










CD 




fl 




ft, 


-<— 


e' 
en 


e 


s £ 

<3 O 

2 2 


d 

c 


^ 


11 


en 


B 

"b 


2 


?3 
2 


»<5 


s 

cS 




e 

CD 






•^. 


■^ 


o a» «> ^ 


u ^ 


o 


o 


o ^> 






ftl 


^> 














W 


en 


en en en en 


en en 


en 


en 


cr cn 




en 


en 


-n 


en 


£ 

£ 




'co 

CD 








































£» £ 








>^> 










CO 


"^ 


— 




■^ 














o 










CD 

CD 


•♦«» 


H 




4 


j3 


en 

J2 


.£» >— • £2 « e$ 

S- o _ « 2 2 
e o- j? £ ££ 32 


B 
,3 


tax 

,2_ 


en £ 


* 


B 
e: 


e: 

2 


en 

o 

2 


at 

es 


8 

s 


e: 
en 




■""I 




-6 




r§ : 










-s 


























^ 














B 










Eh 








CO 

a 
o 














s 


B 
B 

5 





«0 

f 

*1 


^ 




<2 

fcJD tj 

B C 


v — 

bJD S 
b£*£ 










l •> 


^s 


JSd 






8 


>-> 


s- 

•3 


3 

/. 

c 


.2 

o 


to use 
to spri 
to suck 
, to sou 




g 
'5b 

o 


'53 

o 


Oh g 
CO ^ 

O .3 




O 


O 


'3 

o 


o 






es 

B 
es 


03 




c 


o 


- e? *- s= 

g 5 S ^ 


2 2 


g 


♦5 
B 


5 B 
CO J» 

§1 




b" 


b" 
at 


b" 
en 


B 








OS 




J5 


-_. 


2 g- ji ;§; g g 


B 


o 


^2 fB- 




M 


2 


§ 






Q 





102 



REFLECTIVE TERBS. 




REFLECTIVE VERBS 

ftd) ctbfubten, to cool oneself. 



103 



• dngfUgen, to fret about. 

. anflagen, to accuse oneself. 

. anfefyen , to look at oneself. 

. anjiefyen, to dress oneself. 

. drgern, to be angry. 

. auffiifyren, to behave. 

. auffyalten, to stay. 

. beffetn, to become better. 

. btngen, to be hired. 

. einmieujen, to lodge. 

. cinfdjrdnfcn, to manage. 

. entfetnen, to withdraw. 

. etfteum, to be glad. 

. faffen, to be composed. 



©te fufytten jtd) ab, They cooled 

themselves. 
£)u tjaft bid) gedngjMgt, Thou hast 

been fretting. 
(£t fyatte fid) angeftagt, He had ac- 
cused himself. 
3d) roerbe mic£ oft anfeljen, I shall 

often look at myself. 
@ie roerben ftcb angqogen fyaben, They 

will have dressed themselves. 
3d) murbc mid) dnjctn, I should be 

angry. 
(£r nnttbe fid) gut aufgefufyrt fyabcn, He 

would have behaved well. 
3d) t)telt mid) eine ©tunbe auf, I 

stayed for an hour. 
£>u bejferjt bid), Thou art becoming 

better. 
€r bingt ftd) fur bret Xtjatcr, He is 

hired for three Thalers. 
(£r mtetfjete ftd) in meinet iftdfje ein, 

He lodged close to me. 
Oftcm fd)rdn!t ftd) fefjr ein, They eco- 
nomize very much. 
28tr entfetncn un£, We withdrew 

ourselves. 
3f>t crfreuet (£ud) eutet ©cfunbfjeit, 

You are glad of your health. 
<Sie faffen ftd) leid)t, They are easily 



composed. 
. geroufynen, to be accustomed. (3te gerccfynen ftcf> baran, You are 

accustomed to it. 
. fyuten, to take care. 3d> fyutete mid) pot bcm jpunb, I 

guarded myself from the dog. 
. frdnfcn, to be grieved. £>u fyaft bid) geftdnft, You have 

grieved yourself. 
. taben, to refresh oneself. €t fyatte ftd) an (£rbbeeren gclabt, He 

had refreshed himself witli 

strawberries. 
. mdjjiflen, to controul oneself. (Sic n>irb fuh nun mipigcn, She will 

now controul herself. 



104 



REFLECTIVE VERBS. 



The following reflective verbs require the dative, 
fid) cmmctfjen, to presume ; fl$ getrauen, to be confident. 
ft'cft oornefymen, to intend 3 ficb oorftellen, to imagine. 
3$ mafje mtr an, I presume ; 3$ getraue mir, I am confident. 
3<f> nefyme mtr uor, I intend ; 3d) jMe mit J?or, I imagine. 

The following reflective verbs require the accusative of the per- 
son and the genitive of the thing. 
<Sr becjab ficb be$ ©tretteS, He left off quarrelling. 
5Btr roerben un$ be£ 5ftcmne$ perficbern, We shall make sure of the man. 
3c(> entlebtge mtcb bet ©ad>e, I acquit myself of the thing. 
©ie erfreuten fid) ibreS £eben£, They enjoyed their life. 
3d) bebicnte mid) fetneS ©efbe^, I made use of his money. 
(£r fd)amte fid) bet %bett, He was ashamed of work. 

When the object of the active is not expressed, the reflective is 
used instead of the passive ; as, 

Reflective. 
2)a$ $inb fyat ftd> mtoren, £)a£ £tnb ift t>er(oren (roorben), The child 

has been lost. 
£)er ©arten bejafylt jic^ (eid)t, £>er ©arten rotrb tetcbt beja^tt, The garden 

can be easily paid for. 

The following example will shew the conjugation of the reflec- 
tive verb ; as, 

©id) irtcn, to be mistaken. 



Infinitives. 

Present, fief) trren, to be mis- 
taken. 

Compound, $<fy getrrf fyaben, to have 
been mistaken. 

Future, fid) trren roerben, to be 
about to be mis- 
taken. 



Participles. 
Present, fid) irrenb, being mis- 
taken. 
Past, cjetrrt, 



being mistaken. 



Present. 



Indicative. 
id) trre mtcb, I am mistaken, 
bu trrj* btcb 
er irrt ficb 
rotr trren unS 
tfjr irrt eud> 
fie irren fid) 



Subjunctive. 
tcb trre mtcb, I may be mistaken, 
bu trreft bid) 
er irret fid) 
rotr trren un$ 
fyt irret eud) 
fie trren ficb. 



IMPERSONAL VERBS. 105 

Imperfect. 

Indicative. . Subjunctive. 

id) irrte mid), I was mistaken. I id) trrctc micb, I might be mistaken. 

Perfect. 
tcb fyctbe mid) getrrt, I have been i id) fyabe mid) geirrt, I may have 
mistaken. been mistaken. 

Pluperfect. 
icb fyatte mid) getrrt, I had been i id) fjcttte mid) a,eirrt, I might have 
mistaken. been mistaken. 

Future. 
tcb roerbe micb irren, I shall be mis- i id) roerbe mid) irren, I shall be mis- 
taken, taken. 

Past Future. 
id) roerbe mid) gcirrt fyctben, I shall I id) roerbe mid) gcivrt fyaben, I shall 
have been mistaken. ' have been mistaken. 

Conditional. Past Conditional. 



id) rourbe mid) irren, I should be 
mistaken. 



tcb rourbe mid) cuerrt fyctben, I should 
have been mistaken. 



§ 23. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

Impersonal Verbs are those which are only conjugated in the 
third person singular of any tense, preceded by the pronoun 
eg, it; as, 

1. Without an object : eg bebeutet, it signifies; eg bctuert, it lasts; 
eg bonnert, it thunders ; eg leud)tet fyeroor, it is clear ; eg reid)t f)in, it is 
sufficient ; eg tacit, it dawns ; and others. 

2. Impersonal verbs with the accusative : eg gefyt mid) an, it regards 
me ; eg befrembete micb, it was strange to me ; eg berriibt mid), I am 
grieved with it ; eg fycU micb enrjucfr, I have been delighted with it ; 
eg lacbert mid), it is ridiculous to me ; eg rotrb micb reuen (icb roerbe eg 
bereuen), I shall repent; eg oerbriefjt mid), I am offended; eg fd)laferr 
mid) (or mid) fcbldfert), I am sleepy. 

3. Impersonal verbs with the dative : eg fattt mir bei, I remember; 
eg kiud)t mir, I fancy ; eg teud)tet mir ein, I understand ; eg gcbufyrt 
mir, it is due to me ; eg cjelmcjt mir, I succeed ; eg ge&icmt mir, it is 
becoming to me; eg cjtucft mir, I am successful; eg a/berrc mir, it be- 
longed to me. 



106 COMPOUND VERBS. 

4. In speaking of a person or thing which is absent, or not per- 
ceived, the reflective verb eg giebt (there is or there are) is 
used; as, 

(£g giebt cine 3Rofe, roeldje fcbmcttj augftcbt, There is a rose which looks 

black. 
(£g giebt in (Snglanb ttiele $ftafcbtnen, There are many machines in 

England. 

The verb to be, fetjn, and not eg giebt, is used in the following 
sentences; as, 

(£g ift fetn 25rot in bem (tm) Ofen, There is no bread in the oven. 
£g ft'nb feine $mber in bem jUmmer, There are no children in the room. 

5. If the subject is not mentioned, the third person of the passive 
is used reflectively ; as, 

Passive, <£g roitb oft barubet gefcbvieben, There is a great deal of writ- 
ing about it. 
Active, 9ftcm fcbteibt oft batubet, They often write about it. 

6. Impersonal verbs with fyaben : eg rennet, it rains ; eg fxtf geregnet, 
it has rained. 

7. Impersonal verbs with fepn : eg gettngt mir, I am successful ; eg 
getang mir, I was successful ; eg ift nut gehmgen, I have been suc- 
cessful. 

8. Some are impersonal and reflective too ; as, (Sg dnbert fid? (ba$ 
SBettet), it changes; eg oetfydft ft'cb, it is the case; eg jiemt ftcb, it is 
becoming; eg oerbreitet ftcb, it is rumoured. 



§ 24. COMPOUND VERBS. 
Verbs are compounded with Prepositions, Prefixes, and Nouns. 

1. COMPOUND INSEPARABLE VERBS. 

The prepositions or prefixes be, emp, ent, er, ge, fyinter, mif?, uber, 
per, roieber, jet, t>oll, can never be separated from the verb, except 
when its meaning alters ; as, 

Compounds. Hoots. 

be, befucben, to visit ; fud)en, to seek, 

emp, empfinben, to feel ; ftnben, to find, 

ent, enterben, to disinherit. erben, to inherit, 

er, erfotfcben, to find out; fotfcben, to inquire, 

ge, gefyorcben, to be obedient ; fyoxfycn, to listen. 



COMPOUND SEPARABLE VERBS. 107 

Compounds. Moots. 

fainter, f)intettretben, to prevent ; trcibcn, to drive. 

mifj, mifjrat&en, to dissuade from ; ratten, to advise, 

uber, iibetjeugen, to convince ; jeugen, to produce, 

rer, mbUtyen, to fade away ; blufyen, to flourish, 

rctbet, nnberftreben, to resist. tfreben, to endeavour. 

jer, jcrfcbnetbcn, to cut into pieces ; fcbnetben, to cut. 

Examples. 
(£r bcfud)t feinen $reunb jeben £ctg, He visits his friend every day. 
<5ie empfanb ben ^Berluft i\)U$ Cannes, She felt the loss of her husband. 
(£ntetbtf bu beinen ©ofyn? Dost thou disinherit thy son? 
2)et Septet crforfdjte ben ©djuler, The master found out the pupil. 
@ute £tnber gefyotdjen, Good children obey. 
Wan fjintermeb ben <pian, They prevented the plan. 
Wiptcitty it>r bie ©efellfc^aft be$ Cannes, Dissuade her from being in 

the man's company. 
3Btr ubet jeugten u)n son feinem Untecbt, We convinced him of his error. 
£>ie 251ume setblufyfe febon lange, That flower faded away long ago. 
3$ roetbe cittern 236fen nnbetffreben, I shall resist all wickedness. 
£>et ©cfytetbet jetfdmitt ben 3Rocf, The tailor cut the coat into pieces. 

The foregoing do not admit the augment cje in the participle ; as, 
befuefct, visited. 

2. COMPOUND SEPARABLE VERBS. 

The separation takes place with the present, imperfect, and im- 
perative, and they then admit the augment cje, which follows the 
prepositions or particles ; as, abgefanbt, sent away. The preposition 
ju (to), before infinitives, follows after ; as, abjufenben, to send away. 
The prepositions or particles are to be always removed to the end 
of a sentence, except when it begins with a relative pronoun or a 
conjunction, which removes the verb to the end. 

Compounds. Hoots. 

ab (from, off, away), abjiefyen, to deduct, leave; jiefyen, to throw. 

ab abfecjen, to take off; fecjen, to put. 

an (on, at), anfyemejen, to adhere to ; fyemgen, to hang. 

an • • • • angretfen, to attack ; gteifen, to cease. 

auf (up, upon), aufmetfen, to listen to ; merfen, to notice. 

auf auftreten, to appear for; treten, to step. 

au$ (out, from), au£bred)en, to break, burst forth ; brecben, to break. 

au$ aitftitfcnj.to rest from; rufyen, to rest. 



108 



COMPOUND SEPARABLE VERBS. 



bei (by, at, near), 
bettor, (before), 
ba (there), 
bat (thereon) 
em, (in, into), 
bason (therefrom), 
bmd) (through), 
empor (up), 

fort (forth, on, away), 

fret (free) 

fyetm (at home) 

fjer, (here, hither), 

bin (thither, to), 

to$ (loose), 

mit (with, in company) 

nad) (after), 

nieber (down), 

ob (entirely), 

urn (about, over), 

?or (before), 

roeg (away), 

$u (to), 

jurucf (back) 

jufammen (together), 



Comj)ounds. 
bettretben, to collect ; 
besotfafyen, to impend ; 
bafe»n, to be there ; 
barfatlen, to represent ; 
emreben, to persuade ; 
basonlaufen, to run away ; 
burd)fucben, to seek through ; 
empotfaigen, to ascend ; 

Sfortbrtngen, to bring away, 
carry off; 
fretfptecben, to acquit; 
betmfucben, to visit ; 
fyetfyolen, to fetch hither ; 
btnfafyren, to drive off, to ; 
loSbtnben, to loosen ; 
, mttfolgen, to follow one ; 
nacbjagen, to hunt after ; 
nteberfdbretben, to write down ; 
obfiegen, to conquer entirely ; 
umfto^en, to overthrow ; 
t>orfd)lagen, to propose ; 
roeggefyen, to go away ; 
jutaffen, to permit; 
juutcftefyren, to return; 
sufammenfommen, to assemble ; 



Roots. 
rteiben, to drive. 
ftefjen, to stand, 
fetjn, to be. 
fallen, to place, 
reben, to speak, 
laufen, to run. 
fudjen, to seek, 
faigen, to step. 

bvingen, to bring. 

fprecben, to speak, 
fucben, to seek, 
bolen, to fetch, 
fasten, to drive, 
binben, to bind, 
folgen, to follow, 
jagen, to hunt. 
fcbtetben, to write, 
ftegen, to conquer, 
frozen, to push, throw, 
fcblagen, to strike, 
geben, to go. 
laffen, to let. 
fefyten, to turn, 
fommen, to come. 



Examples. 

£)ie 2>ame tegt ifyten Mantel ab, The lady takes off her cloak. 
<£t rufyre son feinen 2lrbetten au$, He rested from his work. 
Sttetbe bie ©cbulben bet, Collect the debts. 

When a relative pronoun or a conjunction (which removes the 
verb to the end) precedes, the prefix or preposition is not sepa- 
rated; as, 

£>er, roefcfjer bie ^papiere butd)fucf)t, ijt ein fluget 9ftann, He who looks 

over the papers is a clever man. 
3lfe ber 9tetd>ter ben SIngeflagten ftetfptad), roar icb jugegen, When the 

judge acquitted the accused I was present. 



( 109 ) 



3. COMPOUND 8EPARABLE AND INSEPARABLE VERBS. 

The following are used both as separable and inseparable verbs, 
and their sense is altered according to the manner in which they 
are used. In the first case the accent is laid on the prefix ; in the 
second on the first syllable of the verb itself. When used sepa- 
rably, the augment ge is added to the participle, which is not the 
case when considered as inseparable ; as, 

Separable. Inseparable. 

butcfyfafyren, to drive through ; burd)fat)ren, to penetrate quickly. 

burd)3t?faf)ren (Participle) ; butdjfafyven (Participle), 

butcbfeucfyten, to make wet through; burrfjfeucfyten, to become wet 

through. 
burrf)feud)tct (Participle), 
uberloufcn, to give a glance over, 
to trouble, to shudder (Reflect.) 
ubetlcutfen, (Participle), 
ubernefymen, to undertake, 
ubetnbmmen (Participle), 
ubettteten, to trespass, 
ubcttreten (Participle), 
umbtedjen, to transfer from one 

page or column to another, 
umbtocfyen (Participle), 
umfcifyten, to go round about in a 



burd>gefeud)tet (Participle) ; 
uberlaufen, to run over ; 

tibergelaufen, (Participle) ; 
ubernefymen, to take around 
ubergenommen (Participle) ; 
ubertreren, to step over ; 
ubergetreten (Participle) ; 
umbtecfjen, to bend round ; 

umgebrocfyen (Participle) ; 
umfabrcn, to overturn ; 



umgefafjten (Participle) ; 
unterfyatten, to hold under; 

untergefyaften (Participle) ; 
roieberfyoten, to fetch back ; 
rolebetgebott (Participle); 
roieberrufen, to call back; 
roiebergerufcn (Participle) ; 



umfctfjren (Participle). 
unterfyatten, to converse with, to 

keep, 
untetfyalten (Participle). 
n>ieberf)6(en, to repeat, 
rotebetfybtt (Participle), 
roibetrufen, to disavow. 
roibcrrufcn (Participle). 



4. DOUBLE COMPOUND VERBS. 

Compound Prefixes. Separable. 

anfyetm (at home), a nfyeun faiie n, to fall to one's share. 

Sbabeibletben, to remain near, not to be changed 
in opinion (Nenter). 



babet (thereby), 



110 DOUBLE COMPOUND VERBS. 

Compound Prefixes. Separable. 

better (along), bafyetremfeben, to rush along. 

ba\)in (therein), babinfMen, to put there. 

bat>on (away), bewonfuecjen, to fly away. 

einfyet (along, forth), einfcerfc&mten, to step along. 

berab (down), j fcerabtaffen (ftcb betablaffen, to condescend), to let 

( down, 
betan, (near, on), fyeranfetfyten, to drive near. 
berctuS (out of), Ijerau^rct^crt, to pull out of. 

betbet (close to), fyerktbringen, to bring in, to provide (for), 

beretn (here, in), fyetetntufen, to call in. 

fyjtttbet (here, over), fyetubetfprin^en, to jump over, 
fyetum (round), fyetumgeben, to hand round, 

beruntet (down), betuntetnefymen, to take down, 

bettor (forth), fyewovtommm, to come forth, 

betju (hither, near), b er $utaufen, to hasten to one. 
itberein (over to one), uberetnfUmmcn, to agree with, 
umfyet (about), umfyerfefyen, to look about, 

umbin (about it), umfnnfonnen, to forbear, prevent, 

ttotan (before, on), »otanfcbtcfen, to send on, along. 
wmt (beforehand, ) m#| , tI| to {n advance 

m advance), ) 
rorbci (close, near, by), Jjorbeifcbtc^en, to fail, miss. 
sorbet (before), t>orf>etrr>tfTen, to foreknow. 

t?otuber (by), potubetetten, to hurry by. 

All these are irregular, except uotctuSsabfen and ttotubcreilen. 

The augment ge of the participle, and the preposition ju of the 
infinitive, are placed after the compound prepositions and particles ; 
as, bctbtngejMt, being placed there ; bafyinjujMen, to place there. 

Compounds with fyet change into bin when a change for one place 
to another is to be expressed ; as, fytnablaffen, to let down ; binan= 
ftei$en, to climb up ; fymautyctyn, to go out ; fyinetntegen, to put into ; 
binuberfafyten, to ferry beyond ; fytnimfetroerfen, to throw downwards ; 
btnjufugen, to add to ; except fyetbet and tywov. 

Return signifies motion from one place to another and returning 
again; as, £ie $tnbet ticfen urn ben S5aum fyenxm, The children were 
running round the tree. 

Umbcc signifies a motion about; as, £>te ^naben bettelttn umfyet, 
The boys were begging about. 

One active with fyaUn in the compound tenses ; as, babinjMen, 



SEPARABLE VERBS. 1 1 1 

to put there; 3$ fabe ben ©tubl batjmgeftellt, I have put the chair 
there. 

One neuter with feyn in the compound tenses ; as, rorubercifcn, to 
hurry by; £r iff fo eben conibergeretlt, He was hurrying by just now. 

Compounds, Separable. 
21nbe, anbefefylen, to command; anper, anr-ertrauen, to trust with; 
auger, au£erfef)en, to choose from ; porbe, (ficb) r-orbefjalten, to contrive. 

Examples. 
3cf> befall ifynen an, es ntd)t ju tfyun, I commanded them not to do it. 
©ie sertraute nut tt>r ©elb an, She trusted me with her money. 
(£r crfat? bie beften ©olbaten aug, He selected the best soldiers. 
(£r befytelt fid) t>or, feme $mber nt fefyen, He contrived to see his children. 

Compounds, Inseparable. 
5lufer, auferroad>en, to awake again; auger, augerlefen, to select; 
auger, augerrodblcn, to choose. 

Examples. 
(£r auferroacbte urn fcd>^ Ufyr, He woke again at six o'clock. 
<5te fyaben mid) augerlefen, They have selected me. 
(£g (inb nur SBentge augerrodfylt, There are only a few chosen. 

5. SEPARABLE VERBS, 

Compounded with Adverbs with the augment ge. 
$ef)l, fcbttreten, to slip out ; fret, fretftef>en, to stand isolated (miv, 
to be permitted) ; gletd), gleicb|Wfen, to conform oneself to another ; 
log, logfduefjen, to discharge; ft aft, ftatffmben, to take place. 

Examples. 
(5r frttt jebeS 9M fet?t, He slips out every time. 
(£r ftefyt fret ba, He is standing there isolated. 
(£g ftefyt u)m fret, eg $u tbun, He is permitted to do it. 
<5te fyaben fid) bem Stemben gleid)geftetft, You have conformed yourself 

to the stranger. 
(£t fd)op feme 23it<$fe log, He discharged his rifle. 
£>ie ftronung fmbet motgen ^iatt, The coronation takes place to-morrow. 

6. INSEPARABLE VERBS, 

Compounded with Nouns or Adjectives. 
These take the augment ge, like regular or irregular verbs • as 
£uft, luftroanbeln, to walk in pleasure; ftecbt, redjtferrtgen, to justify '; 



112 ADVERBS. 

3fott), tatf)fd)tagen, to take counsel ; froi>, frofytocfen, to triumph; £anb, 
fycmbfyctben, to handle ; frufy, ftufytfucfen, to breakfast ; lieb, Uebfofen, to 
caress ; lieb, (kbdugeln, to ogle ; "D^iitf), mutfymafjen, to suspect ; »oU, 
»otUiet)en, to execute ; roittfafyren, to comply with one's wishes ; roeif= 
fagen, to prophecy. 

Examples. 

(£t luffrcanbelt jeben 5ftorgen, He is walking every morning in pleasure. 

9ftan tcd)tfertigte it>tt, They justified him. 

©ie fyaben potfyet getatf)fd)(agf, They have taken counsel before. 

(Et n>itb ni4>t micber ftofytotfen, He will triumph no more. 

©te fyctt e$ gefyanbfyabt, She has (handled) managed it. 

©ic fyctben nut ifynen gefrufyftucft, You have breakfasted with them. 

£>te Gutter fiebfofte if>rcn ©ctugtmc}, The mother caressed her baby. 

SXe junge £>ame t>at oft geUebdugett, The young lady has often ogled. 

3$ mutfymafjte, ba$ <&k au£$ef>ett rcairben, I suspected that you would 

go out. 
$Han tyat ben 23efefyl t>ott$o$en, They have executed the order. 
3d) fyabe 3fynen immcr genxllfafytt, I have always complied with your 

wishes. 
£)te ^ptopfyeten fyaben cjeroetfla^t, The prophets have prophesied. 

$off$tefyen does not require the augment gc. 

All the above verbs are regular, except polUiefyen, »oHjog, uoUjogen. 



§ 25. ADVERBS. 

Adverbs are words which stand either immediately before or 
after the verb, and add a stronger meaning to nouns, adjectives, 
and verbs. 

The principal are red)t, very (right) ; fefyr, very or much, followed 
by a past participle or an adjective. 

Examples. 

9)ton better fcfcldft re$t fanft, My father sleeps very softly. 
<£$ i)at btefe 9kd>t fefyt j!atf gefroren, It froze very hard last night, 
©et 5Kann routbe fe^r gefutdxet, That man was much feared, 
©ie muffen fefjt beutltd) fpteefcen, You must (should) speak very 
distinctly. 

There are adverbs of time, place, rank, number, qualification, 
affirmation, negation, doubt, and comparison. 



( 113 ) 

I. ADVERBS OF TIME REQUIRE THE FOLLOWING TENSES. 

1. Present: jef?t, at present ; nun, now; fyeutc, to-day; fyeut ju 
Xage, now-a-days ; gegemvivtig, at present. 

Examples. 
<ftun entfcblofj et fid), befier ju rcerben, He was resolved now to become 

better. 
3$ bin nun jroanjig Sabre att, I am now twenty years old. 
Spent ju £age ijl man Hiigcr, Now-a-days they are more clever. 
@egenn>artig babe id) fein @elb, At present I have no money. 

2. Imperfect, perfect, and pluperfect: geftern, yesterday ; fd)on, 
already ; t>orI?er, before (heretofore) ; neulicb, lately ; bisjefjt, 
hitherto; efyemate, formerly; twrbem, efyebem, before, ere now. 

Examples, 

9Bir gingen geftern eine ©tunbe au$, We went out yesterday for an 

hour. 
<£$ fyat fd>on ©teben gefcblagen, It has already struck seven. 
3cb ging sorber jut ftircbe, unb nacbber fpetfte id), I went first to church, 

and afterwards I dined, 
©ie ft'nb neulicb im (5d>aufyietbaufe geroefen, They have been lately to 

the theatre. 
2$i$jefjt baben nut tfjn nicpt gefeben, Hitherto w r e have not seen him. 
Cremate roaten fie Sreunbe, Formerly they were friends. 
QSotbem roat er ein £utfe, Formerly he was a Turk. 
€bebem fptad) man mebr Sranjbfifd), Formerly they spoke more 

French. 

3. Future and past future : mcrgen, to-morrow ; ubetmotgen, 
the day after to-morrow ; ton \e§t an, henceforth ; in ad)t £agen, a 
week hence; r-on nun an, hereafter; gteid), anon; fog(eid), imme- 
diately; augenblicntch, directly, presently; in $ur$em, shortly (ere 
long); nad)bet, afterwards ; ba(b, soon, by and by, now. 

In an inverted position the verb stands before the pronoun or 
noun ; as, 

9)?otgcn reetben roir bier fenn, To-morrow we shall be here. 
Uebermorgen n>irb mein ©eburtetag fetjn, The day after to-morrow will 

be my birthday. 
Son jefjt an, roetbe icb fleipig fenn, Henceforth I shall be industrious. 
3n acbt £agen roitb er angefommen fenn, A week hence he will have 

arrived. 

i 



114 ADVERBS OF TIME. 

$on nun an roetbe id) feine %eit serueren, I shall henceforth lose 
no time. 

@teia> ttatb fie fyier fetm, She will be here shortly. 

©oojeid) roitb bee Stfyee fcrtig fet>n, Tea will be ready immediately. 

Slugenbttdud) n>irb et fetne 2ltbett beenbigt fyaben, He will have finished 
his work directly. 

Slugenblidttd) bttnge ben 25rief auf bic *poft, Take that letter to the Post- 
office directly. 

3n ^utjem rcetben roir unferen $reunb gefefyen fyaben, Ere long we shall 
have seen our friend. 

9?ad)f)er rcerbe ich mtt 3fynen reben, Afterwards I shall speak to you. 

23alb roetben n>tr ©dntee fyaben, By and by we shall have snow. 
4. Uncertain times : oft, often ; fydufta,, frequently ; gelegentUcb, 

occasionally, conveniently ; bejtdnbto,, constantly ; fottrodfytenb, con- 
tinually ; roenn, when ; n>ann ? when ? bann, then ; tmmer, always, 

(ever) ; nie, ntemau?, (nimmet), never. 

Examples, 
9Kan fottte oft juftiebnet fet)n, They might often be more contented. 
SHetcbtfyum mad>t tjduftg ungludlia), Riches frequently cause unhappiness. 
3d) rcetbe getegentlicb be&afylen, I shall pay conveniently (when it is 

convenient). 
(£t ift befldnbig ju jpaufe, He is constantly at home. 
©ie ftnb fortn>df)tenb befd)dftto,t, You are continually engaged. 
38enn e$ gett ifr, (fo) n>etbe id) fommen, When it is time I shall come. 
28cmn roetben ©te nad) 25erttn retfen ? When shall you go to Berlin ? 
(£r fagte ntc^f, n>ann et &u £aufe fet), He did not say when he was 

at home. 
£5ann bat fte batum, if>te <S4>tx>cfJec ju befua>en, Then she asked to visit 

her sister. 
(£t fyat unmet Beit, abet ntemate Sufi ju atbetten, He has always time, 

but no inclination to work. 

II. ADVERBS OF PLACE. 

3Bo, where; toofnn, whereto; fuet, here; ba, bott, there; fyietfyet 
(tnefyer), hither ; bafyin, bottom, thither ; turn f)tet, baf>et, hence; t>on 
bort, thence; n>ot>on ? roofyet? whence? nafye, near; rcett, far; bid>f, 
close ; bet ©ette, aside ; fyinauf, up ; fytnuntet, down ; oben, above 
(upstairs); unten, below (down stairs) ; twrn, in the front; fyinten, 
behind; jutud, back; tudwdttS, backwards; t>otn>dtt$, forwards; 



ADVERBS OF NUMBER. 115 

ab, off; inroenbio,, internally; auSroenbtg, externally (by heart); 
braugen, outside; aug, aujjerfyatb, out of, abroad; irgenbroo, some- 
where; nirgenbS, nowhere; anbcrSrco, elsewhere; atfentfyalben, 
everywhere. 

Examples. 
3d) rcetfj, roo id) if>n ft'nben foil, I know where I shall find him. 
3Bo finb <5ie geroefen ? Where have you been ? 
SEBiflen ©ie, roofyin fie gefjen roolten ? Do you know where they intend 

to go to ? 
&$ roaren einige 2eute ba, There were some people. 
£>ort gefjt mcin 95rubcr, There goes my brother, 
jpterfyer barf 9?iemanb fommen, Nobody is allowed to come hither. 
<£$ ift bafyin gefommen, It has come as far as that. 
2>orn)tn gefjen fte 2ttte, They all go there. 
$on f>ter (tnb e$ tner Wetfen, It is four miles hence. 
£)af)er roerben fie fommen, They will come hence. 

III. ADVERBS OF NUMBER, ORDER, AND REPETITION. 

fyalb, half; etnmat, once ; jroctmal, twice, and others. 

The following are compounds : erjHid), first ; jroettenS, next ; 
fd)tte£lid>, at last; aftein, alone, apart; abcrmate, anew (a second 
time) ; roieber, again ; befonberS, asunder ; jufammen, together ; nur, 
only. 

The other denoting numbers are formed by adding tenS to the 
cardinal numbers ; as, jroeitenS, secondly ; brtttenS, thirdly ; tnertenS, 
fourthly : or by adverbial phrases ; as, bretmat, three times ; melmal, 
many times; mefyrere Wale, several times ; etnjeln, one by one ; (Einer 
nad) bem 2lnbern, one by one ; immer jroet, by twos ; (£tner urn ben 
5lnbern, by turns; attmdfylig, gradually; nad) etnanber, one after an- 
other ; nad) einanber, body for body ; (Scfyrttt fur ©djrttt, step by step ; 
nacb unb nacb, by degrees. 

IV. ADVERBS OF QUALIFICATION. 

@er ed)t, justly ; eitig, hastily ; gero6fmud>, usually ; fd)led)t, badly ; 
einfad), simply ; roeife, wisely. 

These adverbs form their comparatives by er, and their superla- 
tives by am, with the affix ften; as, gerecbt, justly; geredrter, more 
justly; am gered)tejten, most just; except etltg, hastily, which is ren- 
dered by fetjr, very, which the others only require in the com- 
parative. 

i2 



1 16 ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION. 

Examples. 
SBir fottten etnem 3eben gered)t roerben, We should become just to 

every one. 
£)er S?ote roar fefjr etfig, The messenger was in great haste. 
(£r ifr gcn>6t?nltc^> nid;t ofyne @efellfd>aft, He usually is not without 

company. 
(£r {janbctt fcbtecf>tcr, aU er fotfte, He acts worse than he should. 
©te fleibet fid) etnfacber, ate tie anbern ©amen, She dresses more simply 

than the other ladies. 
(£r fyanbett am rocifeften, He acts wisest. 

V. ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION. 

3a, indeed; ja roof)l,yea; ja fogar, even (ay, aye); ja, ja, indeed so, 
a stronger affirmation. 

The following are compounds ; viz. roafyrUcb, by faith, verily ; in 
ber Stfyat, indeed; fid>erltd>, surely ; geroi£, certainly; in ber Xfyat, atter= 
bingS, in fact. 

Adverbial phrases. 

@anj geroig roerbe id) ba fe*)n, To be sure I shall be there. 
Ofyne stoeifel roirb ct fommen, There is no doubt he will come. 
2UIerbtng$ ftnb feine 3Borte roafyr, By all means his words are true. 
Ofyne alien jSrceifel n>irb er rebltcf; fet)n, Without any doubt he will be 
honest. 

Examples. 

(£$ ift ja fyeute fd)6neS ^Better, The weather is indeed fine to-day. 

3a roofyf, e^ ift fefyr fcfcun, Indeed, it is very fine. 

3<i fogar i?at er mefjr gegeben, alS er fottte, He has given even more 

than he should (have done). 
$at er e$ gefagt? 3a, ja ! Has he said it? Indeed so ! 
SEBafyrlicb gtbt eS nur SBentge, roelcfye frei ron ©orgen ftnb, Faith, there are 

only a few who are free from care. 
3ft er in ber Stfyat fyter ? Is he indeed here ? 
(£r roirb ftd)erud) fommen, He will certainly come, 
©ercifj roirb ft'e aud> fyier fetjn, Surely she will also be here. 
<£.$ ift in ber %\)at roafjr, In fact it is true. 
MerbingS fyabe idj> gefefylt, In fact I have committed a fault. 

VI. ADVERBS OF NEGATION AND DENYING. 

^Hein, no, nay ; nid)t gerabe ba$, not exactly that; nid)t etnmal, not even. 
The following are derived; as, fetneSroegS (no ways), by no 
means ; auf feine SSeife, gar ntd)t, not at all. 



ADVERBS EXPRESSING DOUBT. 117 

Adverbial phrases, 
(£r ift feine&wgS (bureaus nicf>t) efyrgetjig unb ftolj, He is by no means 

ambitious and proud. 
2Btr finb mit ifjr gan$ unb gar ntd?r juftieben, We are not at all satisfied 
with her. 

Examples. 
%?tn, er ijr nid)t reruttf?eitt roorben, No, he has not been sentenced. 
^irf)t ger abe ba$ rooUre id) fyoren, I did not wish to hear that exactly. 
£r gefyt ntd)t einmal jur $ircbe, He does not even go to church. 

VII. ADVERBS EXPRESSING DOUBT. 

SBtefleicfct, perhaps ; mbgfid), possibly; roo 11163(1$, if possible; 
Sufillig, perchance. 

Examples. 

Sielletcfyt roetbe tc^ - <Srfo(g fyaben, Perhaps I shall have success. 
(5$ ftnnte mbglid) fet)n, It might be possible. 
5Bo m6gli$ rcerbe id? ®ie befudjen, If possible I shall visit you. 
^ufallig begegnete id) ifynen, Perchance I met them. 

VIII. ADVERBS OF COMPARISON, OR WHICH SIGNIFY A DEGREE OF 

EQUALITY. 

©o, also, so, indeed ; eben fo, just as ; gletd)falte, likewise ; gerabe 
fo, auf biefe 2Betfe, just so, exactly so ; roie, fo roie, as ; roie ? how ? 

The following are compounds : eben fo roenig, neither ; eben fo, auf 
dfjnltcbe 3Beife, in a similar manner, alike; ctynttcb, rote, like; eben fo, 
even ; g(etd)falte, ebenfalte, aud), likewise ; anbertf, otherwise, differently. 

Examples. 
(So finb bie 2ttenf$en, So is mankind. • 

3d) roiirbe eben fo fyanbetn, I would act in the same manner. 
3Btr roaren gleid)falte auf bem SBafl, We were likewise at the ball, 
©erabe fo muffen ©te fortfafyren, You must continue exactly so. 
©o rote er tebr, fo follten Me (eben, All should live as he lives. 
SBie fott id> ba$ ?erftef?en ? How shall I comprehend that ? (What is 

the meaning of it ?) 
£"£ ift eben fo roentg btUtg, ate red>t, It is neither reasonable nor right. 
%\\f dfynitdje SBeife f)at er gelebt, He has lived in a similar manner, 
©te finb ifym dfynlid), You are like him. 
£>a*> SBaffer ift fo fait roie St$, The water is as cold as ice. 
£r bellt trie ein Jgunb, He is barking like a dog. 



118 ADVERBS COMPOUNDED OF NOUNS. 

(5ie jTnb mit ebenfctlte roiltf ommen, You are just as welcome to me. 
(£t fottte anbet» gefyanbelt fyaben, He should have acted differently. 
2lnbet$ foltte et nidjt ttetfctfyten, Otherwise he should not proceed. 

Adverbial phrases. 
@(eid)fam, fo &u fagen, as though it were ; auf biefe SBeife, in this 
manner; auf jene SBeife, in that manner; o,anj o,lei<$, eben fo, all alike. 

ExamjAes, 
3cb tjabe iJ>n gjetcfyfam (fo $u fagen) ate meinen <Sof>n angenommen, I have 

received him as though he were my son. 
2Iuf biefe SBeife mufj man fyanbeln, In this manner one must act. 
2tuf jene 5Beife fyat et fetn @e(b t>erloren, In that manner he has lost 

his money. 
<£$ ijl mit ganj a,(et& It is quite the same to me. 

IX. ADVERBS COMPOUNDED OF NOUNS, AND THE AFFIXES {[<$, 

fyaft, and i<$f. 
5len<$U$, anxiously; g&ttftcfc, godly, godlike; fcerrficfr, magnifi- 
cently (masterly) ; bilblick figuratively ; freunblitf), friendly ; roeltltcb, 
worldly ; (obtid), praiseworthy ; f)6fltd), politely ; ofttid), easterly ; (eb= 
\)afty lively ; ernftyaft, seriously; Iafier^aft, viciously ; fjoljtd;*, woody ; 
fy&tid&t, silly; erbtcfo earthy. 

X. ADVERBS DERIVED FROM ADJECTIVES. 

$teinti$, meanly ; autlicfy, friendly ; f ctajUcfc, economically ; flugUcb, 
prudently; drmttd), poorly. 

Z is added to those which end in en ; as, 6ffentltd>, publicly ; o,ele= 
gentlicf), occasionally, conveniently ; gefriflTenrtic^, purposely. 

XI. ADVERBS DERIVED FROM VERBS. 

$ermun;li$, probably ; petmeibUcb, avoidably ; f>df?ltd>, ugly ; erbdtni= 
U<$, miserably ; nHtfttd), really ; Ibblid), praiseworthy. 

Those of IX. X. and XI. are all declinable, except gefegentltcb, 
occasionally, and ttermun)ticb, probably. 

Examples. 
£)et £)id)tev fprac^> bilbtid), The poet spoke figuratively. 
<£.$ roar (6b(icf) t>on U)m, It was praiseworthy of him. 
(£r fagte eg etnjUid), He said it seriously, 
©ein 35etrao,en roar tf)6rid)t, His behaviour was silly. 
©ie (ebte fdro,U$, She lived meanly. 



PREPOSITIONS. 119 

£r fjanbelte ftugticf), He acted prudently. 

<5ie waxen drmticfc gefleibet, They were poorly dressed. 

(5r tf>at e$ n>ift"entUcf), He did it purposely. 

<5$ ijl t>ermutf)licb n>af>r, It is probably true. 

d$ roar ttermeibltrf) obet unmmciblicf), It was avoidable or unavoidable. 

£)ie Wen ftnb ^dglicb, Monkeys are ugly. 

£r fat? crbarmlirf) au$, He looked miserably. 

9Mn Jpcrr ifl n)trf(id) nicbt ju £aufe, My master is really not at home. 



§ 20. PREPOSITIONS. 

Prepositions are originally adverbs, and as such they do not 
govern cases. They either stand alone or in connection with 
other words. 

Examples. 

2>te <&d)\\U if! au$, The lessons are finished. 

3)a$ (Spiel ift au£, The game is finished. 

2)a$ SHd)t brennt auf, The candle is burning up. 

3cb fenne ben 9Kann ju gut, I know the man too well. 

When circumstances of the subject or object are stated, they are 
called prepositions, and govern cases; as, the genitive, the dative, 
the accusative, and both the dative and accusative. 

I. PREPOSITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE GENITIVE. 

2tnftatt or ftatt, instead of, in the place of. The former is some- 
times separated, and <5tatt takes the place of a noun ; as, 
(£r nafym fie an £inbe$ ©tatt an, He received her as his own child. 
£)et 33acfer a,ab, anjlatt be$ 25robfeS, @elb, The baker gave money instead 
of bread. 

£)te£feit$, on this side ; as, 
£>te$fett$ be$ UfetS liegen bie fitfdbe, On tliis side of the shore the fish 
are laying. 

3enfettS, on the other side of; as, 
SenfeitS berf StuffeS ftefyen bie Sifter, On the other side of the river the 
fishermen stand. 

£alb, fyatbet, fjatben, on account of, for the sake of. The former 
signifies particularly a reference to a place, and is always com- 
pounded with some other word; as, oberfyalb, above; unterfjalb, 
below; augerfyatb, without; tnnerfyalb, within. 

£albet, signifies a motive; as, gfyre fjatber, for the sake of honour. 



120 PREPOSITIONS. 

£>alben i3 used with the personal pronouns ; as, beinetfyalben, on 
thy account 5 fetnetfyatben, on his account; tfyretfydben, on her 
account; ifyretfyalben, on their account ; 3fyretfyctlben, on your account ; 
(Suretfyatben, on your account. Likewise, befjfyalb, on that account ; 
roefjfyalb, on which or what account. 

Examples. 
Oberfyalb be$ ©attend (te$t ein ©cfctofj, Above the garden lies a castle. 
Unterfyalb be$ JpaufeS fdjUept ein %>ad), Below the house flows a 

rivulet. 
$ugetf?alb be» £>orfe$ ftefyen feine ©ebdube, There are no buildings out 

of the village. 
3nnert>atb b& SBalbeS butyen feine 25aume, Within the forest blow no 

flowers. 
3nnerfyalb eineS 9Ronat$ n>irb er Fommen, Within a month he will come. 
£r mufjte (£fyre t?atbet bejafylen, He was obliged to pay for the sake 

of honour. 
£)etnetfyatben roerben n>tr e$ tfyun, For thy sake we shall do it. 
Wlan roitb e$ meinetfyalben tfyun, They will do it for my sake. 

Sxaft, by the power of, according to, relates to the authority of a 
person ; as, 
<5r fyanbeft haft feineS 2lmte$, He acts according to his duty. 

£aut, according to, refers to an understanding, either by conver- 
sation or letter ; as, 

£aut feiner $u$fage tft e$ wafyr, According to his evidence it is true. 
2aut fetneS erften 25riefe$ tjt er gefunb, According to his first letter he 
is well. 
£rofj, in spite of, notwithstanding, shews courage of mind, or 
defiance ; as, 
£ro£ bet grofiten ©efafyr rettete er ba$ $inb, In spite of the greatest 

danger he saved the child. 
£roi| be$ @en>itter$ ging er au$, In spite of the thunderstorm *he 

went out. 
(Dat.) Stro§ bem guten ^Better blteb er ju Jpaufe, Notwithstanding the 
good weather he remained at home. 
SBermittelft, by the means or influence of; as, 
#ermtitelft etnes 9}ctd)en$ famen rotr an'$ 2anb, By the means of a boat 

we came to shore. 

• 

SBermtttelft ber Smpfefylung ber £)ame ttmrbe id) eingefufyrt, By the influ- 
ence of the lady's recommendation I was introduced. 
Um widen, for the sake of, refers to a motive or wish, and is 
always separated ; as, 



PREPOSITION 121 

Um ber Scute nxtfen fcbroeigen Sie, For the sake of the people be 

silent. 
Um feiner Samihe rortlen fotfre er tfyaria, fet)n, For the sake of his family 

he should be active. 
Ungeacbtet, notwithstanding, without regard to, shews the state of 
an indulging or opposing mind, and is used before and after the 
noun ; as, 
Ungeacbter feiner @ute rourbe er betrogen, Notwithstanding his kindness 

he was deceived. 
Seiner (Brrcnge ungeadjtet rcurbe er geacfyter, Notwithstanding his 

severity he was esteemed. 
Unrcett, not far from, refers to the short distance of a place ; as, 
Unrcett bed £>orfe£ roofynt er, He lives not far from the village. 

23ermco,e, by the power of, by dint of, according to; as, 
33ermc<}e 3fyte$ SSefefyte blteb er rubto,, According to your command he 

kept quiet. 
23erm6o,e ifyrer £>utfe fonnren ft'e leben, By means of her assistance they 

were able to subsist. 
SBibrenb, during, refers to a continuation of time or action ; as, 
SBabrenb be$ Sn-'ibtingS btuben bie erften 251umen, During spring the first 

flowers bloom. 
2B%enb feiner 3\ebe jlanben Me auf, During his speech all rose. 

38eo,en, on account of, by reason of, relates to some considera- 
tions, or to a necessity, and stands either before the noun or after 
it ; as, 
SBegcn metneS ^rubers bin id) fet;r beforgt, On account of my brother 

I am very uneasy. 
©etneS tjofyen 2tlter£ rcegen f onnte er nicbt arbeiten, By reason of his old 

age he was not able to work. 
SdngS, along; as, 
2dna,S be£ -R^eing cung icf> oft fpcttjieren, I often walked on the banks of 

the Rhine. 
(Dat.) £ing$ bem SBege traf id) if>n, I met him in the road. 

(Entlang, along, all through ; as, 
(inrlana, bed 2BatbeS i)6rte man ben <Bd)aii ber Sromperen, One heard the 

sound of trumpets all through the forest, 
pufolge, in consequence of. It is placed before the noun when it 
governs the genitive, and when it is used after it, the dative is 
applied ; as, 

Bufotge 3t?tc^ ^uftraged tjt cs 1 ejefebeben, In consequence of your com- 
mission it has been done. 



122 PREPOSITIONS. 

(Dat.) Sfytem Slufttage jufolge werbe td> fyanbeln, I shall act according 
to your commission. 

All prepositions which govern the genitive are derived from 
nouns, except una,ead)tet from ac^ten, to regard ; nxtfytenb from rodfyten, 
to last ; unroett from roeit, far. 

The prefix un, whenever used, shews the negative state or power 
of a person or a thing ; as, 

<£t ift fcf>r unatucftirf), He is very unfortunate. 

©ie roat uneetmogenb, She was not wealthy. 

£>a$ y&tttzt roat ungunftig, The weather was not favourable. 

2. PREPOSITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE DATIVE. 

5Iu$, out, out of, from, signifies a distance from, or removal to a 
place, but figuratively it indicates an origin or a motive ; as, 
(£t roarf ba$ @etb au$ bcm Sender, He threw the money out of the 

window. 
(£t eilte au$ bcm £aufe, He hurried out of the house. 
(£t t(?at i$ au$ Stcfytuna, fut jeinen ijetrn, He did it out of respect for 

his master. 
£)a$ ijl ganj au$ bee SEftobe, That is quite out of fashion. 

Idioms. 
<5t ijl mcfct bet £cmne, He is out of humour. 
$on taufenb 23etfpielen nenne i$ nut ein$, Out of a thousand instances 

I name but one. 
(£t ijl ofme ©telle, He is out of place. 
(£t gtno, nut am? bem SBege, He went out of my way. 

2tu$ er, out of, on the outside of, beside, signifies the external posi- 
tion or state of a thing or person ; as, 

(£t roctttet aufjer bee <5tabt, He is waiting on the outside of the town. 
SJufjet mic roar flttemanb ba, Besides me nobody was there. 

Idioms. 
SBtt roaten au£et 2lu)em, We were out of breath, 
©ie roaten au£et ft'<$, They were beside themselves (had no presence 
of mind). 

33ei, by, near, with, refers to places, persons, former times, cus- 
toms, rules, and affirmation ; as, 

25ei meinem jpauje flefyt nut ein 25aum, Near my house stands but 

one tree. 
3$ n>at l>eufe bti meinem gteunbe, I was with my friend to-day. 



PREPOSITIONS. 123 

(£r roar bci fciner Slbreife befebdftigt, He was occupied at his departure. 

(£$ t)l bet un$ feinc ©itte, It is no custom of ours. 

(£$ iff feine £Regel bei un$, It is no rule with us. 

<£$ if! bet metner (£f>re roafyr ! Upon my honour it is true ! 

Idiom. 
(£r ift bci guter ©efunbfyett, He is in good health. 

SMnnen, within, refers to an appointed time which cannot be ex- 
ceeded; as, 
5Hnnen cttf)t £agen foil ba$ ©elb au$be$afytt roerben, Within eight days 

the money shall be paid. 
SttfeS btefeS f>at fid) binnen brei 2Bocf>en eretgner, All this has happened 
within three weeks. 

(£ntgegen, opposing, towards, applies to a meeting, and stands 
after the noun ; as, 

2)er 28inb roar un$ entgegen, The wind was against us. 
3fyre ©timmen roaren mir entgegen, Their votes were against me. 
9Keine ©Item famen mir entgegen, My parents came towards me. 

©egenuber, opposite to, refers to persons or things, and stands 
after the noun ; as, 

9fteinem ^efannten gegenuber roofjnt ein ^merifaner, Opposite to an ac- 
quaintance of mine lives an American. 
£)a£ £au$ fh?f)t bem ©arten gegenuber, The house stands opposite the 

garden. 
St jMte ftcf) mir gegenuber, He placed himself opposite me. 

£dng£, along, signifies progression in a straight line ; as, 
3Btr gingen langS bem $u£pfab, We passed along the footpath. 

Idioms. 
©te fiifjrten mid) uber einen bunflen ©ang fort, They led me along a 

dark passage. 
Unermefjticbe J?eere t>on SBolfen fdjroebten (fegelten in Poetry) fangfam einfyer, 
Innumerable hosts of clouds sailed slowly along. 

9JUt, with, refers to a meeting, or to occupation, and to pleasure; as, 
£r roar oft mit mir in @efetlfd)aft, He was often in company with me. 
3d) roar jroei ©tunben mit ifjm befcbdftigt, I was occupied with him for 

two hours. 
€r fd)ricb biefeS mit eigner Jganb, He wrote this with his own hand. 
3d) bin mit bem ^>erm gut befannt, I am well acquainted with that 

gentleman. 
©ie ftnb nafye mit mir wrroanbt, They are nearly related to me. 



124 PREPOSITIONS. 

9ftit ben 3af)ten roitb man Aug, With years one becomes prudent. 
3$ mtbe ©ie mit SSetgnugen begleiten, I shall accompany you with 
pleasure. 

Idioms. 

€r ift bofe auf mid), He is angry with me. 

3)a$ if! md)t bet Ball bci mtt, That is not the case with me. 

©ie jtttetten sot $utd)t, They trembled with fear. 

3d) n?at mube com £aufen, I was weary with running. 

(£t f?at (£tgenfyetten an ftc^>, He has peculiar ways with him. 

<£t roar von ifytet ©d)bnf)eit fyingetijfen, He was smitten with her beauty. 

£t ift vot 28un) aufjet 2ln)em, He is out of breath with passion. 

Wad), after, to, refers to time, country, place, order, locality, 
direction, and inquiry ; as, 

Wad) etnet 9lbroefetu)eit »on btei 3af>ten Utytte t$ na$ £)eutf#(anb jutucf, 
After an absense of three years I returned to Germany. 

(£t teitfe balb batauf nad) jpamburg, He travelled to Hamburg soon after. 

SfJiein Sreimb rcitb ben erffcn ©onntag nad) Oftetn anfommen, My friend 
will arrive the first Sunday after Easter. 

3d) roerbe batb nad) jpaufe fommen, I shall soon come home. 

3f* bieS bet SBeg nad) 25itmingf)am ? Is this the way to Birmingham ? 

£)et $Kann ftagte nad) 3fynen, The man inquired after you. 

9?eben, beside, by the side of, refers to the presence of persons, 
places, or things ; as, 

©ie jlanben neben mtt, They were standing beside me. 
£)ie $ttd)e jlefyt neben bn ©tabt, The church stands near the town. 
JDie Sa§e Uegt neben bem Stifle, The cat is lying beside the table. 

^ftebfl, besides, together with, refers to a connection with others ; as, 
?$eine Steunbe empfafylen ftcf; 5lnbetn nebft mit, My friends recom- 
mended themselves besides me. 

Ob, on account of, is used in Poetry, and by sacred writers; as, 
(Poetry) <£t etftaunte ob bet 3ftebe, He was astonished at (on account 
of) the speech. 

©amrnt, together with, applies to the satisfaction or dissatisfaction 
of mind, also to sacrifices ; as, 
(£t ift fammt feinen gteunben mit un$ juftieben, He together with his 

friends is satisfied with us. 
©ammt u)tem ganjen ^Betmbgen fyat fie bod) feinen Stieben im £etjen, 

With all her whole fortune she has still no peace of mind. 
£>ie mutagen $rieget ftelen, fammt ifyten. £anb$leuten, fur ba$ SBofyl bu> 



PREPOSITIONS. 125 

$atertcmbe£, The brave warriors fell together with their country- 
men for the welfare of the country. 
<5ett, ever since, since, signifies both a continuation and com- 
mencement of time; as, 

(Beit meinem ©eburtSrage roar er nid>t fyler, Ever since my birthday he 
has not been here. 

£)ie$ ift ba$ jroeite 3«fyt feit feinem Zobe, This is the second year since 
his death. 
93on, from, of (by, on, upon, in), refers to motion, separation, 

distance, motive, origin, order, commencement of time, possession, 

rank, and materials ; as, 

3cb fomme ton $b\n, I come from Cologne. 

(£r gef)t ton Sinem jum 2Inbern, He goes from one to another. 

(Er routbe ju fruf? ton fetnen Sltern getrennt, He was separated from his 
parents too soon. 

9)iein 25ruber roofynt fefyr roeit ton mir, My brother lives a great distance 
from me. 

<£$ finb tide Weikn ton Sonbon nadj (Ebtnburg, It is many miles from 
London to Edinburgh. 

(£r reifte ton Stalien nad) bet ©d)roetj, He travelled from Italy to 
Switzerland. 

(Er gab e$ ton ganjem Jperjen, He gave it with all his heart. 

3Bir rourben ten fetner 2Ib|iu$t uberjeugt, We were convinced of his in- 
tention. 

(£r ftammt ton guter famine ab, He is descended from a good family. 

(£r roar ber (£rfk ton unSroetcfcer fprad), He was the first of us who spoke. 

(£$ gab S&erge ton bcr ©d?6pfung t?cr, There were mountains from the 
creation. 

(Er i\t (Etgentfyumer ton ^id)t^, He is in possession of nothing. 

2)te ^rinjc(finn ton SBolfenbuttcl roar fei?r liebretd), The princess of Wol- 
fenbiittel was very charming. 

(Ein S8ed)er ton ©ttber rourbe tcrmt^t, A beaker of silver was missed. 

Idioms. 

(Er terbarg e$ tor mtr, He concealed it from me. 

(Er entjog ftd) bcr ©efellfdmff, He withdrew from society. 

(Er tt>at e$ au$ ©etj, He did it from avarice. 

©te fyinberte micb am (2d)reiben, She prevented me from writing. 

©te littcn an ifyren SBunben, They suffered from their wounds. 

£Hefe$ 2Berf rourbe au$ bem (Engttfcben uberfe^t, This work was trans- 
lated from the English. 

(Er fprtdtf auS (Erfafyrung, He speaks from experience. 



126 PREPOSITIONS. 

gu, to, towards, at, signifies motion, rest, time, position, appoint- 
ment, arrangement, value of money, accident, choice, connection, 
number, and readiness ; as, 

3$ mtbe ben $dtbet ju 3fynen fdnrfen, I shall send to you the dyer. 
(St ging jut ^itefce, He went to church, 
©ie gtngen bem Sanbe ju, They went towards the land. 
£t roofynt ju ©ottingen obet in bonbon, He lives at Gottingen or in 

London. 
£)et 2ttjt routbe jut 9?ad)tjeU getufen, The Physician was called at 

night-time. 
<£t ijl ju spfetbe, He is on horseback. 

©ie famen jut ted>ten jtett, They came at the appointed time. 
£>et Secret fam urn btei Uf)t, The master came at three o'clock. 
£>et 95ertrag fam ju ©tanbe, The treaty was settled. 
2>et JDufaten tmirbe ju btei Stealer getecfynet, The ducat was accounted 

to three thalers. 
St ftutjte ju 25oben, He fell to the ground. 
9ftan \)<xt SRu(fe( jum @taat&#JUnijter etnxtylt, They have chosen Russell 

as a minister of state. 
£)et 23cmb gef)6tt ju btefem SEBerfe, That volume belongs to this work. 
©ie fteten ju jpunbetfen, They fell by hundreds. 
€t n>ttb balb jut (bet bet) jpanb fei)n, He will soon be at hand, 
i. e. ready. 

Idioms. 
3$ bin an ^Kdjngfeit geroofjnt, I am accustomed to frugality. 
3<f> tfyue e$ auS ©efdfltgfett gegen ©ie, I do it out of kindness to you. 
<£t ticfytete feine 2lugen auf ft'e, He turned his eyes to her. 
3$ nxHige in 3^ @efud>, I consent to your demand. 
€t ift mit u)m setroanbt, He is related to him. 
©ptec^en ©ie mit mit ? Do you speak to me ? 
<i.$ mat md)t nad) metnem @ef$macf, It was not to my taste. 
<£t ift etn $tinb bet gteUjeit, He is an enemy to liberty. 

gufotge, according to, signifies conformity ; as, 
3d) \)0.U %fyum ^efefyl jufolge cjcfjanbclt, I have acted according to 
your command. 
3un>tbet, against, in opposition to, refers to an opposition and 
aversion. It stands after the pronoun or noun ; as, 

©ie fyanbetten mit jurcibet, They acted in opposition to me. 
€t fyanbelte bem ©efeije jurcibet, He acted against the law. 
£)et Stfyee n>at mit juroibet, The tea was repugnant to me. 
£>et £dtm ift if>r jumibet, The noise is disagreeable to her. 



PREPOSITIONS. 127 

3. PREPOSITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE ACCUSATIVE. 

95i$, till, is generally followed by another preposition, or preceded 
by it ; as, 
3d) rcerbe bt)? jc&n Uf)t ju jpaufe bleiben, I shall remain at home till 

ten o'clock. 
Batten ©ie bis ben jefjnten (10 ten) btefeS donate, Wait till the 10th 

of this month. 
<5ie femnen tract) son fed>$ bis acfyt Ufjr etrcatten, Yon may expect me 

from six to eight o'clock. 
St tao, bis an ben jpate im 2Baf[et, He was lying with the water as 

high as his neck, 
©tc ftnb bis auf jto&lf etttunfen, They were all drowned except 

twelve. 
St cjincj bis uim (Batten, He went even to the garden. 
<Sie rttten bi$ nad) bonbon, They rode as far as London, 
©ie roar, jefyn bis elf 3a()te alt, She was from ten to eleven years old. 

£)utd), through, signifies a motion through a place, the cause by 
which a thing has been produced or effected, also the course of 
time ; as, 
Seine Struppen gingen butd) ba$ £)otf, His troops passed through the 

village. 
SStumen finb but<$ <Pffan$en entftanben, Flowers are produced by 

plants. 
St ftutjte fid) butd) bie $(ammen, He rushed through the flames. 
St arbeitete bie fjatbe ^Racbt butd) or fytnbutcb, He worked half the 

night through. 
St fonnte nid)t butd) ben ©djlot entroeid)en, He could not escape through 
the chimney, 
gut, for, instead of, signifies purpose, cause, reason, representa- 
tion, advantage, isolation, error, order, value ; as, 
9ftan fotcjt juetjt fut ficb fetbfr, One provides first for oneself. 
St fod)t fut bat aUgemeine 25efle, He fought for the public good. 
Site etn teid>et 9ftann fonnte et fut un$ bejafylen, Being a rich man he 

was able to pay for us. 
(Die SDttnijfet fyanbetn fut bm SanbeSfycttn, The Ministers act for the 

Sovereign. 
3d) xvexbc fut <3ie fptecf>en, I shall speak for you. 
St (ebt nut fut fid), He lives only for himself. 
5Btt fyielten ifjn fut einen j?eud)tet, We thought him a hypocrite, 
©tufe fut (Stufe cuncjen rcir roeitcr, We went on step by step. 



128 PREPOSITIONS. 

€r faufte ba$ 33ud) fur eincn Stfjatec, He bought that book for one 
thaler. 

Idioms. 

3d) ging, jut SBieberfyerjMung meiner ©efunbfyeit, nad> 3tatten, I went to 

Italy for the recovery of my health. 
<£r fkrb au$ Mangel an 'iftafyrung, He died for want of food. 
3<f> fefyne mid) nad? 3fynen, I long for you. 

<5ie ift, roegen ifyrer ©d)6nf)ett, berufymt, She is celebrated for her beauty. 
3d) fummre mid> ntd)t urn it?n, I do not care for him. 
£>as> ©cfytjf iff na$ bonbon beftimmt, The ship is bound for London. 
©tefeS £eber ift gut ju ©djufyen, This leather is good for shoes. 

@egen, against, towards, signifies opposition, approach, direction 
to, and exchange ; as, 

(£r fyanbelte gegen feinen ©ruber, He acted against his brother. 
(£r ftarb gegen ba$ (£nbe be$ 28inter$, He died towards the end of the 

winter., 
SSir fegetten gegen Often, We sailed towards the east. 
Q£r »ertaufd)te $3aare gegen SBaare, He exchanged goods for goods. 

@en, is an abbreviation of gegen ; as, gen jpimmel, gen Often, (to 
heaven, towards the east), and is frequently used in Scripture. 

Ofyne, without, signifies non-existence, deficiency, absence, and 
exclusion ; as, 
X)te £t)iere ftnb ofjne ^erftanb erfc^aflfen, Animals are created without 

reason. 
£)er £tfd) ift ofyne $u£e, The table is without feet. 
SSir lebten (ange ofme unferen 93ater, We lived a long time without 

our father. 
(5$ frmn ofme ifyn gefdjefyen, It can be done without him. 
3cf> ging auS, ofyne 3emanben ju fefjen, I went out without seeing 

any one. 
©onber, without, is only used in poetry and in refined language. 
It is the same as ofyne, 
(£r faf) bem £obe fonber ©rauen entgegen, He looked for death without 

fear. 
Um, round, about, for, of, signifies rest, motion, and prospect; as, 
<5ie fa£en Mc um ben 23oum fyerum, They were all sitting round 

the tree. 
€r lief um ba$ j?au£ fyerum, He run round the house. 
£)er Pettier fam einen um ben anbern Stag, The beggar came one day 

after the other. 
(£iner um ben 5lnbern fprad), One after the other spoke. 



PREPOSITIONS. 



129 



3d) fam urn ba$ 95ucb, I lost the book. 

dx rcujjte urn bie <5ad>e, He knew of the circumstance. 

Wan fotttc nicbt urn @elb fpielen, One should not play for money. 

<£x Sat urn Arbeit, He asked for work. 

£er £ifd) iff urn jroei Suj? tjohcr, ate bic S6anf, The table is about two 

feet higher than the bench. 
2>e$ Htaib* urn acbt Ityr gef>e id) aitf, I go out at eight o'clock in 
the evening. 
When urn is used before infinitives, it signifies "in order to," urn— 
ju, and in this case it is used as a conjunction ; as, 
£r fpridjt, urn ge&ort ju rcerben, He speaks in order to be heard. 

When it is used as an adverb, it signifies the passing away of 
time ; as, 
Sffienn bet Wlonat urn iff, n?erbe icb beja^en, At the end of the month 
I shall pay. 
SBiber, against, in opposition to, expresses opposition, endeavour, 
disinclination, and religious tendency ; as, 
<3ie fyanbelten roibet ba^ ©efef?, They acted against the law. 
<£r fcbnxtmm rrtbet ben ©trom, He swam against the tide. 
dt fotttc e$ fetbft rotber feinen Men tfcun, He ought to do it even against 

his will. 
Jpanbte ntcfu roibet @otte£ ©ebote, Do not act against the command- 
ments of God. 

4. PREPOSITIONS WHICH GOVERN BOTH THE DATIVE AND 
ACCUSATIVE. 

With the Dative, asking the ques- With the Accusative, asking the 
tion rco? rccran? where? question n>ofytn? where to? 

Continuous state. Motion from one place to another. 

2In, on, near, at, by, to. 
3)et Slpfel bangt an bem SBaume, The 3d> rcerbe ben 5Kccf an bie 28anb ban= 
apple hangs on the tree. gen, I shall hang the coat on 

the wall. 
JDer jpunblaa, an ber $ette, The dog 3$ lecjte ben jpunb an bie $ette, T 

was lying by the chain. fastened the dog to the chain. 

%xx\ 2tbenb fduen ber Wonb, In the (£r fc&rteb ein @ebtd)t an ben 3Ronb, 

evening the moon shone. He wTote a poem to the moon. 

<£$ febtt nicbtan^cvleumbetn, There SHefetf 2Bort n>ar an ^Berleumbet a,e= 

is no need of slanderers. ticket, This word was directed 

to slanderers. 



130 



PREPOSITIONS. 



St ftyrieb am Stifle, He was writ- 
ing at the table. 



St fd)teibt an ben Stifty, He writes 
on the table. 



5Iuf, upon, at, to. 
3d) mar auf bem SDad&e, I was upon St ftetgt auf ba$ ©ach, He is climb- 



the roof. 

SBtt maten auf bem 2>a(te, We were 

at the ball. 
3d) bticb auf bet jpocbjeit, I remained 

at the wedding. 

9Kan kaucbt auf bet 3teife tnel @elb, 
One wants much money upon 
a journey. 

2)a$ Sflen f!et)t auf bem Stifle, Din- 
ner is standing upon the table. 

^)tntct, 
£>et ©tod f^ef>t fytntet mtt, The stick 

stands behind me. 
IDec £iget mat fyintet 3f>nen, The 

tiger was behind you. 

3n, in, 

3d) tufe bem fttnbe im Bimmet, I call 
the child who is in the room. 

St gtng im ©atten fpa^ieten, He 
was walking in the garden. 

St mat in feinen 35ettad)tungen t>er- 
ficft, He was immersed in his 
meditations. 

©te fiel im $eflet, She fell in the 
cellar. 

St mat fd)0n in meinet Samitte c'm= 
gefufjrt, He was introduced al- 
ready to my family. 

St kbt im Ungtud, He lives in mis- 
fortune. 

St fotgfe tf;m in bet <5tabt, He fol- 
lowed him in town. 



ing upon the roof. 
SBir gingen auf ben S5aff, We went 

to the ball. 
9Kotgen metbe id) auf bk £od>$eit 

gefjen, To-morrow I shall go to 

the wedding, 
©ie gingen jufammen auf bie SRetfe, 

They went upon a journey 

together. 
3$ ftette ba$ SjTen auf ben Stifcfc, I 

put the dinner upon the table. 

behind. 
St )tetite ben ©tod Winter mid), He 

put the stick behind me. 
£>et £tget mitb Winter ©ie fommen, 
The tiger is coming behind 
you, i. e. to bite. 

into. 

3* tufe ba$ $tnb in ba$ Btmmet, I 
call the child into the room. 

St gtng allein in ben ©atten, He 
went by himself into the garden. 

St sertiefte ftd) in feme 35ettad>tun= 
gen, He immersed himself in 
his meditations. 

©ie ftel in ben Reflet fytnein, She 
fell into the cellar. 

St mutbe in meine Samilie c i n g C= 
fufytt, He was introduced into 
my family. 

St ftutjt fid; m'$ (in ba$) Ungtud, 
He draws himself into misfor- 
tune. 

St folgte iljm in bie <5tabt, He fol- 
lowed him into the town. 



PREPOSITIONS. 



131 



Idioms. 
(£r nbtlugte micb auf cine freunbfd>aft= 

lidje SBcife, He invited me in a 

friendly manner. 
3d) ftnbe gropcn 93orn)eit babei, I 

find a great advantage in it. 



Idioms. 
(£r forfd)te bet (3ache nad), He in- 
quired into the matter. 

3Bir mtiffen btc ©acbe genau unter: 
fudjen, We must search closely 
into the matter. 



With the Dative, asking the ques- With the Accusative, asking the 
tion too ? rooran ? where ? question rcot?in ? whereto ? 

Continuous state. Motion from one place to another. 

•fteben, beside. 
$5atf <Bd)\vett fytng neben tfym, The (£r fyangte baS ©d>roert neben fid), He 



sword was hanging beside him. 
(£r fag neben feiner Gutter, He was 
sitting beside his mother. 



hung the sword beside him. 
©ie fef?te ftd> neben ibren ©eltebten, 

She placed herself beside her 

lover. 
€r lecjte ba$ 23ud> neben mid), He 

placed the book beside me. 



£>a$ ©eroefjr lag neben mir, The 
gun was lying beside me. 

Ueber, over, above, beyond. 
£)er £nabe ft'tjt uber mir, The boy £>er Sebrer fe£te ben &nabcn tibct 



is sitting above me. 

£)er 2ib(er ftiegt uber bcm Stuffe, The 
eagle is flying over the river. 

£)er ©deleter tying uber ifyrem $opfe, 
The veil was hanging over her 
head. 

Idiom. 
(£r fd)Uef beim Sefen cin, He slept 
over the book. 



mid), The master placed the 

boy above me. 
2>er Sibler fuegt uber ben Ship, The 

eagle is flying beyond the river. 
<5ie tying ben ©cbleier uber i(?rcn 

$opf, She put the veil over her 

head. 

Idiom. 

(£r betrauert ben £ob fetnetf #reunbe£, 
He mourns over the death of 
his friend. 



Unter, under, below, beneath, amongst, among. 



3tyr £afd)entud) Ucgt unter bem 
©tutyle, Your pocket handker- 
chief lies under the chair. 

3cb fanb ityn unter ben 2lufrutyrern, I 
found him among the rebels. 



(£r rcirb bat papier unter ben Stutyl 
legen, He will put the paper 
under the chair. 

£r jog mid) unter btc 'ilufrutyrer, He 
threw me amongst the rebels. 



k2 



132 



PREPOSITIONS. 



(£r gtno, unter bem (£rfer fyafjteren, 

He was walking below the 

balcony. 
<5a ift !cin @elb unter ben ©o(baten, 

There is no money among the 

soldiers. 



dr fluc^tetc ft'$ unter ben ^r!er, He 
made his escape under the bal- 
cony. 

<£r ttertfyeilte tnel @elb unter bte ©o(= 
baten, He divided much money 
amongst the soldiers. 



53 or, before. 



©te fod)ten tor bet Seftuno,, They 
were fighting before the forti- 
fication. 

3$ fctm eine ©tunbe t>or Sfynen, I 
came an hour before you. 

(£r prebtcjte tor bem ^Bolfe, He was 
preaching before the multi- 
tude. 

Brcifdjen, 
<£r fafj sn>ifd>en fetnen ©ctaftern, 
He sat between his sisters. 



<£$ ift fein 3laum jrotfcfyen ben Stt= 
fctjen, There is no room be- 
tween the tables. 

($.$ roar ©trett jmifcben ben 2JuStdn= 
bern, There was strife between 
the foreigners. 

3cb lebe jn>ifcf>en Surcbt unb #offhung, 
I live between fear and hope. 



©te cuno,en t?or tie $efhmg, They 
went to the front of the fortifi- 
cation. 

§r ftelfr fid) tor ©te, He places 
himself before you. 

<£t brad)fe ft'e ttor ben Dftcfcter, He 
brought them before the judge. 

between. 

(£r fe§te ben <5najdnber jrotfcfyen bte 
$ranjofen, He placed the En- 
glishman between the French- 
men. 

Segen ©te ba$ 23ud) jrotfdjen ba$ 
papier, Put the book between 
the paper. 

9)ftfd)en ©ie fetnen ©amen jrcifcfyen 
ben ^feffer, Mix no seed with 
the pepper. 

<£$ ijl etn proper Unterfcfyteb jmifc^en 
ben betben 25rubern, There is a 
great difference between the 
two brothers. 



5. PREPOSITIONS COMPOUNDED WITH THE ARTICLE. 

5Jm (instead of an bem, at the) : 
©ie 93irne fydngt am S5aum, The pear hangs on the tree. 

£ur (instead of ju ber, to the) : 
<£$ gtncjen Siete &ur $ir$e, Many went to church. 

3um (instead of ju bem, to the) : 
©ie £ngldnber reifen sum SSerom'igen, The Englishmen travel for pleasure. 



PREPOSITIONS. 133 

£)utch» (instead of burtf) ba$, through the) : 
£ie jjitynetftefen burch^ Jr>au^,The fowls were running through the house. 

gurS (instead of fur ba$, for the) : 
<2te fhutten fur 5 £ -Batertanb, They were fighting for their native country. 

The following expressions, although frequently used, are not 
correct; as, 

X)urd)n (instead of burcb ben, through the) : 
$Bir fangen burd>n SBalb, We were singing through the forest. 

5tu$m (instead of au$ bem, out of the) : 
<5ie gtng au£m jjaufe, She went out of the house. 

<8orm (instead of t>or bem, before the) : 
3rf) f?ei?e tform $euer, I stand before the fire. 

6. PREPOSITIONS COMPOUNDED WITH THE ADVERB bet, AND THE 

demonstrative pronoun berfetbe, biefetbe, bafielbe, the same. 
£>abei (near by) : 
C£r frcmb babet unb lacf)te, He was standing by and laughing. 
Idiom : (£$ blieb babei, It remained the same thing. 

IDctbutrf) (instead of butch baffelbe, through that) : 
JDabutd) ift et rcicf) gerootben, Through that he has become rich. 

2)afut (instead of fur baffetbe, for the same thing) : 
IDafur t?iett id) it?n nid>t, I did not think him so. 
3$ gab nur etnen ©chiding bafur, I gave only one shilling for it. 

£)agegen (instead of gegen bafietbe, against it) : 
(£t fagte ^cirf)t^ bagegen, He said nothing against it. 

£)amit (instead of mit bemfelben, with it) : 
<5ie ijt bamit juftteben, She is satisfied with it. 

6. prepositions compounded with the demonstrative 
pronoun bet, bie, baffetbe. 
£)arnad) (instead of nach bemfelben, after it) : 
(£t griff ntcht batnad), He did not grasp it). 

Daneben (instead of ncben bemfelben, neben baffelbe, close to) : 
(£t flanb baneben (neben bem £tfct)e), He stood close to (close to the table). 
(£t jtellte ficf> baneben (neben ba$ ©opfya), He placed himself close to 
the sofa. 



134 PREPOSITIONS. 

£)atcm (instead of an bemfelben, an bafielbe, on it, it) : 
<i$ finb feme 5lepfet baran (an bem SSaume), There are no apples on it 

(on the tree). 
(£t flie$ baran (an bie Satire), He pushed it (the door). 

£>atauf (instead of auf bemfelben, auf baffelbe, thereon, towards it) : 
St ftet>t barauf (auf bem SSetge), He stands thereon (on the mountain). 
St o,et)t barauf (auf ben .Spunb) tog, He is going towards it (towards 
the dog). 

£)atin (instead of in bemfelben, therein) : 
St ift barin (in bem ©atten), He is therein (in the garden). 

£>arein (instead of in baffelbe, in it) : 
St legte ftcb ba.tetn (in ben ©tteit), He interfered in it (in the quarrel). 

7. PREPOSITIONS COMPOUNDED WITH THE RELATIVE PRONOUN 

rcetcbet, e, e$. 

SBobutcb (instead of butcb reeled, but<$ roen, by what means, 
through whom) : 

SSBobutcb eg gefcbat), wax nifyt befannt, By what means it happened was 

not known. 
$3obutcb (butd) n?en?) etfnelten ©te bin ^acbticbt? Through whom did 

you receive the news ? 

5Bofut (instead of fut n>elcbe$, fut n>en, for what, for whom) : 
S$ tjf nicbt bex 5ftube roetn), roofut et atbettet, It is not worth while to 

work for what he receives. 
S&ofut (fut roen ?) atbeiten <&ie ? For whom do you work ? 

2Boa,ea,en (instead of o,eo,en rcelcbeg, gegen rcen, against what, against 
whom) : 

SBogegen (gegen ^etfeumbuno,) »ettf>eibia,te et ftc^>? Against what (against 

slander) did he defend himself? 
SBoge^en (gegen rcen) fptad) et ? Against whom did he speak ? 

Somit (instead of mit roelcfyem, mit roern, by what means, with 
whom) : 
SBomit rcoften ©ie eg beroeifen? By what means will you prove it ? 
SBomtt (mit n>em) rootten ©ie au&jefjen ? With whom will you go out ? 

SBornacb (instead of na$ roelcbem, nacb n>em, according to which, 
for whom) : 
2Botnad> (nad> reelcben ©tunbfd^en) et b^nbelt, ift befannt, The principles 
according to which he acts are known. 



PREPOSITIONS. \S5 

SBornad) (nad) rcetcbem $r$te) trerben ©te fcf>icfcn ? For whom (to which 
physician) shall you send ? 

2Borcm (instead of an iwlcfcem, rcelcf)er, roetc^c, by what means, of 
what, to whom) : 

SBoran erfennen ©w ba$? By what means do you know that? 
SBoran (an metier ^ranff?cit) flarber ? Of what (of what disease) did 

he die ? 
2Boran (an rcetdje 23ef)6rbe) roerben ©w ftcf> rcenben ? To whom (to which 

authority) will you apply ? 

SBorauf (instead of auf rcetcfyeS, n>a$, on what, what for) : 
SBorauf (auf reeffen $erfpred)en) rcrfjnen ©ie ? On what (upon whose 

promise) do you depend ? 
SBorauf n>atten ©ie ? What do you wait for ? 

SBorauS (instead of au$ roelcfyem, auS roetdjen, from whence, from 
what) : 

SBotauS (au$ rocldjcm Binimer) fam er ? From whence (out of which 

room) came he ? 
2&orau6 (auS rcelcfyen SBotten) fd>tte^cn ©ie ba$ ? From what (from 

which words) do you conclude that ? 

SBorin (instead of in roelchem, in which, of what) : 
£>a$ Spau$, roortn et roofynr, tft fefjr alt, The house in which he lives is 

very old. 
SBorin befiefyt 3fot 93ermogen ? Of what does your fortune consist ? 

SBorein (instead of in rcelcbeS, into which, with what) : 
SBorein (in n>el$e 3fngetegenf)et0 f>at cr ft'tf) cjemifcbt ? With what (into 
which affair) has he mixed himself? 

8. PREPOSITIONS COMPOUNDED WITH THE ADVERBS tjtCr, tyt, fun, 

nebcn, fort, 
jpietan, hereon, hereat ; tyetauS, hereout, by this ; fyiettn, herein ; 
fytetbei, herewith ; permit, herewith, with this ; fjteroon, hereof; fyer= 
au$, out from; fyinauS, out of, out to; fyetetn, in; {jinein, into; f>erun= 
ter, down from ; fytnuntet, down to ; fyernarf), hereafter, afterwards ; 
fortan, henceforth ; nebenfyer, besides, &c. 

9. PREPOSITIONS COMPOUNDED WITH PREPOSITIONS. 

©urcfcauS, throughout, altogether; nebenbei, close by; porau$, be- 
forehand ; ubetautf, exceedingly ; uoruber, over ; mituntcr, sometimes ; 
injroifeben, in the meantime. 



( 136 ) 



10. PREPOSITIONS BEFORE INFINITIVES DO NOT GOVERN ANY CASE, 
AND ARE REGARDED AS CONJUNCTIONS. 

£t ging rceg, ofme mit <£tvoa$ ju fagen, He went away without telling 

me any thing. 
(?t ram nid)t roieber, urn ba$ @efb $u bejafylen, He did not come back in 

order to pay the money, 
©ein $5ruber fom fyierfyer, anftatt mit fetnen ©tenet ju fdncfen, His brother 

came here instead of sending me his valet. 

LIST OF ALL PREPOSITIONS WITH THE CASES WHICH THEY GOVERN. 

The Genitive. 



anjtatr, ftatr, instead of. 
au^erfyatb, outside, without, 
biefteit^, on this side of. 
balben, fyalber, on account of. 
innerfyatb, within. 
jenfeitS, on the other side of. 
haft, by virtue or power of. 
taut, according to. 
okrfxtlb, above. 



um rciUen, for the sake of. 
ungeacbtet, notwithstanding, 
unterfyalb, below. 
umt>etr, not far of or from. 
tYrmtttelft, by the means of. 
t>ermc>ge, by virtue of. 
rodbrcnb, during, 
roegen, on account of. 



au$, out of, from. 

aufjer, out of, beside. 

bet, by, near. 

binnen, within. 

entgegen, opposite to, against. 

gegenuber, opposite to. 

mit, with. 

nacf>, after, to. 



bte, till, from, to. 
burd), through, 
fur, for. 
gegen, to, towards. 



The Dative. 

neb ft, beside, together with. 

ob, over, at, on account of (in 

Poetry), 
fammt together with, 
fetr, since, 
tton, from, of. 
ju, to, at. 

juroiber, contrary to. 
The Accusative. 

ofyne, without, 
um, around. 
rctbet, against. 



The Genitive and Dative. 
ldng$, along ; tro§, in spite of; jufofge, in consequence, according to. 
The Dative and Accusative. 
uber, over, at. 



an, on, near, 
auf, upon, on. 
Winter, behind, 
in, in, into, 
neben, near, near by. 



unter, under, below, amongst. 
»or, before, ago. 
jroifeben between. 



( 137 ) 
§ 27. CONJUNCTIONS. 

Conjunctions serve to connect single words or sentences and refer 
from one part of the sentence to another. They also serve to ex- 
plain the whole of the sentence. 

Those marked * remove the verb and the auxiliary verbs in their 
compound tenses, to the end of the sentence. Exept atfein, benn, 
(for), fonbern, unb, ober. There are six classes: the disconjunctive, 
conditional, copulative, comparative, consecutive, and explanative. 

2Iber, aflein, but, are conjunctive at the beginning of a sentence, and 
signify conjunction, failure, negation, explanation; as, 

9?un abet iff e$ ju fpctt auSjugefyen, But now it is too late to go out. 
3cf) fud)te tr>n, aber er roar nid)t ba, I sought him, but he was not there. 
3$ rounfd)te aber, ba$ e£ nirf)t a,efd>df)e, But I wished that it might not 

happen. 
<5ie roaren ajucflicb ; ba abet famen Strubfafe unb ^ranfyeiten, unb jetft&rten 

tfyr Qtiiid , They were happy, but then came sickness and trouble, 

and destroyed their happiness. 

Mein, refers to the contrary of what has been said before. 

3d) fyoffte, attein tcb fanb mid) getdufd)t, I hoped, but found myself deceived. 
£>ie 3fteicf)en fyaben hie 9)ttttel, atfein oft nitf>t ben guten SBitfen ju fyelfen, 
The rich have the means, but often not the good will to help. 

5lber, may take the place of alfein ; but the contrary can never 
take place. 

* 2Ife, as, than, when, refers to time and the cause, and signifies 
character, change, rank, time, cause ; as, 

(£r jeigt ficfc afe etn efyrttcfyer $ftann, He shows himself as an honest 

man. 
<£.$ roar geffern falter, aU fyeute, It was colder yesterday than to-day. 
X)et &fkrretd)tfcbe ^aifer regtert aud) ate ftontg son 236bmen, The Emperor 

of Austria is also the reigning King of Bohemia. 
2tte eS gefcbefyen roar, gtng i$ roeg, When it had happened I went 

away. 
(£r iff ju aufrid)tig, ati ba$ icb tfym nic^t glauben fotlte, He is too sincere 

for me not to believe him. 

5tffo, thus, consequently, then, signifies comparison (solemnly 
speaking) or conclusion ; as, 

%\o \)at &ott bie 'Belt geliebt, Thus has God loved the world. 



138 CONJUNCTIONS. 

(£t erbt We$, ctlfo aud) ba$ fyauS, He inherits every thing, and con- 
sequently the house. 
(£s bletbt atfo babet, It remains then the same thing. 

2tucb, also, and, signifies affirmation, conjunction, a future time, 
supposition ; as, 

3tu$ id) roetbe e$ tfyun, or ^ 

5Iud> rccrbc id) e$ tf)urt, or V I shall also do it. 

3d? rcetbe e$ aud> tburt, 3 

SRctc^t^um, (Styre, aud) felbfl ^ergnugen ftnb wrgdngttc^, Wealth, honour, 

and even pleasure are uncertain. 
<£$ gefdjefye and), roann eg rooKe, It may happen also when it will. 
©o reid) et aud> ift, fo ift et bocb ntd)t gtucfftd), However rich he is, he 

is yet not happy. 

* 2Iuf bap, in order that, is used in high language, and signifies 

purpose or assertion ; as, 

3$ arbeite, auf ba£ t<# meinc Samtlte erndfyre, I work in order that I 

may provide for my family. 
£)a$ Sort ift a,ea,eben, auf baj? 3b* c $ baton fottt, The word is given in 

order that you may conform to it. 

Slufjer, except, signifies exclusion, and is followed by ba$ ; as, 

(St b«t 2Hfe$ wrfcfcroenbet, au£et bafs et fut feme ^amtfte geforgt ^atte, He 
has spent every thing except that he had provided for his 
family. 

Slufjetbem, besides, else ; as, 

<£t fd)(ug micb, unb roar au£erbem fe^t unbardbat, He struck me, and 
besides (that) he was very ungrateful. 

* 2$etfot, before, refers only to time ; as, 

25et>ot bte gtanjofen famen, roar SItteS tufjta, im £anbe, Before the French 
came, all was quiet in the country. 

* 23tg, until ; as, 

3$ roetbe roatten, bit et fommt, I shall wait until he comes. 
*£)a, as, since, whilst, because, refers to the cause ; as, 

£>a id) tf>n genau fenne, fo rcetbe id) u)n ftagen, As I know him well I 

shall ask him. 
2)a id) fam, fo roottte et weaken, Because I came he wished to go 

away. 



CONJUNCTIONS. 



189 



£hi fannjt Wity* lernen, ba bu plauberjr, You cannot learn any thing, 

because you talk. 
2)u plauberfr, ba bu bod) fdjreiben follrejr, Thou art talking, although 

thou shouldst write. 

©afjer, therefore, signifies a reason or a cause; as, 

£>u fjajt geftoftfen ; bafjer roirft bu befkaft rcerben, You have been stealing ; 
therefore you will be punished. 

* £>afern, supposing, if, is not used in good language. 

* £)amtf, in order that, signifies a final cause ; as, 

3d) bcfkafe tfjn, bamtt er ftcb beJTern foil, I punish him in order that he 
may become better. 

£>amit, as a conjunction, has the accent on the last syllable, and as 
an adverb, on the first syllable (bamtt, bamtt). 

©arm, then, refers to time, order, and condition ; as, 

3Benn ber jperbjr fommt, barm fottft bu anfangen, When the autumn 
comes then you shall begin. 

puerft rebc id), barm bu, I speak first, then you. 

SBenn bu ffeifng bift, barm fottjl bu bag 55ud) fyaben, If thou art indus- 
trious, then thou shalt have the book. 

©arum agrees with be^alb, beproegen, on that account, therefore, 
and signifies cause or reason ; as, 

(£r tjr arm ; barum roerbe td> u)m fjelfen, He is poor; therefore I shall 

assist him. 
©ie 3kucfe ifr fdjabfyaft ; barum fonnfe id) nid>t !ommen, The bridge is 

damaged ; I was therefore unable to come, 
©arum fjafr bu bein 23arerlanb wrlaffen, On that account thou hast left 

thy native country. 

*©a£, that, connects the object of the first part of the sentence to 
the second, and expresses certainty, uncertainty, caution or 
referring to the past ; as, 

3$ roetf?, ba$ er fommen unrb, I know that he will come. 

3d) furd)te, bafj bu tf)n md)t treffen nnrjt, I fear that you will not meet 

him. 
©et) rufoig, ba$ ba$ $tnb einfd)lafr, Be quiet, that the child may sleep. 
€$ ift lange fjer, bafc id) ©U gefefjen tyabc, It is a long time since I 

saw you. 



140 CONJUNCTIONS. 

If a verb expresses a certainty, commences the sentence, or follows 
the conjunction baf?, it requires the indicative. 

In case of uncertainty the subjunctive is used, as the above second 
example will show. 

The conjunction ba$ is used more frequently in German than in 
English, as the following sentences will show: 

3d? n>ei§, ba$ ec tin efycltcbec 9ftann ift, I know him to be an honest 

man. 
(§.$ ift feme jpoffnuno, ba, bctj? ec rotebec fyecgefteflt roerbe, There is no hope 

of his recovery (that he will recover). 

The following sentences will show that ba$ may be used or not : 

(*c gtctubte, ec babe ©ie gefefyen, or ) He believed that he had 

(£c ojaubte, ba§ ec <Sie gefefyen \)aU, $ seen you. 

3$ ecfuc^te it?n, ec mbge mic fyelfen, or ) I applied to him that he 

3$ ecfud>te tf?n, bctfj er mir fyelfen moge, j might assist me. 

<£c befall, ec fotte e£ tfyun, or ) He commanded that he 

<£c befall, ba$ ec e$ tfnm foffe, > should do it. 

(£c t?ecfprad>, ec rcoUe if>m @etb geben, or \ He promised that he 

€c ttecfycctd), ba$ ec tfym @elb geben n>olte, j would give him money. 

If the conjunction ba$ is not used, the verb is removed to the 
end of the sentence. 

2)emnad), accordingly, consequently, indicates principle or con- 
sequence ; as, 

£)emnacb {janbelte ec fcb(etf)t, Consequently he acted badly. 
©te btieben ju jpctufe, bemnad) fonnten ft'e ntd)t ju mic Fommcn, They re- 
mained at home, consequently they could not come to me. 

£)enn, for, because, signifies a reason or cause, consequence, con- 
dition, comparison, instead of aU (than), exclusion, in- 
stead of ati, or interrogation ; as, 

£)ec $nabe rotcb gelobt, benn ec ift ffeifng, The boy is praised, for he is 

industrious. 
33(eiben ©ie nid>t fyiec, benn icfy bin nid)t roofyl, Do not remain here, for 

I am not well. 
@o Meibe eg benn babet, It may be so then. 
<£.$ fet) benn, baf ec e$ leugne, In case he might deny it. 
(£c roar acbeitfamec, benn affe feine 25cubec, He was more industrious 

than any of his brothers. 



CONJUNCTIONS. 141 

s Jlid)td benn @otb roirb if?n permogen, eg pi thm, Nothing but gold will 

enable him to do it. 
3(1 et benn roirflid) ba ? Is he really there then ? 

£)ennod>, yet, agrees with beffenuncjeacfuer, notwithstanding, nidug= 
beftoroentger, nevertheless. They signify an absolute con- 
sequence or effect ; as, 

(£g ftnb Wtyxfycn, unb bennocb gtaubt man fte, They are fables, and yet 

they believe them. 
Obojeid) id) ntd)t ba bin, fo fann eg bennod) in Orbnuna, a,ebracf)t roerben, 

Although I am not there it may yet be settled. 

£)e£a,leid)en, and inajeid)en, of the same kind, in the same manner, 
are rarely used. 

2)efro, is generally preceded by je ; je, bejto, the more, the more. 

*2>teroett, because, agrees with metl, ba, because, as, and is fre- 
quently used in the holy scriptures. 

£>od), yet, still, nevertheless, but, refers to a limitation, contra- 
diction, condition, request, hope, wish, or emphasis ; as, 

£g ift jroar [pat, unb bod) rottf id) nod) roarten, It is indeed late, I shall 

yet wait. 
£)u bt)t retd), unb bod) bift bu nid)t rcofyttfydtto,, Thou art rich, and yet 

thou art not charitable. 
3$ roitt eg bit fao,en, bod) bu mupt mid? ntd)t mratfyen, I will tell you, 

but you must not betray me. 
Sage eg mit bocb, Pray tell me. 

(£g ift bod) nid)tg Unangenefymeg ? It is nothing unpleasant (I hope) ? 
2Benn id) bod) retd) roare ! If I were only rich ! 
^ein bod) ! ntcbt bod) ! Certainly not ! 

£>od), sometimes agrees with bennocb, but not the contrary. 
* (£i)e, ere, before, expresses time or condition ; as, 

(£t;e rotr famen, roaren fie auggegangen, Before we came they had gone 

out. 
or <5te roaren auggegangen, efye rotr famen, They had gone out before 

we came. 
©je id) tbm bag @e(b gabe, rourbe id) eg lieber eincm 'ilrmen geben, Before 

I would give the money to him I would give it to a poor 

person. 



142 CONJUNCTIONS. 

£nm>eber, either, is never used without being followed by ober (or), 
and shews that either one thing or another must be 
done; as, 

<£ntn>eber bief? or ba$ mu$ gefcfyefyen, Either this or that must be 
done. 

£>te j?auptn>6rier ber beutfcfyen ©pracbe ftnb entrceber mdnnticfyen, ober meib= 
licfyen, obet fdd)lid>en @efd)led)t^, The nouns of the German lan- 
guage are either masculine, or feminine, or neuter gender. 

* galls, or im gattc, in case, agrees with rcenn, if; as, 

galls er eS md>t rfyun follte, (or SBenn "J In case he should not do it, (If 
er e$ nid)t tfyun follte,) fo mu£ ic6> > he should not do it,) I must 
jufrteben fetjn, ) be satisfied. 

getner, farther, in the future, refers to a continuation of speech, or 
to future times, and agrees with wetter ; as, 

gerner fprad) er bie bebeutuna,&?ollen SBorte, Farther he spoke those 

important words. 
2)u ttnrft ferner mein £>iener fet)n, Thou wilt be my valet in future. 

SolgUcfy, consequently, of course, agrees with bafyer, also. 

(£r if* arm, folglidj mufj er arbeiten, He is poor, consequently he must 

work. 
golajicl) muf man f>6ren, roaS gefprocfyen roirb, Consequently one must 

hear what they say. 
golgltd) ift *fttcl>tS gerettet rcorben, Therefore nothing was saved. 

@leid>fam, as if, even as if, refers to the similarity of two or more 
persons or things ; as, 

€r fiefyt auS, gleicfyfam me auS bem SBaflfer gejogen, He looks as if he had 
been drawn out of the water. 

@tetd)n>ot)l, yet, agrees with benno$, beffemmgeadrtet, however, ne- 
vertheless ; as, 

2Sir finb fyeute befd>dftigr, gfetcfyroofyl rcerben roir mit Slmen fpetfen, We are 
much occupied to-day, nevertheless we shall dine with you. 

S^unad), hereafter, nad^er, afterwards. The former expresses 
future time without, but the latter future time with re- 
ference to any subject; as, 

2>u barfjt fyernad) auSgeljen, Thou wilt be allowed to go out soon 
after this. 



CONJUNCTIONS. 143 

Buerjr rcoflrc er fommcn, aber nacbbcr btelrcn il n ©efchafte ab, At first he 
wished to come, but afterwards he was prevented by business. 

Jjingegen, bagcgen, on the contrary, on the other hand; as, 
£)aS <pferb rear jung, hingecjen ber Scree rear alt, The horse was young ; 

on the other hand the lion was old. 
(Er hat mix jrcar £>ienffe geletfret, aber bagecjen fjabe id) ifyn bejaf?(t, It is 
true he has done me service, but then I have paid him. 

The conjunction fc^cgen has the accent on the first syllable, but 
the adverb bagegen, (against), on the second syllable. 

*3c, is regularly followed by bejto before a comparative as, je 
befto, the more, the more, and refers to quality, quantity, 
time, or proportion ; as, 

3c proper bie $Intagen, befro tetcbrer ftnb bte ^ortfcrSritte, The greater the 

abilities the easier is the progress. 
3e mefyr SBcin ba ijl, befro mefyr rcirb getrunfen, The more wine there is 

the more they drink, 
©efyen ©ie je efjer, jc liebet, Go, the sooner the better. 
3c nad)bcm ex gcarbeitet l;at, fo rcirb er bc&afylt, He will be paid according 

to his work. 

3cbod), yet, but, however, nevertheless, expresses migitation or 
interruption ; as, 

<£r tjr reicb, jcbod) niefct ftofj, He is rich, but yet not proud. 

(£r finer, an ju reben, jcbod) rourbe cr unterbrocfyen, He began to speak, but 

he was interrupted. 
Q.x txant fiinf $lafcben 2Bein, jebod) fonnre cr nicbt tricar trtnrcn, He drank 

five bottles of wine, however he could not drink any more. 

* 3nbcm, when, as, while, whilst, agrees with ba, ati, recti, nxtyrenb, 

and expresses time and cause ; as, 

3nbcm tcb an if>n fdjrieb, tarn cr felbfr, Whilst I was writing to him he 

came himself. 
Sir muften 23robt faufen, inbem n>tr fetn'S fyaben, We must buy bread, 

as we have none. 

* 3nbcjTcn, in the meanwhile, however (unterbeffen is vulgar, inberj 

is used in high language and life.) 
3nbc|Tcn id) nut u)m fpracfc, fam cin 3Reifenber, Whilst I spoke to him 

a traveller came. 
3<f> rcerbe e$ inbefTen uberlea.cn, In the meantime I shall consider 

of it. 



144 CONJUNCTIONS. 

£r bracfyte @elb ; tnbeffen fyat er ntcfyt Wc$ bejafytr, He brought money ; 
but yet he has not paid all. 

* 3n=fo-fern, in=fo=roeit, as far as, so far, is generally followed 

by afe. 
3n fo fern er ?Red)t fyar, rnufien rott tfym nad>geben, As far as he is right 

we are obliged to yield to him. 
<5ucr> nut 33ergmtgungen, in fo fern e$ betner ^ffidjt enrfprtd)t, Seek only 

after pleasures as far it is consistent with your duties. 
3d) fuc&e in fo fern $ergnugungen, ate e£ mtt metnen '•pfudtfen uberemfttmmf, 

I seek so far for pleasures as it is consistent with my duties. 

* 3n rote fern, how far, in what manner. 

3n rote fern fonnte er e» nid)t tfyun? In what manner could he not do it ? 
3d> roetf? ntd)t, in roie fern er eg rinm fonnre, I do not know in what 
manner he could do it. 

$aum, no sooner. 
$aum roar id) ba, fo !am er, No sooner was I there than he came. 
$aum fjarte id) tfyn tferlajfen, fo rourbe id? roieber $u tfym gerufen, No sooner 
had I left him than I was called to him again. 

9)Uri)Ui, of course, consequently, agrees with fo(gltd), better ; as, 
3d) liebe bid) ; mitfytn rotrft bu mir folgen, I love thee ; consequently 
thou wilt follow me. 

* 9?ad)bem, after, refers to time, and implies that one event has 

been stated and that another will take place ; as, 

^ad)bem er bteg gefagt fjatte, gtng er roeg, After he had said this he 

went away. 
€r fcr^rteb, nad)bem er gelefen fyatte, After having read, he wrote. 

^amlid), namely, as, agrees with o.U, rote, namentltd). It is expla- 
natory, and rarely met with in English ; as, 

(i$ barf Reiner mefyr tn'S JpauS fommen, ndmltd) (namentltd)) fetn $rember, 
Not any one beside is allowed to come to the house, namely 
no stranger. 

1fttd)t attetn, ntd>t nur, or ntcfyt blof?, not only, is followed by fonbern 
and), but also. It signifies distinction (relationship), abi- 
lities, and character, or reality ; as, 

Wvfyt ottein er, fonbern aud) feme ©efefyrotfter gingen in ba$ Concert, Not 
only himself, but also his sisters and brothers went to the 
concert. 



CONJUNCTIONS. 145 

(£r ift nid>t nur gelebtt, fonbetn aud) tecbncbaffen, He is not only learned, 

but upright also. 
6t nafym nid)t bIo£ ba$ @e(b, fonbetn arbeitete aud> bafur, He not only 

took the money, but also worked for it. 

Wod), nor, is preceded by rccber, neither, and is negative j as, 

5Bir fyabcn rceber geit, no<$ ^ujl ft'e ju fetjcn, We have neither time nor 

inclination to see her. 
(Seine 9ftebe nw roebct anjiefyenb, nod) belefytenb, His speech was neither 

attractive nor instructive. 
<£$ t]r nid?t mein 2Sunfd), nod) ift H bet Sfyrige, It is not my wish, nor is 
it yours. 
9hin, now, agrees with ba, inbem, and shews the consequence of 
a thing or a cause, encouragement, and surprise ; as, 

£>u tjaft nicftt gefjott, nun fo mupt bu fallen, Thou didst not obey (it), 

therefore thou must feel. 
s J?un fyaft bu e$ befd)(offen, Now thou hast decided, 
^un wirb er fommen, Now he will come. 
9hm muffen n>it fyanbetn, We are now obliged to act. 
Ohm ift We$ gut, Now all is well. 

^ur, only, but, agrees with Mop, einjtg unb allein ; as, 

3d) bemiifyte mid) fef)t ; nut fyatte id) feinen Stfolg, I troubled myself 

much, but I had no success. 
St Urn; nut wax eS ju fpat, He came ; only it was too late. 
9?ut et benff an mid), He only thinks of me. 

* Ob, if, whether, signifies doubt, uncertainty, a question, direct 
or indirect ; as, 

3cb roeip nid)t, ob id) U)n fefyen mzbe, I do not know whether I shall 
see him. 

(£$ ift nid)t entfd)ieben, ob n>it ben ^tojep gerctnnen roetben, It is not de- 
cided whether we shall gain the lawsuit (or not). 

Stiffen <2te, ob et roob,l ift ? Do you know whether he is well ? 

St ftagte, ob id> ju jpaufe f>))n nnitbe, He asked whether I should 
(might) be at home. 

*£)bgteid), although, is used instead of roenn gteid), rcenn aud). It 
is separated if followed by the personal pronouns with 
the singular or plural, and signifies admittance and 
assertion \ as, 

£)a$ SBettet ift angenefjm, obg(eid) bie flatter son ben SBauimn fatten, The 

L 



146 CONJUNCTIONS. 

weather is pleasant, although the leaves are falling from the 
trees. 
Ob et gjetd) nod) nid)t f>tet tft, fo rottb et bod) fommen, Although he is 
not here now, yet he will come. 

Ob is sometimes omitted both in prose and poetry ; as, 
3ft gleid? bie gtofjte ©efafyt ootubet, fo tft bod) bet $tanfe nod) ntc^t $mttet, 

Although the greatest danger is over, still the sick man is not 

yet saved. 
<&o butfen row un$ bod) gtudltd) nennen, Ob un$ £dnbet, ob im$ $fteete 

ttennen, Although we are separated by lands or seas, yet we 

may be called happy. 

Obet, or, is generally preceded by entroebet. It is sometimes used 
by itself, and is explanatory ; as, 
yiifyt atle 2Renfd>en fonnen jpetten fenn, obet Slnbetn btenen, Not all men 
are able to be masters, or to serve others. 

Ofyne, except, unless, is mostly used in solemn language, and 
agrees with aufsetbem, besides; as, 
Sftid)t$ fann gefd)efyen, ofyne ba$ bet jjett fetnen ©egen bct&u gtebt, Nothing 
can happen unless the Lord grants his blessing upon it. 

* ©ettbem, since, since then, refers to the past and also to the 
present; as, 
(£t ift fet)t arm gerootben, fettbem et franf toat, He has become very poor 

since he was ill. 
©eitbem et fpatfam ift, tebt et g(ucfttd), Since he is economical he is happy. 

©internal, as, whereas, since, is used in the Bible and in old ma- 
nuscripts. 
©o, so, as, thus, and, if, signifies proportion, comparison, conse- 
quence, feeling, character, limitation, and condition ; as, 
JDiefe 23itne ift fo gut, ati jene, This pear is as good as that. 
2Bte bie 2Itbeit (tft), fo (ift) bet Siofyn, As is the work, so are the wages. 
SBenn bu es> mfud)ft, fo rottft bu gludlid) roetben, If thou dost try it, then 

thou wilt be happy. 
€t ift fo juftieben ! He is so contented ! 
©o ft'nb bie 9Kenfd)en ! Thus is mankind ! 
©o getn id) aud> rooQte, fo !ann id) bod) nid)t, However much I should 

wish it, yet I cannot. 
©o 3fyt ben SBitlen tfyut (£ute$ f)tmmUfd>en ?Batet$, >c. If you follow the 
commandments of your heavenly father, &c. 



CONJUNCTIONS. 



117 



If the conjunctions ate, ba, nacbbem, obgleid), obfd)on, reetl, rote, roenn, 
begin a sentence, the first part of the sentence ends with a verb, and 
is followed by fo, which cannot be translated into English ; as, 
%$ er abretffe, fo rourben %{U traurig, When he departed all became sad. 
©onbern, but, is used if the former part of the sentence is expressed 
negatively; as, 
(Er fjat mid) ntd>t getobt, fonbern gerabelt, He has not praised me, but 

blamed. 
X)ie £tnte iff ntd)t fc^roarj, fonbern Matt, The ink is not black, but blue. 
£)a$ Xu<b i\t rocbet grun, noch grau, fonbern fytmmelblau, The cloth is 

neither green nor grey, but sky-blue. 
£>a$ papier ijt ntcbt r^eiier, aber gut, The paper is not dear, but good. 
s j7id)t nur fetne £rdgf)eit, fonbern aud> fetne Unoerfd)amtbeit mad)t ifyn 

tferadjtlicf), Not only his laziness, but also his impudence renders 

him despicable. 

©onjt, else, otherwise, is frequently followed by nid>r, nid)t$ ; as, 
£6re, fonf! mu£t bu fiifylen, Hear, else thou must feel. 
(Er fagte fonft ^icbt^, He said nothing else. 
(Er roar fonfl ntrgenb£ ju fitnben, He was not to be found anywhere else. 

(Boroofyt — ate, afe and) ; as, 
(E$ ftnb foroofyl SMumen, ate aud) grud)te i n bem ©arten, There are flowers 

as well as fruit in the garden. 
Pettier foroofyt, ate ftontge- muffen fterben, Beggars must die as well as 

kings. 

%,b/iU — tfyeite, partly, partly; as, 
£f)ette fein 23etragen, n>tte fetne 25efcbetbenf)ett f>aben if>n erfyoben, Partly 
his behaviour, partly his modesty have raised him. 

UebrtgenS, however, besides ; as, 
UebrigenS tjr e$ nod; ntd>t pett, However it is not yet time. 
UcbrtgenS fagte er 9fttd>t$, Besides that he said nothing. 

Uebcrblefj, besides, moreover ; as, 
Uebcrbtef? fragte er mid) roeiter, Besides he questioned me farther. 

Urn, in order to, is followed by ju with the infinitive, and signifies 
purpose or intention ; as, 
(Er ifl fteipig, urn getobt ju roerben, He is industrious, in order that he 

may be praised. 
£r eilt, urn batb nad) jpaufe ju Fommen, He is in a hurry, in order to 
come home soon. 

l2 



148 CONJUNCTIONS. 

Unb, and, connects one or more words or sentences ; as, 

9ttein3kfer unb meine Gutter rcaren ba, My father and mother were there. 
SStati gcbraucbt t>on ben Mfyen bie s )Md), ba$ Sleifd), bie ipaut unb btc 

jporner, They use the milk, the meat, the skin, and the horns 

of cows. 
&$ tjorte auf ju regnen unb fog(etd) fafyen roir wU Scute auf ber ©tra£e, 

It left off raining, and immediately we saw many people in 

the street. 

llngectd)tet, although, notwithstanding, is used instead of obgleid); as, 

3d) gebe Sfynen ba$ @elb, ungead)tet ®ie eS ntd)t mbtent fyaben, I shall 
give you the money, although you have not deserved it. 

QStelmefyr, rather, is used in opposition to t?teln>eniger, rather less ; as, 

%ielme\)\: riett) id) ifym, nicfyt auSjugefyen, I advised him rather not to 
go out. 

*3Bctyrenb, whilst, while, signifies duration of time; as, 
SBdfyrenb fie fpietten, fang id), Whilst they were playing, I sang. 

5Bann, when, is generally used before questions, and denotes time 
in general ; as, 
SBann roerben <5ie 3fyrcn Sreunb fefyen? When will you see your friend? 
3d) n>ei§ md)t, nxmn er fommt, I do not know when he will come. 

SBeber, neither, is always followed by nod), nor ; as, 
3Beber er, nod) 2Inbere t onnten eg u)un, Neither himself nor others were 
able to do it. 

* SJBetl, because, alludes to a moral or physical cause ; as, 

3d) ad)te il;n, roetl er efyrtid) ift, I esteem him because he is honest. 
(£tn fymb htm nid)t fftegen, rceil er feme J-lugel fyctt, A dog cannot fly, 
because he has no wings. 

*5Benn, when, if, denotes time. It is used with the present, first 
and second future, perfect, first and second conditional, 
which the first four sentences will exemplify ; as, 
S&enn er fd>ldft, fo read)? id), When he is asleep I am awake. 
5Benn n>ir fte fefyen rcerben, fo rcotten roir eS rfyt mtttfyeilen, When we see 

her we will communicate it to her. 
2Benn id) melne 23riefe gefdmeben fyctben rcerbe, (fo) fyoffe id) ©ie ju fef;en, 

When I shall have finished my letters I hope to see you. 
SE&enn id) ujn gefe^en \)<fot, roerbe id) mit 3*>nen gefyen, When I have seen 
him I shall go with you. 



CONJUNCTIONS. 1 I!) 

When the imperfect and pluperfect express time, they require 
the conjunction ate instead of n>enn ; as, 

3tte er ben £iger fa!), erfdjracf er, When he saw the tiger he was 
frightened. 

2fte fie jugebcrt fatten, fprad>en fie baritber, When they had been listen- 
ing they spoke about it. 

The following sentences express a condition, requiring roenn, if; as, 
2Benn bu fommen roittjr,fo roirft bu ben $re»nben fcfyen, If thou wilt come 

thou wilt see the stranger. 
3cf> rourbe mid) freuen, roenn <2ie e$ tfyun rourbcn, I should be glad if 

you would do it. 
(£$ fcbien, ate roenn er franf wave, It appeared as if he were ill. 

SBenn is sometimes not expressed ; as, 

(£rquicft eud) bie Worgentuft, fo gemepet fie ! If the morning air revives 
you, enjoy it ! 

5Benn abet, but if; roenn etroa, if peradventure ; roenn gleid), trenn 
aud), roenn fd)on, although ; roenn nid)t, except, unless ; are 
separated ; as, roenn — nid)t ; as, 

SBenn er nicht fommt, fo roerbe id) an tyn fcbreiben, If he does not come 
I shall write to him. 

SBte, as, like, when, how, agrees with ba, ate ; and signifies pro- 
portion, similarity, qualification, liberality, time, and 
condition ; as, 
(£r iff fo gro£ rote ein SKtefe, He is as tall as a giant. 
(3ie finb roie ein SRafenber, You are like a madman. 
5Bie ber ipcrr ijl, fo finb feine $ned)te, As the master is, so are his 

servant-men. 
28ie e^ 3fynen gefiflt, As you please. 
SEBie et fort roar, wmtpte id) meine Ufyr, When he had gone away my 

watch was missing. 
3* rounbre mid), une bu ba$ fyaft fagen ronnen, I wonder how you could 

have said that. 
<£.$ ift mtr gletcb, me er and) fyanbetn mag, It is the same to me, let him 

act how he will. 
9Bic reid) er aud> ift, fo fyat er bod) S^inbe, However rich he is he yet 

has enemies. 
5Bieroof)t (obgleid)) er junger ift, fo bin id) bod) gtudlicfjer, Although he is 

younger, still I am more happy. 



150 INTERJECTIONS. 

*2Bo, if, as a conjunction; where, as an adverb. The former 
signifies a condition, and is not used in good language, 
except followed by nid)t ; as, 

St&un ®te e$; too nitt)t, fo merbe icf> @ie jTOingen, Do it; if not I shall 
compel you. 

*3Bofern, if, provided, in case, as far as, insomuch as; as, 
Sofetn ©ie barin roilltgen, fo TOirb e$ 3*>t 9}acbtf)eU fej)n, If you consent 
to it, it will be to your disadvantage. 

stomal, especially, is followed by ba (as), and agrees with befonberS, 
ttotjuajtd); as, 
€£ tft nun bunfel, jumat ba bit 5ftonb nid)t fd>etnf, It is dark now, espe- 
cially as the moon does not shine. 

j3n>ar, indeed, to be sure, true, however, is followed by abet, bod), 
affetn; as, 
(£.$ iff jnxtt £eif, abet id) rcerbe nod> cine ©tunbe Metben, To be sure it is 

time, but I shall still remain an hour. 
(it ift jroat jung, bod> fyat er feine Stfafyrung, However young he is, still 

he has no experience. 
(£t fcbmeid)dt mir %a>at, aflein id) TOerbe ifym nid)t ajauben, Indeed he flat- 
ters me, but I shall not believe him. 

Obfcbon, although, is separable, and agrees with objroat; as, 
Ob id) fd)on (ob=o>id)) rcenig %cit fyabe, fo TOerbe id) bod) fommen, Although 
I have little time, still I shall come. 

§ 28. INTERJECTIONS. 

The Interjections express our thoughts most indistinctly. There- 
fore they cannot be brought in any connection with the other parts 
of speech which express our thoughts clearly. They are as various 
as our feelings. They express : 

1. Joy and agreeable surprise; as, of)! ah! fya'.hah! o! oh! 

f>e ! heh ! ei ! ha ! lo ! 

2. Liveliness ; as, fjetfa ! hey-day ! jucfyfyei ! heigh-ho ! 

3. Pain, grief, and compassion; as, roefye ! woe ! ad) ! ah ! of) ! oh ! 

4. Fear, disgust, and aversion ; as, fyufy ! woe ! ft ! fie ! pfut ! fudge ! 

5. Surprise and admiration; as, af)! ay! fyofyo ! pooh! et'.ei! 

lack-a-day ! 

6. Received intelligence and doubt ; as, fycfya ! indeed ! fmi ! f)m ! 

hum ! 



INTERJECTIONS. 151 

7. Indifference ; as, pa ! pshaw ! 

8. Wrong ; as, puf) ! pugh ! 

9. Calling for one, or caution ; as, fye ! tyba ! hip ! fyotfa ! fyatfo ! 

halloo ! \m ! 'ft ! pft ! hush ! 

Interjections are mostly followed, but not governed (as no inter- 
jection governs a case), by the nominative ; as, o, bet acme 9ttann ! 
rarely by the genitive ; as, o, bee ©cftanbe ! for shame ! 

Other parts of speech are frequently used as interjections ; as, 
bra*! fort! frifcf, ! auf! t>att ! matfd) ! ©oittob ! @ott fet> 2>anf ! ©titf 
auf ! @lutf ju ! roofytan ! and others. 

With regard to the use of interjections, the subjoined are fol- 
lowed by the nominative, genitive, dative, accusative, and vocative, 
in the singular and plural ; as, 
Sing. 2lrf> or o, ber Stfyot ! (oh, the foolish man !) o, be$ Xfyoten ! o, 

bem Stfyoren ! o, ben £f)oren ! o, bu Stfyor ! 
PL 5td) or o, bie £fyoren ! o, bet Stfyoren ! o, ben £fyoren ! o, bte £f>oren ! 
o, U)t £f>oten ! 



SECOND DIVISION. 



SYNTAX. 

§ 1. THE ARTICLE. 

A. The Definite Article is used — ■ 

a. When speaking of a particular kind or part, or of the whole 

species of materials, and refers to a particular kind, part, or 
species; as, 

(£t trntb ben porter, ben (Sjftg unb ba$ 23robt be$af)(en, He will pay 

for the porter, the vinegar, and the bread. 
Sr t>at ba$ ©ilbet wttoren aber ba$ @o(b getetfet, He has lost his 

silver, but saved his gold. 
£>a$ $Ke|Tina, ift gelb, unb ba$ $euet tfl ein ttetjebvenbeS ©ement, Brass 

is yellow, and fire is a consuming element. 

b. When speaking of friends or inferiors, also of notorious charac- 

ters; as, 

©eben ©te bem §riebtic& feinen £ofyn, Give Frederick his wages. 
£>et gatf war ein £>teb, Falk was a thief. 

c. When adjectives are employed before names of persons, coun- 

tries, or towns ; as, 

£>et Heine 9Bityelm roar unatttg, Little William was naughty. 

IDic blutjenbe linnet ift auSjebtenb, The blooming Minna is con- 
sumptive. 

£>er bembmte ftant n>at ein ^fytfofopfy, The celebrated Kant was a 
philosopher. 

£)a$ tetcfye 33raftlien ift fe^t frudjtbar, The rich Brazil is very pro- 
ductive. 

%)a$ betwlferte ^aris mitb j?on mefen ©ngtdnbcrn beroofctrt, Populous 
Paris is inhabited by many Englishmen. 

d. When names of countries or provinces are used ; as, hie ©cfymetj, 

tie Xxittei, bie Sombatbet, hie 2e»anfe. 



THE ARTICLE. 153 

c. When the same gender and number is used with nouns signify- 
ing a relationship ; as, 

£>et SSatet unb bet ©ofyn ftnb aulgegangen, Father and son are 
gone out. 

f. Before abstract ideas ; as, 

£)a$ menfcblicbe jpetj ift unbutd)bttngttd>, The human heart (i.e. the 
heart of every human being) is impenetrable. 

£>ie B^it tft foftbar ; bie £iebe fegnet, Time is precious ; love is 
blessing. 

£)ie @efd)id)te unb bie (£tbbefd)teibung ftnb nu^Ucfye S&tfienfdjaften, His- 
tory and geography are useful sciences. 

g. Before concrete ideas which refer to a whole species ; as, 
£>et @>eift ift unftetb(ttf), The spirit is immortal. 

£>et jpunb bcilt, bet Ocfyfe bruttt, The dog is barking, the ox bellows. 

h. Before nouns referring to time ; as, bet SBinter, winter; bet jpetbft, 
autumn; bet 3anuctt, January ; bet $teit<tg, Friday ; bet^ftotgen, 
morning; Set 3an»ar ift bit faltefte 9Ronat, January is the 
coldest month. 

i. Before names of assemblies, ranks, creeds, or governments ; as, 
bcv Sanbtag, diet; bcv $6ntg jpetnttd), King Henry; bet 2Ibet, no- 
bility ; bat .fpetbenrtnim, paganism ; bie £>emoftattc (bie 23olf$fyeti= 
fd>aft), democracy. 

j. It is also used in the following sentences ; as, 
St mtafjt bie <5tabt, He leaves town. 
£>te £eute gefyen jut &ttd)e, People go to church. 
5Bit gtngen sot bem £fyee au£, We went out before tea. 
£>et 2It$t tommt nad? bem grufyftutf, The physician is coming after 
breakfast. 

And also after many nouns ; as, bet £ob, death ; £>et £ob if? unet= 
bitttirf), Death is inexorable. 

B. The Definite Article is not used — 

a. When speaking of materials, without referring to any particular 
kind or quality, nor to the whole species ; as, 

3<$ effe tiebet Slepfet unb 23itnen, ate $itfd>en, I prefer eating apples 
and pears to cherries. 

(£fyte unb 3ftetd)tfyum macfyen oft ntcfrt gtiicmd), Honour and riches often 
produce no happiness. 



154 SYNTAX. 

b. Before names of persons, countries, nations, or towns ; as, 

©chiller n>at gro£ ate £>id)tet, aber @6n)e grower ate ©taatSmann, Schiller 

was great as a poet, but Goethe greater as a statesman. 
9w$lanb ift em gtofjeS SKeicf), Russia is a great empire. 
(£$ ft'nb allentfyalben $tan&ofen, There are Frenchmen everywhere. 
Hamburg ift em Hemes bonbon, Hamburgh is a small London. 

c. The indefinite article is used in German in all cases where it is 

employed in English, except in the two cases before nouns ex- 
pressing quality or condition ; as, 

<Hte ©tfwefter fyat ft'e nicbt terf>t gefyanbelt, She has not acted rightly 

as a sister. 
($t ift Slbttocat (©arfwalter) gerootben, He has become a lawyer. 

§ 2. THE CASES. 

A. THE NOMINATIVE. 

a. The subject requires the nominative case ; as, 

£)et Sefytet unb bn $nabe gingen jufammen au$, The master and the 
boy went out together. 

b. The nominative is required when several united ideas are ex- 

pressed before the verb without an article \ as, 

©lucf, £fyre unb Dlufym etrcarten bid), Fortune, honour, and praise 

await thee. 
©fjaf^eare, bee gro£e £>id?ter, 1ft ju ©ttatfotb geboten, Shakspeare, 

the great poet, was born at Stratford. 

c. The pronoun bit, as a nominative, is frequently omitted in fami- 

liar language, and particularly with the imperative ; as, 
£ett)e (bu) mir ba$ 23u$, Lend me the book. 
©efyotcbet (u)t) euren ©tetn, Obey your parents. 

d. The pronoun e$, as the subject before impersonal verbs, is omitted 

when the passive of intransitive verbs is used impersonally, 
and before impersonal verbs used reflectively ; as, 

3n bem jSimmet rcitb gefungen, or <gg mxb in bem Simmer gefungen, 
There is singing in the room. 

%flid) burftete fefyr, or (£g butftete mid) fcfjr, I was very thirsty. 

e. The predicate of a sentence requires the nominative after the 

verbs fet)n, to be ; roetben, to become ; bletben, to remain ; tjei^en, 
to be called ; as, 



THE NOMINATI\ E. 1 55 

<pec( i\\ ein grower ©taattfmaim, Peel is a great statesman. 

£)er Scfnieiber nritb ^rebiget roerben, The tailor will become a 

preacher. 
Der junge sJHann blteb ein 23erfrf)rcenber, The young man remained a 

spendthrift. 
£>ag 9)ldbtf>en foiej? «XHatf?iIbc, The girl was called Matilda. 

/. The nominative is required after the passive voice of those verbs 
which govern two accusatives in the active voice : nennen, fyei^en, 
to call, to be called; fdnmpfen, to scold, to abuse; taufen, to 
baptize; as, 

(£r rcurbe ^riebrid) genannt, unb fyiejj 3<*cob, He was called Frederick, 
and his name was James. 

(Sic rourben £ugner gefd)o(ten, They were abused as liars. 

9)*eine £od)ter i\t 9)ttnna getauft rcorben, My daughter has been bap- 
tized Minna. 

B. THE GENITIVE. 

a. The genitive either expresses possession, connection, or refers to 

an action of another ; as, 

£)a$ Spferb be$ Sremben, The horse of the stranger. 

£>te SBIumen beg ©drtnetg bhtyen, The flowers of the gardener are 

flourishing. 
JDie dimmer tnetneg jpaufeg ftnb gro$, The rooms of my house are 

large. 
£>ie Stfydtigfeit beg Wanneg ift bcfannt, The activity of the man is 

known. 

The following are true genitives, which must be expressed by the 
true form of the genitive ; as, beg Stemben ^ferb, the stranger's horse; 
beg ©drtnerg SMumen, the gardener's flowers ; meineg jpaufeg Bimmet, 
my house's rooms; beg Cannes £f)dttgfeit, the man's activity. 

b. The objective genitive does not admit the change of placing the. 

genitive before the nominative, and is used with nouns formed 
from transitive verbs ; as, 

£5et ©enug beg Sebeng, The enjoyment of life. 

£>et $er(uft ^ ®e\be$, The loss of money. 

£>er 25eftf| eineg <£belgutg, The possession of a Nobleman's seat. 

Changing the position of the nominative from before to after the 
genitive, causes a considerable alteration in the signification of the 
sentence ; as, 



156 SYNTAX. 

2)ie 9Bat?t einetf greunbeS, The choice of a friend (t. e. when one 

chooses a friend). 
SineS SteunbeS SBafyl, A friend's choice (^. e. the choice which a 

friend makes). 

c. When the English of is used with the genitive, to denote 

measure, contents, or weight, in German the two nouns ex- 
pressing the substance and the quantity follow, both in the 
nominative, and consequently without of', as, 

Sin ©eticbt ©patgeln, A dish of asparagus. 
(Sin ©tucf Sleifcfc, A peace of meat. 
Sin @(a$ SBaffct, A glass of water. 
(Sin «fliafl sjRttcfc, A quart of milk. 
93ier Sllen £ud), Four yards of cloth. 
Sine $lafd>e porter, A bottle of porter. 

d. When a portion of any substance or measure is referred to, the 

true genitive, or yon, with the dative, is used ; as, 

Sin ©ericfct bet or btefer ©yargeln, or Sin ©eticbt yon ben or yon biefen 

©yargetn, A dish of the or these asparagus. 
€in ©tucf be$ or biefeS $(eiftf)e£, or Sin ©tucf yon bem or yon btefem 

$tetfd)e, A peace of the or this meat. 

e. In the following examples the prepositions yon and au$, with the 

dative, are used instead of the genitive. 

Before names of metals or material of which a thing is com- 
posed ; as, 

Sin 3ftn$ yon <3ilbet, or Sin fttberner Sling, A ring of silver. 
Sine SBeffe yon 95aumtt>otfe, or Sine baumroollene SBejle, A waistcoat 
of cotton (i. e. made of cotton). 

Before words expressing measure, weight, value, or contents ; as, 
Sin ^tunnen yon &ef>n gu$ Stiefe, A well of ten feet depth. 
Sin #rug yon jn>ei 9fta$ Snfyalt, A pitcher containing two quarts. 
Sin £aib S3tobt yon brei ^pfunb, A loaf of bread of three pounds 

weight. 
Sine ©umme yon jefyn ©utben, A sum of ten gulden (florins). 

Before proper names of countries, districts, or towns ; as, 

£)et ^urfurtf yon £efien, The Elector of Hessia. 

2ln ben ©renjen yon ^teujjen, On the boundaries of Prussia. 



THE GENITIVE. 157 

2>er $ontg ron Sranfreich, The King of France ; 

or, £)er #6nig ber granjofen, The king of the French. 

£>er jpanbel ron Stettin, or (Stetttn'i? jpanbel, The trade of Stettin. 

Before nouns referring to character, origin, rank, nation, station, 
country, or place ; as, 

(Sine Dame ron guten @runbfaf?en, A lady of good principles. 

Sine ^tinjefftn ron ©ebliit, A princess of the blood in birth. 

Sin 9)iann ron (Stanbe, A man of station. 

Sin £>eutfcber ron ©ebutt, A German by birth. 

Sin ftunjHer ron Berlin, An artist from Berlin. 

Sin 9ftalet au$ £)eutfd)lanb, A painter from Germany. 

or, Sin beutfdjet Water, A German painter. 

Son is always used after the following pronouns, when of is used 
in English: feinet, manner, berjenige, rceld>er. 

Reiner ron ifynen fyat e$ a,efaa,t, None of them has said it. 
3eber ron unS roitl 3ftecbt fyaben, Each of us will be right. 

Son is also used after numerals or the superlative ; as, 

Sine ron ifyten Steunbinnen gfctubte e$, One of her friends be- 
lieved it. 

2)et jefjnte ron ben $nabcn n>at bet fluajie, The tenth of the boys 
was the most clever. 

£>et -ftuigjre ron ifynen fcfjnueg, The most clever of them remained 
silent. 

In expressing the day of the month, the numeral is used as an 
adjective, and is not followed by ron; as, 

£)et erfte Sanuar roar fein £obe$tag, The first of January was his 
death-day. 

Nouns derived from intransitive verbs which are governed by a 
preposition must be used with the same preposition which the 
verb governs ; as, Sr bacbte an fcinen Sreunb, He thought of his friend. 

Example. 
£er ©ebanfe an bte Snri^cit ijr rctdjtig, The thought of eternity is 
important. 

Other nouns derived from intransitive verbs require the following 
prepositions, an, nad), fur, ror, auf ; as, 
2)et Mangel an @elb, The want of money. 
£>a£ ©treben nacb 3u*icbtf)um, The pursuit of riches. 



158 SYNTAX. 

£>te ©orge fur ^tnber, The care of cliildren. 
JDte $urd>t ttor ©trafie, The fear of punishment. 
£)a$ QSerrrauen auf &ott, The reliance on God. 

f. In English the connection or interest of persons is always ex- 

pressed by the dative, but in German by the genitive ; as, 

Unfere je^igc $6nigtnn tjt eine Gutter be$ ?8olH, Our present Queen 
is a mother to the people. 

g. The following adjectives referring to substantives govern the 

genitive, as, beburftig, befTiffen, benotfngr, beroufjt, eingebenf, fdfytg, 
and many others already mentioned among those which govern 
the genitive in the Etymology. 

Examples. 
<5r roat bet Untetftui?ung bebutfttg, He was in want of assistance. 
<£t \)<xt ft'rf) bet $3iffenfd>aften befTiffen, He has studied the sciences, 
©ie n>at be$ SSetflanbeS benotfjigt, She was in need of the assistance. 
(£t roar ft'cf) be$ ^SerbredjenS beroufjt, He was conscious of the crime. 
€t tjr feiner Seller etngebenf , He is mindful of his faults. 
St ift be$ 2Imte*> fdfyig, or (£r ift fdfyig fur bag 2Imf, He is competent 
for the office. 

h. The following verbs require the genitive. 

The following transitive verbs govern the genitive of the thing 
and the accusative of the person ; as, anflagen, to accuse of; be= 
rauben, to rob of; beftf>u(btgen, to accuse of; entbmben, to release 
from; entlaflen, to dismiss; entlebtgen, to deliver from; entfe^en, to 
discharge ; entroofynen, to render unaccustomed, to wean ; ubetfufyren, 
to convict; uberfyeben, to save; uberjeugen, to convince; rourbtgen, 
to favour one with; mftd)ern, to assure one of (etnen t?erft<f>ern, 
to assure one's life); jetfyen, (used in the Bible), to accuse of; 
belefyren, to give hints; serroeifen, (bet <5tabt or be$ SanbeS) to 
banish from. 

Examples. 
9ftan ffagte mtd> be$ Forbes an, They accused me of murder. 
©te beraubten mi$ beS ©elbeS, They robbed me of the money. 
<£r tjr be$ £>iebjtar)l$ befct)ulbigt roorben, He has been accused of 

the theft, 
©ie ftnb tt)rer ^ffic^ten ate 3fUd)ter entbunben roorben, They have been 

released from their duties as judges. 



THE GENITIVE. 159 

The above examples will shew the use of the verbs. 
i. Neuter verbs govern both the genitive of the person and the 
tiling; as, beacbten, achtcn, to care for, to attend to; bebiitfen, 
to be in need of; gebraudjen, to be in use of; gebenfen, to re- 
member ; entbefyren, to miss ; erroarten, to expect ; ermanadn, 
to be without ; fcbonen, to spare. 

Examjyles. 

3cb ad)te fetner unb fciner SBorte nid)t, I do not care for him and 

his words. 
(£r bcbarf 3fy«r unb 3fyte$ ©elbeS, He is in need of you and of 

your money. 

Some of them also govern the accusative ; as, 
<£t beafytete ba$ ftinb, He noticed the child. 

j. The following govern either the genitive of the person or of the 
thing ; as, leben, to live ; fterben, to die ; perb(eicf;en (beS £obeS), 
to expire ; pftegcn, to nurse one ; fetneS 2lmteS marten, to fulfil 
one's duty; 3emanbe£ fdjonen, to spare one; ladjen, to laugh at; 
fpotten, to mock. 

Examples. 
3Btr We leben ber jpoffhuno,, All of us live in hope. 
(3te roirb eine£ fanften StobeS frcrben, She will die peaceably. 
(£r t>erbtid> beS XobeS, He expired (died). 
3cb pfle^te feiner, I had care of him. 
3cf> pflea,te tfyrer @cfunbf?ett, I took care of her health. 
(£r fd)onte be$ Cannes, He spared the man. 
®te roarten ifjre^ SImteS, They perform their duty. 
<5ie tad)te ber £fyorf)etten ber SBelt, or ©te lad)te liber bte Xfyorfyeiten bet 

'Belt, She laughed at the folly of the world. 
(£r fpottete beS ©tummen, or (£r fpottete liber ben ©tummen, He mocked 

the dumb person. 
(£t fpottete bet 'Belt, or <£t fpottete liber bie Belt, He defied the 

world. 

k. Most reflective verbs (or used as such) have the accusative of 
the person and the genitive of the thing after them ; as, ficb 
annefymen, to take one's part ; fid) bebiencn, to make use of; ft# 
begeben, to resign ; fid) bemddjtigen, to take possession of; ftd) 
befleiftgen, to apply to; fief) befebetben, to be contented with; 



160 SYNTAX. 

ficfy befinnen, to recollect; ft$ ciner <&a<fye entdu^ern, to abstain 
from a thing ; ft'$ bes> s 28etnen$ entfyatten, to forbear weeping ; 
fid) entfinnen, to recollect; ft'cf) erbarmen, to pity; fid) erinnetn, 
to remember ; {id) etroefyren, to defend one's self; fi$ fveuen or 
erfreuen, to rejoice; ftd> geitoflen, to console one's self; fid) 
rufymen, to boast of; fid> fdvamen, to be ashamed of; ftc^> untet= 
fartgen, untetftefyen, untetnxnben, wvmefien, to dare, venture ; fid? 
etneS 23e|Tetn ? on (Sinem tterfeben, to expect better things of one. 
(Sid) beftagen, to complain of; fid> wtmunbern, to wonder at ; fi$ 
freuen, to rejoice, are governed by ubcr, in preference to 
the genitive. 

The genitive is more used in poetry, and the prepositions in 
prose. 

Examples, 

<5r befcmn fid) eine$ SBcffern, He thought better of it. 

(£t entdugette fid) be$ $etbred)en£, He abstained from vice. 

2Bic cntf?icltcn un$ be$ SBetnenS, We forbore weeping. 

(£rbarme bid) bet Unglucflicben, Pity the unfortunate. 

<&t entfann fid) meineS gteunbeS, He remembered a friend of mine. 

(£tinnette et ficb metnet SBortc ? Did he recollect my words ? 

<£ntn>ei)r<m ®ie fi$ feinec <Sd)meic{)elctcn, Guard yourself against his 
flatteries. 

(£t fd)dmt fid) fcine^ atmen 2>tuber$ ntc&t, He is not ashamed of his 
poor brother. 

SBir uberrcinben un$ dicier ©efafcren, We venture many dangers. 

I. The genitive is also used when time, place, or manner is ex- 
pressed, except when the noun is feminine, in which case the 
nominative is used; as, ©tunbe, hour; 3Bod)e, week. 

Examples. 
£)e$ SftorgenS, in the morning ; be$ SSormittctgS, in the forenoon ; 
bet £ageS in the day (which differs from bin or am Stage, every 
day, or the whole day) ; bet Stbenbtf, in the evening (which 
differs from am 2tbenb, every evening) ; bet ^acbtS, at night ; 
©onntagS, ?0tontaa,$, or bet ©onntagS, bet sjttontagS, on Sundays, 
on Mondays; (?tnma( bet 3al;re$, bet -JftonatS, once a year, once 
a month; QSiermat bie 5Bod)e, four times a week (which differs 
from €tnmal tm Safyre, im sjjionat, in bet 2Bod)e, once every year, 
every month, every week) ; $n>ei ganje ©tunben instead of jrcet 
gan&et ©tunben, two hours; alter Dtten or an atfen Dtten, every- 
where. 



THE DATIVE. 161 

m. Adjectives, when used as adverbs, require the genitive ; as, 
folgenbct ©eftatt, fotgenbet gejlalt, fofgenber mafjen, as follows, in the 
following manner ; gerabetf SScgeS, straight on ; meinetf SBiffen*, 
to my knowledge. 

And also nouns with the verb fenn ; as, 3Bil(cn$ fe«n, to intend ; 
bet ^einung fenn, to be of opinion. 

Also with fasten, gefyen, fommen, reiten, which verbs are always fol- 
lowed by be$ 2Bege$ ; as, (£t tarn be£ SBegeS, He came that way. 

C THE DATIVE. 

The dative case is employed when a reference is required to a 
person or thing, denoting either an action or a continuous state ; 
w T hen shewing the advantage or disadvantage, the delight or dis- 
grace of a person, or in forming abstract ideas ; as, 

€r ttetfaufte feinem ^a#at ben ©atten fefyt bitUg, He sold the garden 

very cheap to his neighbour. 
£)te jpoffnung blufyt ben airmen, n>ie ben 3fteid)en, Hope flourishes for the 

poor and the rich. 
£)et 9locf ift mit $u gto£, unb bte jpofen ftnb mic ju flein, The coat is too 

large for me, and the trowsers are too short for me. 
@ute ^inbet tnctcben ifyten (£(tetn gto£e $teube, Good children give great 

joy to their parents. 
£>te @runbfa£e bee Sefuiten frfjaben jungen Seuten, The principles of the 

Jesuits are injurious to young men. 
(St ging ju feinem greunbe, He went to his friend. 

The preposition $u with the dative is only used to denote motion 
from one person to another, as the last sentence will exemplify. 

When the dative is used with the following adjectives, the auxi- 
liary verb fejjn, to be, is generally used in forming a sentence ; as, 
abgeneigr, disinclined, unkind; abfyolb, disaffected; abttiinnig, dis- 
loyal; ctynlirf), similar, like; angeboten, hereditary; angefyottg, be- 
longing to, &c. 

All the other adjectives will be found in the Etymology in 
alphabetical order, adjectives with the dative. 

The following examples will shew the nature of all the adjectives 
mentioned; as, 

(£t rcctt mit abgeneigt, He was unkind to me. 
©ie ijt tfym abfyotb, She is disaffected to him. 

2)te ©tenet routben u)tem £>ettn abttunnig, The valets became faithless 
to their master. 



162 SYNTAX. 

£)er 33ruber war fetner ©dbroeftet dt>nticb, The brother was like his 

sister. 
£>er ©tots ift bem 9#anne angeboren, Pride is hereditary in that man. 
%)a$ ©d>to£ war bem £orb W. angefybrtg, The castle belonged to Lord N. 
©em @efcf)dft ijl tf>m angelegen, He is devoted to his business. 
£)te Smtwort war bet ©a$e angemeffen, The answer was adapted to 

the affair. 
$3irb Sftnen mein 23efucb angenefym fet>n ? Will my visit be agreeable 

to you ? 
Sffierben ifym Me anfydngUcfy fet)n ? Will all of them become attached 

to him ? 
©em 23etragen war $telen anftofng, His behaviour was objectionable 

to many. 
38a$ er fagte, war ifjm felbft drgerlid), What he said was vexatious to 

himself. 
<i£ wurbe tfmen bange, They became afraid. 

£)te <5ad)e wurbe mir bebenfftcf), I became scrupulous about the matter. 
€$ wirb tfym begreifftcf) werben, It will be comprehensible to him. 
£)er 3taliener war mir oft befyufflicfy, The Italian was often serviceable 

to me. 
3ft e$ 3fynen beliebtg auSjugefyen ? Is it agreeable to you to go out ? 
£$ war tfyr befannt, It was known to her. 
Nettie ©cbiiler ftnb mir banftat, My pupils are grateful to me. 
£>ie Slrjnet wirb 3f)nen btenlicb fejjn, That medicine will be wholesome 

to you. 
^necfyte ftnb ifyren jjerren bienftbar, Servants are subject to their masters. 
£>a$ war tfym immer eigen, That was always peculiar to him. 
£>te SBiefe gefybrt ifym eigen tf)umltd>, That meadow is his own property. 
JDie ^ferbe ftnb mir or fur mid) etntrdglttf), Those horses are profitable 

to me. 
£)te Untertfyanen waren tfyrer $omginn ergeben, The subjects were devoted 

to their queen. 
£)er 9ftann war bem Strunf ergeben, The man was given to drinking. 
<£$ wirb 3fynen erinnerlid) fetjn, You will remember it. 
2Bar e$ 3fynen erwunfd)t ? Was it desirable to you ? 
©tnb 3fynen bte $inber gefyorfam gewefen ? Have the children been obe- 
dient to you ? 
2)a$ Sefen tft tf)m getduftg, He reads fluently. 
©te famen mir fef>r gelegen, They came very opportunely. 
3ft e$ fetnen Sunfcben gemdj? ? Is it according to his wishes ? 
©ie werben un$ genetgt fetjn, They will be kind to us. 



THK DATIVE. 



163 



2>ie$eamtcn waxen bcm £et*og gctreu, The officers were faithful to 

the duke. 
St roctt feinen ©egnetn geroctdtfcn, He was equal in strength to his 

adversaries. 
£>et ffonig ijt feinen gjttmffetn geroogen,The king is condescending to 

his ministers. 
<£$ routbe it>m cjanj gleicfcguttig, It became quite indifferent to him. 
£>ie ©rdfinn roctt bet Samitie gndbtg, The countess was condescending 

(gracious) to that family. 
5Det SBinb war ifynen gunfttg, The wind was favourable to them. 
!Da$ SDaben ifi nut fceUfam, Bathing is wholesome for me. 
©eine ftranfyett n?at tym f)inbet(id), His illness was troublesome to him. 
©ie tft tym fjolb, She is affectionate to him. 
©ein 35efud) roat mit Idftig, His visit was troublesome to me. 
(5$ ift mit licb, bct£ ©ie fommen, I am glad that you are coming. 
£>ie 3atyre$$eit roitb tynen nacbtfyetug fe»n, The time of the year will be 

disadvantageous to them. 
St ijl mit nctfye genug, urn mid) ju fefyen, He is near enough to me to see me. 
©er Sranjofe max if>m fd)dt?bat, The Frenchman was valuable to him. 
£)et £ob feineS 93cttet$ roitb ifym f$met$ctft fe»n, The death of his cousin 

will be painful to him. 
(it roitb if)t tteu bteiben, He will remain true to her. 
Sic roaten mit unauSftefyltd), They were disgusting to me. 
$omme id) 3f)nen unetroattet ? Do I come to you unexpectedly ? 
JDciS ©erotttet roitb mit unttetgef3lid) feyn, I shall never forget that thun- 
derstorm, 
©cine 2lnfunft tarn mit um?etfyotft, His arrival was unexpected (to me). 
(St foU mit ttetantroottltcb roetben, He must become responsible to me. 
3d) bin 3fynen fefyt Mtbunben, I am much obliged to you. 
£>ie @efcl((d)aft wax tf>m mfyafct, The company was odious to him. 
©cine JBotte ftnb bit pctftdnbUcfy, His words are clear to you. 
£)u roitjl ifym immet tfyeuet fetin, Thou wilt be always dear to him. 
©cine sptafyletei ijl ifyt rotbetlid), His boasting is disgusting to her. 
(£$ ift ifym roofyt, bafc et tobt ift, It is well for him that he is dead. 
£>aS (£ffen roitb 3fyten juttdgttd) fenn, The dinner will be wholesome 

for you. 

The adjectives, when followed by a noun, must be always pre- 
ceded by a dative ; as, 

%)a$ meincm Ofyeim cmgefycrige £au$ routbe fetyt tfjeuer eerfauft, The house 
belonging to my uncle was sold for a great price. 

m2 



164 



SYNTAX. 



£>er feinen Untergebenen geroogene 9)Unttf er n>irb attentfyalben gead>tet, That 
minister who is condescending to his inferiors is esteemed 
everywhere. 

The following transitive verbs govern the dative of the person 
and the accusative of the thing; as, abfcblagen, to refuse; abtreten, to 
give up to; anbteten, to offer to; anfyeimftellen, to defer to; auftragen, 
to confer upon; befefyten, to command; betfatlen, to occur; beroeifen, 
to prove to; bejafylen, to pay; borgen, to lend to; entgegnen, to reply 
to ; erfe$en, to restore to ; erjctylen, to relate to ; geben, to give to ; 
gefyord>en, to obey; geloben, to vow to; geftatten, to grant to; gcftcfjcn, 
to confess ; glauben, to believe ; gonnen, not to grudge ; flagen, to 
complain to ; letfyen, to lend to ; melben, to announce to ; mtttfyetlen, 
to communicate to ; nefymen, to take (to deprive of) ; offenbaren, to 
reveal to; op fern, to sacrifice to; vorpfeifcn, to whistle to; fagen, to 
say to; fd>retben, to write to; ubergeben, to give over to; uberlafien, 
to give over to ; serbergen, to conceal from ; serbanfen, to thank for ; 
tterefyren, to present to ; r-ergeben, to forgive ; pergeffen, to forget ; »er= 
gonnen, to grant to; cergitten, to recover; J?erfyet£en, to promise; set* 
funbtgen, to announce to ; ttermacfyen, to bequeath ; t>erfcbreiben, to 
prescribe ; perfpredben, to promise ; sertrauen, to confide (in, to) ; t?et- 
roilligen, to grant ; roafyrfagen, to prophecy, to foretell ; rottlfafyren, to 
comply with ; jeigen, to show. 

Examples. 
<£r fcbtug e$ mic ab, He refused it to me. 

3* roerbe tt)m metne ©telle abtreten, I shall resign my place to him. 
€r hot mit feine dimmer imentgeltlicfy an, He offered me his rooms 

gratuitously. 
©te rotll mir bte liHedmung nic^t bejafylen, She will not pay me the 

account. 
©te entgegneten unS folgenbe SBorte, They replied to us in the following 

words. 
3d) fyabe tfjm eine @efcbid>te erjctytt, I have related a story to him. 
(£r gab mir ba$ @etb, He gave me the money. 
©te gefyorcfyten mit eine lange %eit, They obeyed me for a long time. 
©te gelobten mir £reue, They promised to be faithful to me. 
(£r geftattete mir mein ©efud), He granted my petition. 
3$ geftanb u)nen mein ^Berbrecben, I confessed my crime to them. 
(5r opferte feiner ^flicfyt fein £eben, He sacrificed his life for his duties. 
€r pftff mir einen 5Karfd) t>or, He whistled a march to me. 
$Men ©te mir bte 2Baf>rt)eit fagen? Will you tell me the truth? 



THE DATIVE. 165 

<£r wrbanft 3(wen fetn @(iicf, He may thank you for his fortune. 
SBotfen <5ie mir ben Scaler wrgeben ? Will you forgive me that fault ? 
3cb rcerbe tfym bie SRetfefoften wrguten, I shall repay him his travelling 

expenses. 
(£r jeigte mir feine ©$d§e, He shewed me his treasures. 

The following intransitive verbs govern the dative ; as, abfyelfen, 
to attend; ctngefyoren, to belong; aufroarten, to wait upon ; cuiffylfen, 
to assist; auSroeidien, to avoid ; begegnen, to meet; beirommen, to get 
at; betpfticbtcn, to agree with; betftefjcn, to assist; betroofynen, to be 
present; banfen, to thank; btenen, to serve ; entfuefyen, to escape ; ent= 
fagen, to renounce ; enrfpredjen, to correspond to ; erfrf>etnen, to ap- 
pear; gefyorcben, to be obedient; gletcben, to resemble; @(ucf rounfcben, 
to congratulate ; fyelfen, to help ; fyulbtgen, to do homage ; fyolen, to 
fetch; nad>af>men, to imitate; pocfym (bat iperj), to beat; ratten, to 
advise; fterben, to die ; trauen, to trust; unrerltegen, to yield; pot- 
bauen, to prevent; n>etd)en, to make room for; ttnberfprecben, to con- 
tradict ; unftfafyren, to comply with. 

Examples. 
(£r fyalf mir fogtet<$ ab, He attended to me immediately. 
£>a$ s £ud) gefyort mir an, That book belongs to me. 
9Kel?rere 23ebtenten roarteten mit auf, Several servants waited upon me. 
28er rottb ifynen auffyetfen ? Who will assist them ? 
9Bir n>id>en tfyr au$, We avoided her. 

3d) begegnete etnem metner SanbSteute, I met one of my countrymen. 
(£t fonnte mit nid)t betfmrtmen, He was not able to get at me. 
3<±> roerbe bit beipfTicfjten, I shall agree with thee. 
SBerben ®ie ben Jiputflofen beifrefyen ? Will you assist the helpless ? 
Me roofynten bem $efte bet, All were present at the feast. 
£)anh ber Same fur bat @elb, Thank the lady for the money. 
£r biente fetnem Jpertn treuhd), He served his master faithfully. 
<Ste entflofyen bem £obe, They escaped from death. 
SSerben ©ie 3fyren Sreunben entfagen, Will you renounce your 

friends? 
(£r gticb feinem $ater, He was like his father. 
2>ie ©olbaten fmtbtgten ifyrem $6ntg, The soldiers did homage to 

their king. 
(£r unterlctg feinen $etnben, He yielded to his enemies. 
SSiberfprtd) beinen SBorten nid)t, Do not contradict your words. 

The following reflective verbs require also the dative; as, ftd> 
anmapen, to claim, to assume; ft'rf) berougt fetm, to recollect; ftd> er* 



168 SYNTAX. 

geben, to surrender; fid) getrauen, to dare; fid) perfdjaffen, to procure; 
ft'd) wrurfacben, to cause; fid) rotberfei^en, to resist; jtd) roibcrfpredjen, 
to contradict one's self. 

Examples. 

Wafjen ©te ftcfc s 3tt$t$ an, n>«$ 2tnbern gefyorf, Do not claim any thing 

that belongs to others. 
?0tajjen ©ie ftc^> nid)t an, roa$ ©ie nid)t finb, Do not assume to be what 

you are not. 
(£r roar fid) be$ ^orfattS berou£t, He remembered the circumstance. 
Sit ergaben un$ ben 3ldubern, We surrendered to the robbers. 
2Bir getrauen un$ btefeS nid)t, We dare not do it. 
Also, ©ie getraute fid) nid)t bafyin, She dared not go there. 
(£r eerfebaffte ficb fetbft SebentSmtttef, He obtained provisions for 

himself. 
©ie roerben fid) ©corner jen t>erurfad)en, You will cause pain to 

yourself. 
(£r roiberfe^te ficfy feinen $orgefe£ten, He offered resistance to his 

superiors. 
©te roiberfprad) \id) oft, She contradicted herself often. 

The following reflective verbs are followed by the dative ; as, 
Co afyn(e)t mir, mir af)n(e)t, I fancy ; e$ ftel;t mir an, it is agreeable to 
me; e$ befyagt mir, I like it; eS bettebt mir, it pleases me; eS fdflt 
mir bet, it occurs to me ; eg befommt mir, it agrees with me ; e£ 
bducbt mir or mtcfc, it strikes me ; e$ feud)tet mir ein, it is clear to me; 
eS fdtlt mir ctn, I recollect ; e£ cfclt mir, or mir efelt, I am disgusted 
with it ; e$ entfdtft mir, it escapes my memory ; e$ gefdttt mir, it 
pleases me; eS grau(e)t mir, or mir grau(e)t, it frightens me; e$ 
mangelt mir, I am in want of; e$ liegt mir ob, it is my duty ; e3 
fdjaubert mir, or eS febaubert mir bie jpaut, I shudder ; e$ fdjroinbelt mir, 
I am giddy ; e$ ftyeint mir, it appears to me ; eS trdumt mir,' or 
mir trdumt, I am dreaming; e$ ttjut mir letb, I am sorry for it; e$ 
f ommt mir j?or, it seems to me ; eS t>erfd>ldgt mir 'iftidjtS, it does not 
matter; es? rodJTert mir ber 9ftunb (vulg.), it makes my mouth water; 
e$ rotberfdfjrt mir, it befalls me ; e£ jicmt mir, it is becoming to me ; 
e$ lommt mir $u, it is my duty. 

The following examples are purely idiomatic, and are used with 
the dative and accusative ; as, 

(Ace.) £>er ©efanbfe f!ef)t fit£ gut, The ambassador has a good 
income. 



THE DATIVE. 167 

(Dat.) £r ftefyt ficb felbft im 2id>te, He acts to his own disadvantage, 

(He stands in his own light). 
(Ace.) £)te Woti) gef)t an (ben) 9)?ann, It comes to the worst. 
(Dat.) £)er #opf tfnit mir roef), I have headache. 

The dative of the personal pronoun mir, to me, is often used in 
German when it is omitted in English ; as, 

SReben ©ie mir nid)t$ mefyr baron, Do not speak any more of it. 
2acf>en <2ie mir ntd>t mef>r, Do not laugh any more. 

D. THE ACCUSATIVE. 

The accusative is governed by active and transiti ve verbs which 
refer either to persons or things. 

Examples. 
2)er 23ater beftrafte feinen ©ofyn, The father punished his son. 
£)er aSacfec bacft SSrobt, The baker bakes bread. 
3d) bebaure feme UmjUnbe, I pity his circumstances. 
£>te $a£e fdncjt 9ftdufe, The cat catches mice. 

The following transitive verbs govern the accusative of the per- 
son or place with or without a preposition. 

Examples, 
(£r banb mid) an ben £tfd) (an), He tied me to the table. 
3d) rourbe oon u)m an ben Stifcfc gebunben, I was tied by him to the 

table. 
(Sr fufyrte mid) in bte ©efettfebaft ein, He introduced me into the 

company. 
3d) rourbe eon tbm in bte @efeUfd)aft etngefufjrt, I was introduced by 

him into the company. 

The following verbs, fufyren, to lead; geroitynen, to accustom; 
fd)tao,en, to strike; answer the questions, roobtn ? whereto? rooran? 
to what? roofyin? where? 

The following transitive verbs require the accusative of the per- 
son without, and the dative of the place with a preposition. 

Examples. 
(£r rebete mid) auf bet ©trafje an, He addressed me in the street. 
3d) rourbe t?on ifym auf ber ©trafje angerebet, I was addressed by him 
in the street. 



168 SYNTAX. 

(£r fyintercuna, mid) tn meinem @efd)dft, He deceived me in my business. 
3d) rourbe t>on ifym in meinem @cfd)dft f)intera,<ma,en, I was deceived by 
him in business. 

The following, mid) aug(ad)en, to laugh at me ; mid) einfjoten, to 
overtake me; mid) ftnben, to find me; mid) f)6ren, to hear me, and 
others, answer the question, n?o ? whereto ? 

The following neuter verbs require the dative of the person and 
the accusative of the thing, preceded by a preposition. These do 
not admit of a passive voice; as, (ad>en, to laugh; fcfyretben, to 
write ; fefyen, to look ; rufen, to cry, call ; fluftern, to whisper. 

Examples. 
(£t lacfyte mir in'g (in ba$) ©eftcbf, He laughed in my face. 
(£r fd>reibt mir auf ben 5lrm, He writes upon my arm. 
(£r fat) mir in ben 9)?unb fyinein, He looked into my mouth. 
(Er rief mir tn'g Ofyr, He called into my ear. 

The accusative of the personal pronouns generally follows re- 
flective verbs (those requiring the dative have been already 
mentioned) ; as, id) drgere mid), I am angry ; id) betriibe mid), I am 
grieved ; id) t>erfef>e mid), I am mistaken ; id) entfd)lte£e mid), I am 
determined ; id) janfe mid), I quarrel. 

The accusative is used after the following impersonal verbs ; as, 
eg befrembet mid), it is strange to me ; eg betrtfft mid), it regards me ; 
eg betriibt mid), or id) betriibe mid), I am grieved ; eg bctuertmicf), I am 
sorry for it; eg bunft mid), I fancy; eg freut mic|, or id) freue mid), I 
am glad; eg f)ima,ert micb, or mid) fyungert, I am hungry ; eg jammert 
mid>, I am grieved; eg Idcfrert mid), I am amused; eg reu(e)t mid), I 
regret ; eg fdjaubert mid), I shudder ; eg tterbriefit mid), I am vexed ; 
eg nMinbert mid), or id) rounbre mid), I am astonished. 

Verbs which govern two accusatives ; as, fufyren, to direct, (to 
guide) ; lefjren, to teach ; leiten, to lead ; nennen, or fyei^en, to call ; 
peitfdjen, to whip ; fdjeften, or fdjimpfen, to abuse ; taufen, to baptize. 

Examples. 

(Er fu^rte b<m ftremben burcb die dimmer, He guided the stranger 

through all the rooms. 
£r Ui)tt mid) bie 9ftuftf, He teaches me music. 
€r (ettete ben 23Iinben ben gcm&en SSormittag, He led the blind man the 

whole forenoon. 
Wan nennt tfyn einen ©ei^afg, They call him a miser. 



THE ACCUSATIVE. lf>9 

<Sie fd>aft or frf>impftc if?n etnen Sta^cbteb, She abused him as an idler. 
£>et graufame ^ann peitfd)te fcincn 9$ebienfcn jeben Stag, The cruel man 

whipped his servant-man every day. 
2>er <prebiger taufte ba$ 2Ndbd)en Caroline, The minister baptized the 

girl Caroline. 

Adjectives which express measure, length, weight, depth, wealth, 

age, value, or distance, govern the accusative; as, bicf, thick; grop, 

large, tall ; tang, long ; frf>n>er, heavy ; tief, deep ; tetcf), rich ; alt, 

old ; rocrtt), worth. 

Examples. 

£>ie ©ofjlen ftnb eincn $3ofl btcf, The soles are an inch in thickness. 

IDu btft eincn Sup grower ate icfa, Thou art one foot taller than I. 

£)et 2Beg roar eine 9flei(e lang, The road was one mile in length. 

£>ie jpammetefeute roar fecf)^ ^pfunb fcbroer, The joint of mutton was six 
pound in weight. 

£)er ©rf>nee tft fe<$$ 5«P ticf, The snow is six feet in depth. 

2)et $aufmann roat eine fyatbe Million ^funb ©terting retd), The mer- 
chant had a fortune of half a million sterling. 

£)a$ £inb ijt btet 3<u)te unb eincn £ag alt, The child is three years and 
one day old. 

Der Storf i]t jefyn Scaler roetrf), That stick is worth ten thalers (thirty 
shillings). 

The accusative is employed to express a certain time, a duration 
of time, or indefinite time. 

Examples. 
SBtt rcerben btefen 2Ibenb (BefcUfcfcaft f>aben, We shall have company 

this evening. 
3d) roar einen ganjen 2Ronat auf bem Sanbe, I was in the country for a 

whole month. 
(£t befud)t feme Sreunbe £tnmat bie 5Borf)e, He visits his friends once 

a week. 

The accusative is more frequently governed in poetry than in 
prose by the present or past participle. 

Examples. 

Seine 2Mttfe gen ipimmel ttcfytenb, tebete er fofgenbe 3Borte, With his looks 
directed towards heaven, he spoke the following words. 

or, Snbem et feine 2Mttfe gen jpimmel rid)tete, rebete et folgenbe 2Gorte, 
Having directed his looks towards heaven, he spoke the fol- 
lowing words. 



170 



SYNTAX. 



(Seine S&unben forgfctftig ttetbunben, elite et in bat S^ant bet $3unbatjte3, 
His wounds being carefully dressed, he hurried into the house 
of the surgeon. 

or, 9?atf>bem (ba, alt) er feme Sunben mit ©otgfalt setbunben fyatte, eilte 
er in bat §aut bet 3Bunbatjte$, After having dressed his wounds 
with care, he hurried into the house of the surgeon. 

The first and third sentences shew that both participles are used 
as adverbs, being placed at the end, and the second and fourth re- 
quire the conjunctions inbem, whilst, or natf)bem, ba, alt, after or 
when, with their respective tenses, i. e. the imperfect and pluperfect. 

§ 3. THE USE OF THE VERB. 

NUMBERS AND PERSONS. 

The verb agrees with its object or subject in number and person. 

Examples. 
3$ fud;e meinen Spmb, I am looking for my dog. 
3£it ftnb jTeifHg, We are industrious. 
£)te 336gel ftngen, The birds are singing. 

2)u, thou, is used in familiar language, and in speaking to chil- 
dren or to inferiors ; as, 

2>u &ctjl Retit, Thou art right. 

@teb mit ben 23aK, Give me the ball. 

jpole mtr ben 3Betn, Fetch me the wine. 

©te, you, is used in speaking to a friend advanced in age, or to 
a stranger, also to a parent ; as, 

$tebet Ofyetm, roetben <Bie mit unt fyeifen? Dear uncle, will you dine 

with us? 
25ttte, geben ©te mit ben 35cttt, Pray, give me the ball. 
SBte gefyt'S 3fynen, liebe Wuttet ? How do you do, dear mamma ? 

At Hamburgh and Hanover children address their parents by 
bu; as, 

SBaS roittft bu, tiebet 93atet? What wilt thou (do you wish), dear 
father ? 

Any person of station, education or fortune, will address their in- 
feriors, particularly country people, by (£t or 3fyt, you ; as, 
3ofy<mn, f)Ctt <St bte ^pfetbe gefutfett? John, have you given food to 
the horses ? 



THE VERB — NUMBERS AND PERSO 171 

2Reicr, roann rcerbet %hx bag ^acbtgelb bcjat?(cn ? Meier, when will you 
pay the farm rent ? 

"When a verb refers to more than one subject, each of which is 
in the singular, the plural of the verb is used ; as, 

©cfunbf>eit, jSufriebenfjett unb 9?etd)tf)um finb bte gropfen ^oruuje be£ 
2eben£, Health, peace of mind, and wealth, are the greatest ad- 
vantages of life. 

When a verb refers to several subjects of different persons, it is 
used in the plural ; as, 

£)er QSater, bte Gutter unb baS $tnb ft'nb ertrunfen, The father, the 
mother, and the child, have been drowned. 

The singular is employed after a negation ; as, 
tfhcht bcr Water, fonbern bat $tnb fyat e$ gefagt, It was not the father, 
but the child who said it. 

In speaking to a person of high rank or title, the plural of the 
verb is used ; as, 

(£ro.) Sure 9ftajeftdt fyaben befofyten, Your Majesty has commanded. 
(Sro.) Sure SrceHenj roerben entfcbulbtgen, Your Excellency will 
excuse. 

In speaking of persons of high rank, the singular of the verb is 
used ; as, 

(@r.) <2einer 9)?ajetfar, ber $cmig, ift au%?fafyren, His Majesty, the 
King, is gone out in a carriage. 

In writing to persons of distinction, the verb is used in the 
plural ; as, 

3f?re f6nicjfid)e fyob/it fyaben befotrten, Your Royal Highness has com- 
manded. 

3f>re 9flaje[tdr, bte ftenicunn, fyaben befd)toffcn, Your Majesty, the Queen, 
has decided. 

The personal pronoun bu, thou, if>r, ye, can only be omitted in 
the second person singular and plural of the imperative ; as, 

£aufe (bu) unb fomm (bu) balb utriitf, Run and come back soon. 
Abetter (ifcr) unb nacbfjer rufyet aue, Work, and rest afterwards. 

When the same personal pronoun or noun is referred to by two 
verbs in the same sentence, it is omitted in the second part of the 
sentence, except when a conjunction which removes the verb 



172 SYNTAX. 

to the end of the sentence is used, in which case it is ex- 
pressed, as, 

3$ sefye K£t <* U S> abet f omme fyeute ntdrt junicf, I am now going out, 

but shall not come back to-day. 
SSenn id> arbette, (fo) mup td> allein fepn, When I am engaged I must 

be by myself. 

TENSES. 

The use of the present tense in German differs from that in 
English. 

There is only one way of expressing the same idea in German, 
and there are three forms in English ; as, 
3$ tebe, I live, I am living, I do live. 
(£t faufte, He bought, He was buying, He did buy. 
©ptette et gut ? Played he well ? Was he playing well ? Did he play 
well? 

The present tense is used in preference to the imperfect in narra- 
tion; as, 

3$ mlafie mein JpauS, unb afe id) burd) bte ©tta#e gefye, fefye id) etn gto$e$ 
geuer, I left the house, and when I went through the street I 
saw a great fire. 

When an adverb of time is used to express certainty, the present 
is always used instead of the future ; as, 

£eute gefye id) aug, unb bringe 3fynen Me 23iid)er mit, I shall go out to- 
day and bring the books for you. 

2Bit fyolen ba$ @elb, unb bejctf>len btc Seute, We shall fetch the money 
and pay the people. 

When an adverb referring to the present time is used, or when 
one sentence refers to a former one, the present is used instead of 
the perfect ; as, 

SBir fagen e$ 3fynen t>otfy>t, ba$ 3^re Untetnefjmung nid&t gettngen roirb, 
We have told you before that you will not succeed in your 
undertakings. 

The imperfect tense is employed in the following manner : 
When it refers to an action which has recently occurred, which 
is the same case in any other language ; as, 

©o eben n>ac bzt ^oftbote fytet, unb bracfyte mir einen 23tief, The postman 
was here just now and brought me a letter. 



THE VERB — TENSES. 173 

21fg id) cunning, begegnete mir cm alter 95efannter, When I went out an 
old acquaintance of mine met me. 

It is called historical tense when referring; to historical events, 
when a narrative has been begun and continues to be related ; as, 

$art ber ©rope beftrberte bie 3BiJTenfd)aften, bilbete bit ©dutlen, unb wr= 
breitete bat £f?riftenu?um, Charles the Great promoted the 
sciences, improved the schools, and propagated Christianity. 

If any thing happens in the presence of a person ; as, 

3* fat? ein armeS $inb bluten, naf>erre mid) if?m, unb bracftfe e$ &um 58unb= 
arjt, n?eld)er feine SBunbe balb fyeilte, I saw a poor child bleeding, 
I approached it, and took it to the surgeon, who soon healed 
its wound. 

The perfect is employed — 

When an action has come to its conclusion, and a certain time has 
elapsed; as, 

Die Diebe finb gefangen unb beg £anbe£ r-errotefen roorben, The thieves 

have been caught, and have been transported. 
2Bir finb brei 2Bod?en in £)eutfd)(anb geroefen unb fyaben tnele ©tabte befucbt, 

We have been in Germany for three weeks, and have visited 

many towns. 

When persons or things no longer exist, in which case the im- 
perfect is employed in English, instead of the perfect in German ; as, 
9ftetn Ofyetm ijt ju 9)*abrtb gefforben, My uncle died at Madrid. 

When the pluperfect is used in English ; as, 

<£r fjat Sreunbe gebabt, He had had friends. 
<2ie fjaben 5Kuf)e getjabt, They had had rest. 

When an action or state alone is mentioned, in English the per- 
fect is expressed by " I have ;" as, 
3d? fyabe in bem Spau\e geroofynt, I have lived in that house. 

But when time is also mentioned, the expression is different ; as, 
" I have been ;" as, 

3d) i>abe met 3afyre in bem jpaufe geroofynt, I have been living in that 
house for four years. 

The pluperfect is used — 

When it refers to an action which has taken place a long time 
ago; as, 



174 SYNTAX. 

2fleranbet, bee @ro$e, fyarre befd)loffen, hie ganje SBctt ju erobern, nad)bem er 
in alien feinen Unternefymungen fo gtucfltcb geroefen roar, Alexander 
the Great had determined to conquer the whole world, because 
he had been so successful in all his undertakings. 

The first and second future correspond entirely to the English, 
except when, in English, the word " going," followed by the infini- 
tive, or the phrase " to have done," followed by the present parti- 
ciple, is used : in the former case of which the phrase, 3d) bin im 23es 
griff (I am going), followed by an infinitive, and in the latter case 
the phrase, 3$ bin ferrig (I have done), is used in German. 

Examples. 
3$ roerbe, or id) bin im 25egriff, ein @la$ SBein su trinfen, I am going to 

drink a glass of wine. 
3cb roollte, or id) roar im SSegriff, tym 2lKe$ ju fagen, aU er micb unterbrad), 

I was going to tell him every thing when he interrupted me. 
©ie ft'nb mit ber 2trbeit ferttg, They have done working. 
©ie roar mit bem ffialen ferttg, She had done painting. 

MOODS. 

The indicative mood is employed — 

If one speaks with an undoubted certainty, either positively or 
negatively; as, 

£>ie $naben ftieten, abet ft'e ft'nb nicbt artig, The bd^s are playing, but 

they are not well behaved. 
(Stner bee Septet* fyat ft'e beobac^tet, One of the masters has observed 

them. 
(£r roirb ft'e nacbfyer befrrafen, He will punish them afterwards. 

When the imperative is employed in English 3 as, 
£>u gefjft nid>t auS, fonbern arbeiteft, Do not go out, but work. 
2)u foil ft ntc^t ftreiten, fonbern rul)tg fenn, Do not fight, but be peaceable. 

The subjunctive expresses a possibility, condition, or doubt, also 
a wish or disgust. 

It is employed — 

After verbs or conjunctions which signify an uncertainty of suc- 
cess, or a condition. After the conjunctions bafj, bamit, roenn, roenn 
bod>, ate roenn, ob, obgletd), falls (im Sail), &c. ; and after verbs signi- 
fying request, wish, intention, hope, apprehension, condition, faith, 
or appearance. 



MOODS — THE SUBJUNCT1\ 175 

Examples. 
$3ir roerben itm bitten, ba$ er ju un$ fommc, We shall ask him to come 

to us. 
3cb anmfcbte, ba$ er ju ipaufe rodre, I wished that he might be at home. 
(*r fagte ctj mir in ber ^Ibftcbt, bafc id) eS roeiter libertegen mbge, He told 

me of it, with a view to my taking it into further consideration. 
34) t>offe, ba$ er fich pertfyeibigen roerbe, I hope that he will defend 

himself. 
(£r fling autf SSeforgnifj, bap er.ju fpdt fame, He went, for fear that he 

should come too late. 
<3ie tfyaten c$ unter ber s £ebingung, ba$ tnan fte gut bejafyle, They did it 

on condition that they should pay them well. 
3$ glaubte, bay ct e$ gctfyan babe, I believed that he had done it. 
<£$ fcf)eint inir, ati roenn ec tafenb mire, It appears to me as if he 

were mad. 

When speaking positively or negatively of ourselves or of 
others ; as, 

(£r erfldrte, er fyabe mir hie SBafyrfyeit gefagt, or ba$ er mir bk 3Baf>rf)ctt 
gefagt t^abe, He declared that he had told me the truth. 

£>te 3ucf>ter tterfiigten, er folfe fterben, or £)ie 9ucbter tferfugten, bafj er 
fterben folic, The judges decided that he should die. 

(£r glaubte nicbr, ba$ er Unrerfjt fyabe, He did not believe that he was 
wrong. 

When asserting or denying a thing absolutely, or when the pre- 
sent indicative precedes the conjunction, ba$ requires the indicative 
mood; as, 

(£r tterftcbert, ba$ er $ett fyat, or er fyat %eit, He declares that he has 

time, or he has time. 
(£r fagt, bafj er nicbt f cm men roill, He says that he will not come, 
or, (£r fagt, er roill ntd)t rommen, He says he will not come. 

When an imperfect, followed by the conjunction ba$ with any of 
the auxiliary verbs of tense or mood, is used, the present subjunctive 
is required, while the imperfect indicative would be used in English. 

Examples. 

£r bellagte ftd), ba$ er feine Arbeit liabe, He complained that he had 

no work. 
St bebauerte, ba$ er nicfyt reid) fei), He was sorry that he was not rich. 
(£r rotinfcbte, bap e$ Sftad)t roerbe, He wished it were night. 



176 SYNTAX. 

(£r fyoffte, bafj er balb jurttcffefjren moge, He hoped that he might re- 
turn soon. 

The present subjunctive is employed when a proposition has been 
made, the result of which is uncertain; but after indirect questions 
implying certainty, the indicative is used. 

Examples. 
3d) fragte bie £>ame, rote ml fte fur bie 2Irmen geben rootte, I asked the 

lady how much she would give for the poor. 
£)er Xpert fagte mir fo eben, ba$ er funf ^funb (Sterling geben mitt, That 

gentleman told me just now that he would give five pounds. 

The imperative is often used in English where the subjunctive is 
used in German when implying abstract ideas. 

Examples. 
£>er @ute moge tange teben ! or 9K6ge ber @ute tange (eben ! Let the good 

live long ! 
£er Ungtucfltdje t>er jctge ntcbt ! Let not the unfortunate despair ! 
Sebermann tiebe feinen ^dd)ften ati \id) fetbft ! Let every one love his 

neighbour as himself ! 
(£r fyanbte, rote er rootle ! Let him act as he likes ! 

The conditional is used — 

When a probability, but no certainty of granting a wish or request 
is implied : the sentence may, in this case, be expressed in two ways. 
Either the imperfect subjunctive may be used in the first part of 
the sentence, in which case the second part of the sentence also must 
contain an imperfect subjunctive ; or else, if the sentence be com- 
menced by roenn (if), with the pluperfect subjunctive, the second 
part must have the second conditional; but if the imperfect sub- 
junctive precede, with the conjunction rc>enn, the first conditional 
must be used in the second part. 

Examples. 
SSdre e£ mir mog(id) geroefen, fo fyatte id) ©ie getfern befudrt, Had it been 

possible, I should have visited you yesterday, 
or SEBenn e$ mir mog(td) geroefen roctre, fo rourbe id) @te geffern befud>t fyaben, 

If it had been possible, I should have visited you yesterday. 
£dtte id) je£t @etb genug, fo faufte id) mir einige 95ud)er, Had I money 

enough now, I would buy some books for myself, 
or SEBenn id) jefct @e(b genug fyatte, fo rourbe id) mir etnige 93tid>er faufen, 

If I had money enough now, I should buy some books for 

myself. 



MOODS — THE CONDITIONAL. 177 

SBdre id) unternchncnb, fo i?attc id) (^rfotg, Were I enterprising I might 

have success. 
or 5Benn id) untcrncbmenb rodre, fo roiirbe td> (frfofg fyaben, If I were 

enterprising I should have success. 
2Bdrc id) je$t bungria,, fo bite id) um 25robr,WereI hungry now I would 

ask for bread, 
or SOScrtn id) jeljt bungrtg roire, fo roiirbe icb um 23robt bitten, If I were 

hungry now I should ask for bread. 
$Bdre id) ju jpaufe gcroefen, fo bdrte er mid) gefeben, Had I been at home 

he might have seen me. 
or 3Benn id) ju jpaufe getoefen n\ire, fo roiirbe cr mid) gefcben fyaben, If I 

had been at home he would have seen me. 

In the following sentence two pluperfects or two second con- 
ditionals, with or without the conjunction roenn, are used. 

Examples. 
jpittc or mtr gefd)rteben, fo bdrte id) tfym geantroortet, Had he written to 

me I might have answered him. 
or, 5Benn er mtr gefcbrieben baben roiirbe, or SBurbe cr mtr gefcbrieben fyaben, 

fo roiirbe id) thn geantroortet baben, If he would have written to 

me I should have answered him. 

When a possibility is implied, the pluperfect subjunctive or the 
second conditional is followed by the pluperfect subjunctive with 
the conjunction rcenn. 

Example. 
3d) bdrte eS getban, I might have done it. 

or, 3d) rourbe e$ getban baben, roenn e£ mtr mogltd) gereefen ware, I should 
have done it if it had been possible. 

In case of impossibility, the pluperfect subjunctive is employed. 

Example. 

SBdren roir bocb fyduftger jufammen gefommen ! O, had we but met 

often er ! 
or, 3d) rounfdjfe, roir rodren bduftger uifammen gefommen ! I wished we had 

met more frequently ! 

If there be a mere probability, the present indicative is used in 
the first part of the sentence, with or without the conjunction roenn. 

Example. 
85ijt bu Hug, fo fycmbte Hug, or 2Bcnn bu ftug bift, (fo) banbte flug, Art 
thou clever, act cleverly. 



178 SYNTAX. 

The Imperative mood is employed — 

The second person singular is used in speaking to one person in 
very familiar conversation, or in commanding. 

Examples. 
@teb mit bod) cine Saffe Sttyee, Please give me a cup of tea. 
©et) gut unb fletjjig, Be good and industrious. 
£f)ue (bu) betne 2lrbeif, Do thy work. 

The second person plural, when speaking to more than one 
person. 

In addressing respectable persons, ©te, you, is used, and in speak- 
ing to boys, it)t is required. 

Examples. 
©ef)t cud) »ot, unb tdufd)t cud) ntcbt, Be (ye) cautious, and not mistaken. 
Sltbeitet unb Utct, Work and pray. 
'tdtafyttn ©tc mcinc SBorte, unb fyoren ©te, rca£ id) [age, Mind my words, 

and listen to what I say. 
©ctb tbr culjig ! Be (ye) quiet ! 

The third person singular. 

Example. 
2Bed)S(e et mir cincn Stealer, Change (he) me a thaler. 

The above is a German idiom, and is only used in addressing 
inferiors, as servants. 

The third person plural. 

Example. 
Sctffen ©ie fie bic 33ud)ct fjaben, Let (you) them have the books. 
%a$i or (aflfct (u;t) fie bk 2$ud>er fjaben, Let (ye) them have the books. 

Although the first of these sentences has the true form of the 
third person plural imperative, and the second that of the second 
plural imperative, yet both of them, when used with a capital letter, 
answer to the second imperative in English, viz, ye or you. 

The first person plural j as, 

1a§t or (affet un3 nidtfttevjagen, Let us not despair. 

The verb to let or permit, lafien, is also used in German — £a£ in 
the singular; Za$t or Safjet or 2affen ©te ung, Zafct eud), Safjt fie, in the 
plural. 



MOODS — THE INFINITIVE. 179 

The imperative frequently expresses a condition for accomplish- 
ing any thing. 

Examples. 
SBerbe geptiifr, fo nxtft bu (Srfafjruno, t;aben, or Benn bu gepruft rctrft, fo 
roitft bu <Stfal;tung fyctbcn, Be tried, and thou wilt have ex- 
perience. 
(&e\) rebhcb, fo roirb man bit ttauen, Be honest, and you will be 
trusted. 

The past participle is employed instead of the imperative when 
admonishing or commanding. 

Examples, 
Wat jugefyott, voa$ id> fage ! or jpott nur ju, roaS id) fage ! Do but listen 

to what I say ! 
^icbt fo Dtel gefptocfoen, ifyt $naben! or ©ptec&t nid)t fo »iel, itjr iTnaben! 

Do not speak so much, boys ! 

The second person present indicative is employed instead of the 
imperative in the second part of the sentence. 

Example. 

3d) fage bit, bu fommft balb jutucf, I tell you, come back soon. 

The infinitive mood can be employed with the preposition ju, 
or not. 

The infinitive is preceded by ju. 

After verbs which signify chance, necessity, obligation, exhorta- 
tion, command, request, permission, motive, advice, wish, or fear. 

Examples. 
&$ n>ate tneUeidtf moglid), tf>n ju fefyert, It might perhaps be possible to 

see him. 
£t ift notfjig, fpatfam ju fetjn, It is necessary to be economical. 
(£t tuHfngtc mid), e$ ju t&un, He obliged me to do it. 
3d) vwcbt 3l)ncn nid)t ettauben, ba& s £ud) ju fefen, I will not suffer you 

to read that book. 
(£r etmafjnte fie, folgfam ju fei;n, He admonished them to be obedient. 
3d) bcfetjte 3f>nen, nid)t ju teben, I command you not to speak. 
St bat itjrt, ju jpaufe ju bk'iben, He requested him to remain at home. 
(Srlaubcn Sic mit, ©te ju befud)en, Permit me to visit you. 
3d; fyatte <Betanlaffung, tyn &u beflrafen, I had a motive for punishing 

him. 

n 2 



180 SYNTAX. 

Jgctben ©te ©tunbe, ifyn ju t>erttjctbigcn ? Have you reasons to defend 

him? 
SRatfyen ©ie tf>m, bte %jnet ju etnjunefymen, Advise him to take the 

medicine. 
£r roimfd)te rmcfc ju f)6ten, He wished to hear me. 
(£t furd>tetc ftd>, ju mir ju femmert, He was afraid of coming to me. 

When the verb is used in the active voice. 

Example. 
T)ie$ iff fcfyroet auSjufufyten, This is difficult to accomplish. 

After nouns expressing desire, pleasure, or courage. 

Examples. 
(£t fycttte feine £uft ju atbeiten, He did not wish to work. 
i£$ geroctytt mir $ergmtgen> <5ie ju fefyen, It gives me pleasure to see 

you. 
£Xe ©otbaten fatten Oftutfy, gegen ben $etnb ju fdmpfen, The soldiers had 

courage to fight against the enemy. 

After adjectives which signify inclination, possibility, easiness, 
curiosity, desire, readiness, or joy. 

Examples. 
(St if! geneigt, frci ju urtfyetfen, He is inclined to judge freely. 
(£s roar nur fur tfyn mogtid), Srfotg ju Ijaben, It was only possible for 

him to succeed. 
<&$ ift teid)t ju begrcifen, It is to be easily comprehended. 
(£r ift neugtertg, $rembe ju fefyen, He is curious to see strangers. 
<Ste ft'nb Me begtertg ju fyoten, roeltyen (Srfolg id) fyaben roerbe, They are 

all anxious to hear what success I shall have. 
JDa$ ©efinbe ift oft md)t nxtfig su atbetten unb ju gefyotdjen, Servants 'are 

often not ready to work and to obey. 

After the auxiliary verbs fetjn or fyaben, if the infinitives are pre- 
ceded either by a noun or an adverb. 

Examples. 
©te fyaben tnele @efd)dfte ju befotgen, You have much business to 

attend to. 
(St fyatte "ifticbtS ju tferlteren, He had nothing to lose. 
(£$ ift faum ju glauben, It is hardly to be believed. 
2£a$ ift ju tfyun ? What is to be done ? 



MOODS — THE INFINITIVE. 181 

When the conjunction urn, in order, is followed by ju with the 
infinitive, it expresses a purpose or design more strongly. 

Examples. 

(£r gab ba$@elb jurucf, um Sfynen fetne &)t\id)Hit ju bercetfen, He gave the 
money back in order to prove his honesty to you. 

(Er betrog 2lnbere, um rctd> ju roerben, He deceived others in order to 
grow rich. 

After the adverbs ofyne or anflatt. 

Examples. 
£r i)at fid) fc!>r bemubt, obne (Erfolg ju fjaben, He has exerted himself 

much without having success, 
ftebe, anjratt ju fd>roeigen, Speak, instead of being silent. 

The infinitive is not used with ju 

After verbs which express judgment, assertion, approval, or wish ; 
in which case ju is expressed by the preposition fur (for), or by the 
conjunction ka$ (that). 

Examples. 
C£r fydlt ifyn fur einen recbtfcfjaffencn "Warm, He judges him to be an 

honest man. 
SCir fytelten u)n fur einen ©d>uru?n, We thought him to be a scoundrel. 
(Er roupte, ba$ er anberer 9ftetnung fet), He knew him to be of another 

opinion. 
SttefeS beroeift, ba$ er 3fted)t t?at, This proves him to be right. 
3d) glaube, ba$ er glucn'tcb ift, I believe him to be happy. 

After the following pronouns, adverbs, and conjunctions, roatf, 
what; rocm, to whom ; roie, how; roof)in, whereto ; n>ejjl;alb, where- 
fore, preceded by the verbs roiffen, to know ; fagen, to say. 

Examples. 

(Er fagte mir, roa£ id) n)un folt, He told me what to do. 
(Er roetfj, rcem tcb trauen fann, He knows w r hom I may trust. 
(Er rceip, roie er fid) betragen fed, He knows how to behave. 
(Er jetgte mir, roobtn id) gefyen foil, He showed me where to go. 
(Er fagte mir, roepMb ic& fcbreiben folt, He told me why I should write. 
JBollen ©ie mir fagen, wo id) einen Jufyrer fi'nben fann ? Will you tell me 
where I can find a guide ? 

After the auxiliary verbs of mood or tense, when followed by an 
infinitive, it forms the future. 



182 SYNTAX. 

Examples. 

<£t fonnte rceber roctncn, nod) (ac^en, He could neither weep nor 

laugh. 
©ie fonnen e$ ffyun, You may do it. 
©ie muflen bafyin gefyen, You must go there. 
Saffen ©ie ifyn gefyen, Let him go. 
SBit reetben tym gefyotdjen, We shall obey him. 
(£t roitb ju ftiif) fommen, He will come too early. 

After verbs which express the faculties of seeing, hearing, and 
of perceiving in general. 

Examples, 
3d> \)ktc ii)\\ lefen unb fpielen, unb et faf> mid> fc^vetben, I heard him 
read (reading) and play (playing), and he saw me write 
(writing). 
SBic gotten fie ft'ngen, We heard them sing. 

After any passive voice, to be is expressed by fatten. 

Examples. 
Die 25ud>et fotten in baS dimmer gebtad>t rcetben, The books are to be 
brought to the room. 

After the verbs (etnen, to learn; fefyen, to see; (efyten, to teach; 
fyoten, to hear; fyelfen, to help; tyeijjen, to bid ; fufyten, to feel. 

Examples. 
2Btr (ernten jeidmen, We learned drawing. 
<£t \ai) unS fpielen, He saw us playing. 
£t lefjtte mid; fed)ten, He taught me fencing. 
©ie Morten micb rufen, They heard me call. 
SBir fjatfen tynen arbetien, We assisted them in working. 
3d) fyei£e ©ie gefyen, I bid you go. 
3d) futjtte mein iperj fd)lagen, I felt my heart beating. 

If any of these verbs are used with the auxiliary verb fyaben, pre- 
ceded by an infinitive, the past participles of those verbs which 
stand at the end of the sentence are changed into infinitives when 
the past participle' would be employed in English. 

Examples. 
(£t i)at unS fpielen fefyen, He has seen us playing (play), 
©ie fyahm ifyn tufen fjoren, You have heard him calling (call). 



MOODS — THE INFINITIVE. 183 

In order to avoid mistakes, the following examples should be 
carefully examined: 

3$ fa() inn taufen, is in English, I saw him baptizing. 
3$ fafy tfjn taufen, I saw him being baptized. 

The latter sentence is better to be expressed in German by, 

3* fab ibn getauft roerben, I saw him being baptized. 

or 3* fab, ba$ et getauft rourbe, I saw that he was baptized. 

After the verbs auSfabren, to drive; gebert, to go, to walk; fegen, 
to lay, to put; nennen, to call; teiten, to ride, the infinitive is em- 
ployed where the present participle would be used in English. 

Examples. 
©ie fubren auS, or ©ie fufyren fpafjieren, They went out driving. 
©ie gingen au$, or ©ie gtngen fpa^ieren, They went out walking. 
€$ ge^en in bonbon tuele 3uben tjaufiren, In London there are many 

Jews going hawking. 
Nennen ©ie ba$ trinfen ? Do you call that drinking? 
9)torgen roerben nnr auSreiten, or Worgen roerben rotr fpa^teren reiten, We 

shall go out riding to-morrow. 

2afjen, to let, to make, or to suffer, is always employed in those 
cases when in English the verb to make expresses a command. 

3cf) Uep ibn bie ©eite jum jroeiten 9)tate febreiben, I made him write that 

page a second time. 
Saffen ©ie ibn ain>get;en, um papier ju b;oten, Make him go out to fetch 

the paper. 

When the infinitive with the preposition to is used in English, 
the infinitive with the neuter article is used in German. In that 
case the infinitive is considered a noun. 

T>a$ ©eben rourbe mir farcer, It was difficult for me to walk. 

T)a$ $x'obacbten unferer ^flicbt ift fcfyroierig, It is difficult to observe our 

duties. 
£>a$ Sefen guter 35ucber ift lefjrreid), To read good books is instructive. 

PARTICIPLES. 

The Present Participle. 
The present participle is either active or neutral. It is generally 
used as an adverb; but when the syllables e, er, oretf, are added to it, 
it is declined as an adjective. 



184 SYNTAX. 

Examples. 
£>er trotfcnbe @ebcmfe, The consoling thought. 
€in rotfenber ©tetn, A rolling stone. 
25rutfenbe 26n>inn, Roaring lioness. 
(£tn fyielenbeS ^ndbletn, A playing little boy. 

This participle governs either the dative or the accusative, which 
always precede. It has no degrees of comparison. 

Examples. 
£)er mir folgenbe ipunb, The dog that follows me. 
or (£in mir folgenber jpunb, A dog that follows me. 
2)ie mtr erfdjeinenbe ©eftalt, The form which appears to me. 
£>er un$ errcartenbe Ofyetm, The uncle who expects us. 
£>a$ un$ tdufcfrenbe (Mb, The gold which deceives one. 

Some adjectives end in enb which are not participles ; as, an= 
mafsenb, arrogant; anjiebenb, attractive; etnfeucbtenb, clear; erf;e= 
benb, elevating, exalting; fytnrei£enb, overpowering; unbebeutenb, 
trifling, insignificant; tt-wfyenb, furious, raving, &c. 

Examples. 
Sunge Seute ftnb oft anmafjenb, Young men are often arrogant. 
£)ie Unterfjaltuno, n>ar an&iebenb, The conversation was attractive, 
©eine SBorte n?aren einleucbtenb, His words were clear, 
©ein ©efano, roar erfyebenb, His singing was elevating. 
3fyre ©timme ift f)inret^enb, Her voice is overpowering. 
9ttetne ©cfymerjen ftnb unbcbcutenb, My pain is trifling. 
JDte Ziqm ftnb routfjenb, Tigers are furious. 

The above admit the comparative and superlative degrees. 

Examples. 

©eme Unterfyattuno, n>ar anjiefcenber, afe bte fcine^ betters, His conver- 
sation was more attractive than that of his cousin. 

34) f)6rte ben erfyebenbften ©efcmg, I heard the most exalting hymn 
(song). 

£)er ©tester era,o£ ftcb in bie erfyebenbften ©efufcte, The poet displayed the 
most elevating sentiments. 

When this participle expresses cause or reason, the conjunctions 
tnbem, ba, roetf, roenn, are used in its stead with their respective tenses. 
The relative pronoun roelcbet is also used. In English the present 
participle is used instead of these conjunctions. 



PARTICIPLES. 185 

Examples. 

3nbem rotr fo fefren jufammen trcffen, fo muffen rotr befto haunter fcbrcik'n, 

Having met so seldom we must write the more frequently. 
£)a rotr @elb baben, fo rotrb bte Unternebmung Icid>r fur un$ recrben, Being 

in possession of money the undertaking will he easy for us. 
SEBal ich ©ie nicbt genau gefannr babe, fo n>irb 3bncn mein 25etraa,en nicbt 

auffallen, Not having been intimately acquainted with you my 

behaviour will not offend you. 
SSenn rotr oorftcfmo, fortfehrciton, fo reerben rotr unferen SBecj nicftf oerfer,Ien, 

Proceeding cautiously, we shall not lose our way. 
(£in SIrbciter, roeltfjer feine Arbeit rernad)laf|TQf, barf fetnen £ob,n erroarten, 

A workman neglecting his work cannot expect any wages. 

Where the present participle is preceded by the preposition 
upon in English, the preposition auf, upon, with the adverb ba, 
forming the compound barauf, is used in German. In this case 
the subject and the infinitive, or the conjunction ba$ with the 
present subjunctive follow the preposition instead of the 
participle. 

Example. 
3<f> befyarre barauf, 3fyte timing ju fyoren, or 3* befyarrc barauf, ba$ icf> 
3fyre 9ttetnuna, b;6re, I insist upon hearing your opinion. 

When the subject of the participle differs from the meaning of 
the verb, the conjunction ba$ can only be used. 

Examples. 

3«i) before barauf, ba$ ©ie nicbt auSgefyen, I insist upon your not going 
out. 

3$ bejrebe barauf, ba§ <5ie ni jpaufe bletben, I insist upon your re- 
maining at home. 

When the present participle is used in English to express habitual 
action, the same participle is used as a noun, preceded by the de- 
finite article in German. 

Examples. 
£)er (Scbretbenbe, or £>te (Sd)rctbenbe, One who writes. 
2)ie Spielenben geroanrten tfiel ©elb, Those who were gambling won 
much money. 

It expresses entreaty or meditation, in winch case the real form 
of the participle is used. 



186 SYNTAX. 

Examples. 
SSittenb mfucBfe et mein ^fttttetb §u ertegen, Entreating he tried to raise 

my compassion. 
(£t ging nacfybenfenb im dimmer umfyer, He walked about the room 

meditating. 

Complete sentences may be contracted by the use of the present 
participle, when referring to but one subject for the sake of 
emphasis. 

Examples. 
3nbem er fcine 21ugen gen jptmmel er&ob, rief ct au$, While he raised his 

eyes to heaven he exclaimed, 
or, ©etne 2lugen gen ipimmel etfyebenb, ricf et au$, Lifting his eyes up 
to heaven, he exclaimed. 

The definite article neuter is always used in German with in- 
finitives resembling nouns, in those cases where the present parti- 
ciple would be used without the article in English. 

Example. 
£)a$ £anjen ift eme gro$e ^clufttgung, Dancing is a great amusement. 

Infinitives resembling nouns are always preceded by a preposi- 
tion in German, where the present participle preceded by a prepo- 
sition would be used in English. 

Example. 
3Btt unterfyielten un$ bur$ £efen, We entertained ourselves by reading. 

THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 

The past participle is used to form the compound tenses referring 
to the past, and also to the passive voice. 

It is employed as an adjective with the definite, the indefinite, 
and without an article admitting comparison. 

Examples. 

£)er (or etn) fefyt gefutcbtete (er) Selbfyetr gerocmn bte ©cblatf>t, The (a) 
much feared general gained the battle. 

£He (or eine) tterlorene <Sd)ad)te( rcutbe rcaebetgefunben, The (a) lost band- 
box was found again. 

2>aS (or ein) aufgeregte (es) $3olf tterad)tete bte @efe§e beS £anbe$ or 
£<mbeSgefe§e, The (a) agitated people despised the laws of the 
country. 



PARTICIPLES. 



187 



3cf> t)nbe niemati eine gepriefenere ©cfcaufptelerin gefcort, I have never 
heard a more celebrated actress. 

The present or the past participle may be preceded by a noun 
which is governed by a preposition with an accusative or dative, 
both in the active and passive voice. The passive voice does not 
admit a noun which is governed by an accusative. 

Examples. 
£)er in ben ©arten (aufenbe ipafc rotrb gefangen roerben, That hare which 

is running into the garden will be caught, 
or, £)er in bem ©arten (aufenbe Jpafe i\t fefyr jung, That hare which is 

running in the garden is very young. 
£)er in ben ©arten getaufene ipafc ift gefangen roorben, The hare which 

had been running into the garden is caught. 

When the nominative denotes the object of the passive voice, 
which is not capable of an action, the present participle is used in- 
stead of the past in English ; but in this case the present or imper- 
fect tense of the passive voice is employed in German. 

Examples. 
£)te £anbfrf)rift rcirb gebrucft, The manuscript is printing. 
T)a rourbe etn JpauS gebaut, There was a house building. 

When an action, which is already passed, is alluded to with re- 
ference to one about to be commenced, the sentence is divided into 
two parts, the first of which begins with bo. or nadjbem, and the 
second with fo. 

Examples. 
^acbbem icf> meine 51nge(egen()eiten in Orbnung gebracfyt fyatte, fo retfte tch 
auf ba$ £anb, Having settled my affairs I set off for the country. 
£)a ich ^Irjnet genommen fyabe, fo roerbe id> fyeute &u jpaufe b(ciben, Having 

taken physic I shall remain at home to-day. 
£>a bao $tnb fur feinen Ungefjorfam beftraft roorben nxtr, fo befd)(o$ e£, ftcb 
beffer ju betragen, The child having been punished for its dis- 
obedience resolved to behave better. 

Some adjectives have the same ending as the past participles; 
as, angeboren, hereditary; angelegen, important; befannt, known ; er= 
geben, addicted to, devoted to ; errounfcfyr, desirable ; gercarfjfen, equal 
in strength ; geroogen, condescending ; unerroartet, unexpected ; unrer= 
fyoffr, unhoped for; perbunben, obliged; befugt, entitled; benotfytgt, 



188 SYNTAX. 

needful ; beroufjt, conscious ; serrucff, deranged ; rotfffommen, wel- 
come ; geroanbr, nimble, and many others. 

It sometimes is employed to shew strength or weariness of mind. 
Examples. 
£>ur$ bte gute ©ache angefeuerr, writer* ber bra»?e ©olbat feinen Wlutf) 
nifyt, Being animated by the good cause the brave soldier does 
not lose his courage. 
2)em Setter ergeben, t>erie£t man bie i?ei(igften ^fltdjten, Being addicted 
to vice the most sacred duties are violated. 

The past participle may be changed into the third singular pre- 
sent indicative by the conjunction roenn, if. 

Example. 
2£enn man bem Safler ergeben ift, (fo) mle£t man bie fyetUgfren ^fltdrten, 
If one be addicted to vice the most sacred duties are violated. 

Some neuter verbs express motion ; in which case the verb fom= 
men precedes their past participle, while the present participle would 
be used in English. 

Examples. 

©ie fommen gegangen, They come walking. 

(£r fam geftolpert, He came stumbling. 

£He $ftatrofen famen gefegelf, The sailors came sailing. 

£>a$ 9Kdbd)en fommt getanjt, The girl comes dancing. 

©te fommen gefrodjen, They come creeping. 

2>er 23ogel fommt gefktttert, The bird comes fluttering. 

THE FUTURE PARTICIPLE. 

This participle, like the two former ones, possesses the qualities 
both of noun and verb, and is therefore neither a tense or mood, 
but forms a medium between both. This participle expresses a 
compulsion or necessity, corresponding to the future in the passive 
voice. Its form is that of the present participle when used as an 
adjective preceded by the preposition ju. 

Examples. 
£>te $u erroartertbe Stfyeurung rotrb burd) roeife $k$regetn wrfytnbert roerben, 

The famine to be expected will be prevented by wise measures. 
(£tne un$ ju gerodfyrenbe ^reube fofl un$ tffluti) fur ba$ 2eben geben, A joy 

to be granted to us may give us courage for life. 
SHe &u ertragenben £etben beffern un$ fyduftg, Suffering to be endured 

corrects us frequently. 



( 189 ) 

§ 4. THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE GERMAN 
LANGUAGE. 

A. Principal sentences which agree with the English. 

Principal sentences are such as require no further explanation to 
be understood. 

To the formation of a principal sentence there belong the three 
following particulars : 

1. The subject, referring to either the persons or matters to be 

explained. 

2. The jn-edicate, explaining the subject ; and, 

3. The copula, or a connecting verb, which is usually an auxi- 

liary verb, by which the sentence is finished. 

Principal sentences are exhibited in the following examples : 

a. When the copula is followed by an adjective or adverb ; as, 

Die 2Befte iff roth, The waistcoat is red. 
Der Stifcfc ift niebrtg, The table is low. 
DaS £(etb ift cjrun, The dress is green. 

b. When the copula or verb explains the subject sufficiently, there 

is no predicate required, which is the case when neuter verbs 
are used not admitting either object or predicate ; as, 

Die Siefyrfhmbe enbet, The lesson ends. 
Die 936^1 fue^en, The birds fly. 
DaS Seuet brennt, The fire burns. 

c. When the copula or verb does not explain the subject, the 

predicate is required in the form of a noun, an adjective or an 
adverb, an infinitive mood, a past participle, or a preposi- 
tion ; as, 

Die ©pinne i\t ein Snfeft, The spider is an insect. 

Der <Sped)t i\t ein ^Bocjet, The woodpecker is a bird. 

%)a$ ©cfb ift ein pintail, Gold is a metal. 

Der Sucfo ifi lifruj, The fox is artful. 

(£r fyat gefebrteben, He has been writing. 

©ie ftnb gelaufen, They have been running. 

Der 25ofe foil roarten, The messenger shall wait. 

Der tylonb gefyt auf, The moon rises. 

3cb n>erbe beobacbtet, I am observed. 

©ie roerben geacfjtet, They are esteemed. 



190 SYNTAX. 

B. In the construction of such sentences as do not have the 
German agreeing with the English the principal rule to be 
observed is, that participles or infinitives are always to be 
placed at the end of the sentence. 

a. The subject, copula, and predicate govern the following 

sentences : 

£>te @ebid)tc ft'nb unterfyctltenb geroefen, The poems have been enter- 
taining. 
£>ctS $eft roirb cmgenefym fev>n, The feast will be agreeable. 
£>a$ $inb tyat gut gelernt, The child has learned well. 
£>ie Gutter tft gefunb geroorben, The mother has recovered. 
(Er roirb t>otftd>tig geroefen fei>n, He will have been cautious. 
©ie finb ruf)tg geblieben, They have remained quiet. 

b. When there are two participles used, that of the auxiliary verb 

stands last ; and if there should be an infinitive in connection 
with them (as in compound futures or conditionals), the infi- 
nitive stands at the end ; as, 

£>er 3Irjt ift gcfyolt roorben, The physician has been sent for. 
JDte £rnte roirb beenbtgt roorben fetjn, The harvest will have been 
finished. 

When the past participle of the auxiliary verb roerben, to become, 
is used with a past participle of a passive verb, the prefix ge is 
omitted, as the above examples will explain. 

c. When an object is added to the subject and copula, the former is 

employed instead of the predicate, and may be used in the 
accusative, dative, or genitive cases, whatever case may be 
governed by the predicate or verb. 

Examples. 

£)er ©artner verfauft Obft, The gardener sells fruit. 

2eonibct$ fdjrecfte bic ^erfer, Leonidas terrified the Persians. 

(Etcero fyat ctuSgqeicbnete 25rtefe gefcfyrieben, Cicero has written excel- 
lent epistles. 

£)er 2croe fud)t 23cutc, The lion seeks prey. 

©te roerben gleifcfo efien, They will eat meat. 

£>er 5SogeI roar bcm $dftd> entffattett, The bird had fluttered from 
the cage. 

(£r rourbe feine^ (MbeS beraubt, He was robbed of his money. 

£)er £>iener roirb ©tdfer brtngen, The valet will bring glasses. 



CONSTRUCTION OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 191 

d. Sentences consisting of two nouns require the personal noun to 

be placed before the impersonal ones. 

Examples. 

£>te Schavfter retcbt tfn*em SBruber cine SMiune, The sister hands a 
flower to her brother. 

£)et 53ater rotrb feinem Sobne ba$ @e(b rerrceigevn, The father will re- 
fuse the money to his son. 

£)et 93ormunb ubergab ben Stemben bet ^olijeibe^otbe, The guardian 
delivered the stranger to the chief office of police. 

£>et ©panter tiaqte ben 3tahenet beg 9)?otbeg an, The Spaniard ac- 
cused the Italian of murder. 

e. The accusative of two personal nouns is placed before the 

dative. 

Examples. 
2)ie £(tern serttauen tfyte ©efyne bem Stjte^er an, The parents trust 

their sons to the tutor. 
£>ie Untertbanen etcjaben ft'rf) tfytem $6mg, The subjects submitted 
to their King. 

f. The dative or accusative case of personal pronouns precede every 

other case when there is only one pronoun in the sentence. 

Examples. 
3<f> rcerbe 3fynen ba$ (Mb cjeben, I shall give you the money. 
<Sr fyat mit ein 25ud) gegeben, He has given me a book. 
3cb tterroeia,erte ifyt bte 25ttte, I refused her her request. 
JDte ^id)te ?etf;ef)(te eg tfyrer Xante, The niece concealed it from her 
aunt. 

g. The accusative of personal pronouns precede the genitive or 

dative. 

Examples. 
(£r erinnette ft'd> meiner, He recollected me. 
©ie fcbdmte fid) feiner, She was ashamed of him. 
5Bir rcerben ung ibnen anmtrauen, We shall confide in you. 
<5tc gaben ft'e (bie SBtumen) ifyr, They gave them (i. e. the flowers) 

to her. 
93erjeil;en <5te eg mir, Pardon me for it. 
(£t fyat e^ 3f)nen tterjiefyen, He has pardoned you for it. 

h. Adverbs of time precede the object. 

Examples. 
3* werbe movgen meinen Smmb bejucben, I shall visit my friend to- 
morrow. 



192 SYNTAX. 

3& fyabe geftern meinen ©djncibet bejafytt, I have paid my tailor 
yesterday. 

i. When adverbs both of time and place, or nouns referring to place, 
occur in a sentence, the former precedes the latter. 

Examples. 
$Kein Oljeim rear geffetn fuer, My uncle was here yesterday. 
3cf) rcerbe morgen bafytn gefyen, I shall go there to morrow. 
<£t ift btefen Bergen nacf) Berlin gereift, He has gone to Berlin this 

morning. 
3$ bin bicfen 2Ibenb in bonbon angefommen, I arrived in London 

this evening. 

j. When nouns are preceded by prepositions referring to former 
times, the preposition is placed before the nouns. 

Examples. 
3<f> roar t>ot jroci Safyten in Stalien, I was in Italy two years 

ago. 
£)ie SBelt hat ror »ic(en 3af)t!)unbcttcn beftanben, The world has existed 

many centuries. 
<£r ift feit brei Stagen abgereijt, He departed three days since. 

k. When adverbs of time, or nouns expressing time, preceded by 
prepositions, are employed in a sentence, either of them is 
placed before any other noun, with or without prepositions. 

Examples. 

3cb fyabe fyeute <ftad?rid)ten t?on metnet <Ed>roejfer etfyalten, I have re- 
ceived news from my sister to-day. 

(£r n>itb in etnigen ©runben bie 25ud>et an fetnen 25ud>bdnbler febitfen, 
He will send the books to his bookseller in a few hours.* 

I. Adverbs of place or time may follow or precede the dative or 
accusative. 

Examples. 

(£r folgfe bem $Ranne ubevatt nacfy, He followed the man every- 
where. 

£aben ©ic 3fyren Sreunb ttgenbroo gefunben ? Did you find your 
friend anywhere ? 

The construction of these and similar sentences correspond to 
the En dish. 



CONSTRUCTION OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 1!»> 

7)1. Adverbs are always placed immediately after the verb. 

Examples. 

St fycit fcduftg $opfn>ef), or $opf [inner jcn, He frequently has the 

headache. 
<£t \)at ntemate (in fetnem ©efdjdfr) gefefylt, He never has failed in 

business. 

n. Many other adverbs are placed immediately before the infinitive 
or participle. 

3d) rcetbe <2ie motgen gennp etrcatten, I shall expect you certainly 

to-morrow. 
Weine $inbct fotten fjeutc auSgeben, My children shall go out to-day. 
3d) fyabe e$ n>itftid> gecjtaubt, I have really believed it. 
jpaben ©te micb sotfyet gefefyen? Have you* seen me before ? 

o. When a sentence is constructed in such a manner as that altering 
the position of the words produces a different effect, such a 
sentence may be changed to the utmost. 
The following sentence exemplifies these various changes. 

£>et ©dttnet fyotte tdg(itf) auS bem ©atten SMumen fyetauS, The gardener 

fetched flowers out of the garden daily. 
£olte ber ©dttnet tdglicf) SMumen au$ bem 

©atten fyetauS? 
Zacfiid) fyotte bet ©dttnet 25lumen au$ bem 

©atten fyetaug, 
2uiS bem ©atten fjolte bet ©dttnet tdgttd) 

35lumen fyetauS, 
<£$ fyotte bet ©attnet tdgttd) au$ bem ©atten 

2Mumen fyetauS, 
£etauS auS bem ©atten fyotte bet ©dttnet 

tdglicb SMumen, 
^tumen fyotte bit &ktmt tdgtich cuts bem 

©atten fyetauS, 
©dttnet, \)ole et tdgUcfr SMumen au$ bem 

©atten fyetauS, 

p. When in English the negative adverb, not, is followed by the 
adverb yet, it is expressed by nod) nid>t, yet not, in German, 
which are never separated. 

Examples. 
3d) babe ncch nicht beenbtgt, I have not yet finished. 



Gardener, you niaj' 
fetch flowers out of 
the garden daily. 



194 SYNTAX. 

©tnb ©ie nod) nid)t bet bem s £u$binbet geroefen ? Have you not been 
to the bookbinder yet ? 

q. When the negative adverb nid)t renders the sentence only appa- 
rently negative, it precedes those words which are partly 
negative. In this case it never precedes the participle or 
infinitive. 

Examples. 
SEBit rcetben md>t sot fyeute 3ibenb jutudfefyten, We shall not return 

before this evening. 
3d) rcetbe nid)t ftuf) aufftefyen, I shall not rise early. 
(£t fyat nid)t alle feine gteunbe gefctjen, He has not seen all his 
friends. 

r. When one or more words are placed before the personal pro- 
noun, or before the noun with the verb, the verb is placed 
before the pronoun or noun, which is called an inverted po- 
sition. It takes place — 
When the pronoun and the verb are placed at the beginning of 
the sentence. 

Examples. 
3Hettetd)t ift et nic^t roof)t, Perhaps he is not well, 
jpeute bin id) fef)t befd)dftigt, To-day I am very much occupied. 
93ot etnigen 28od>en befud)te id) einen Srcmjofen, A few weeks ago I 

visited a Frenchman. 
$Son ganjem jpetjen n>unfd)e id) 3(>nen (Stfofg, With all my heart I 

wish success to you. 
9hm ift 3&te gveunbtnn, bie ©rdftnn, ju jpaufe, Now your friend, the 
countess, is at home. 

The inversion takes place twice (i. e. in the first and in the second 
part of the sentence), when the conjunction n>enn, if, is not, ex- 
pressed in the first part. 

Examples. 

3fagnet e$ nid)t, (or 9Benn e$ nidji tegnet), fo megen ©ie mid) etrcatten, 

If it does not rain, you may expect me. 
£>dtte id) ©etegenfyett, (or 2Benn ic^ ©elegenfyett fydtfe), fo rourbe id; U)n 

frctgen, If I had opportunity, I should ask him. 

When speaking of others, or when judging of persons or things, 
the pronoun or noun referring to the speaker is used in an inverted 
position. 



CONSTRUCTION OF THE GERMAN LANGl W.K. 195 

Examples, 

^ut (Etner, fagte er, f>at ben Spteid gerconnen, Only one, said he, has 

won the prize. 
£>et 9tfann, erflarre ber £Rid>ter, ift unfc&ulbig, That man, said tlie 

judge, is innocent. 
X)a$ 93ik&, gtaube ic&, if* gut gefcfyrteben, That book, I believe, is well 

written. 

All the foregoing sentences are called principal sentences, as they 
do not require any farther explanation, nor a conjunction. 

C. Dependent or subordinate sentences are such as cannot 
be understood without a farther explanation, and which 
are formed with a conjunction either in the first or the 
second part of the sentence. 

a. When a sentence begins with any of those conjunctions which 

are marked in the list as removing the verb to the end of tlu* 
sentence (and in compound tenses the auxiliary verb), the in- 
version takes place in the second part, which is always a prin- 
cipal one, and begins with fo, (which is not expressed in 
English). 

Examples. 

2tt$ SlugujtuS romifcfrer $aifer roar, fo tour be GtyriftuS geboren, When 

Augustus was Roman Emperor, Christ was born. 
Sfficnn it ©teben fd>ldgt, fo ift e£ pett, When it strikes seven it will 

be time. 
s )?acbbem bcc ©eeroeg natf) Snbten gefunben rootben roar, fo rciftc man 

roemgev ju 2anb, After the sea-passage to India had been found, 

one travelled less by land, 
©obatb Scrufalem erobert roorben uw, fo gtngen tfiele ^tlget nacb jnaufe, 

As soon as Jerusalem had been conquered many palmers 

went home. 
5£cnn e$ Sett ijt, fo roerbe td> gu 3fynen fommen, When it is time I 

shall come to you. 

b. When a compound sentence begins with a principal sentence, 

the inversion does not take place, but the verb is removed to 
the end by a conjunction. 

Examples. 
£)er £cmpel bet ©tana oerbrannte, aU SUeranbet geboren toutbe, The 
temple of Diana was burnt down when Alexander was 
born. 

o2 



196 SYNTAX. 

SDie ©ocmiet entbecften 5lmetifa, rcctytenb bte ^ottugtefen ben ©eeroeg 
narf) £snbien fanben, The Spaniards discovered America, whilst 
the Portuguese found the sea-passage to India. 

The following conjunctions remove the verb to the end of the 
sentence ; as, ate, auf ba§, besot, bis, ba, bamit, ba$, efye, fail$, je, je 
nadjbem, tnbem, in fo fern, in rote fern, (not when used interrogatively), 
nacbbem, mm, ob, obgtetd), obfc^on, obvooty, ob=aud>, feitbem, una,ead>tet, 
nxtytenb, n>et(, roenn, (roennmtdtf, rcenmgleicb), rcie, (rote=aud>), roieroofyl, rco, 
roofetn, ob=jn>at. 

c. When any of these conjunctions begin the sentence, the accusa- 

tive or dative of the personal pronoun precedes the subject. 

Examples. 
©obatb ifyn bcv $6nta, antebefe, fonnfe et ntdtf cmtrootten, When the 

king addressed him he was not able to answer. 
<£f)e i&m ber fdtief ge&etgf routbe, roat et roof>t, Before the letter was 

shewn to him he was well. 

d. When a sentence begins with any of the conjunctions, and is 

used interrogatively, the inversion does not take place in the 
second part of the sentence, and the word fo is not em- 
ployed. 

Example. 

SBenn trf> ffei§ig bin, roetben ©te nut ein 2mcb faufen ? If I am indus- 
trious will you buy me a book ? 

e. When any of these adverbial conjunctions are used in the second 

part of the sentence the inversion takes place. 

Examples. 
©te finb tetd) ; mitfyin fyaben @ie (Stnfmp, You are rich, consequently 

you have influence. 
<S$ frfmett ; bctfyet rcetben wit f?ier bleiben, It snows, therefore we shall 

remain here. 

The following are adverbial conjunctions ; as, alfo, aufjetbem, bofyzi, 
bann, batum, bemnad), bennod), be£gleid)en, befto, anbtetfeits, etnetfeits, 
enbUd), fetnet, folajicb, gleicfcroofyl, f>etna$, nad>f)et, jebod), tnbeffen (inbejO, 
inajetcben (rarely used), in fo fetn (in fo rcett), in true fetn, faum, mitfun, 
nicbt altein, nut, btojj, fonbetn aucb, no$, nut, fonjt, tyeik — tfjeite, ubrigens, 
ubetbieS, melmefyt, jubem, jn>at. They require a semicolon (;) instead 
of a comma (,) before them when they begin the second part of a 
sentence. 



CONSTRUCTION OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 197 

f. The relative pronouns ber, roelcber, also roatf, tver, rcaS fur ein, re- 

move the verb (and in compound tenses the auxiliary) to the 
end of the sentence. 

Examines. 
<£$ ift berfctbe 3ftocf, ben Ste gcftevn rauften, It is the same coat (that) 

you bought yesterday. 
(£s roar biefelbc Stau, bie fo eben roe^egangen iff, It was the same 

woman who is gone away just now. 
£>er, roekfier e$ mtr fagte, ift ein Stmetifanet, He who told me is an 

American. 
3dE> erfytett einen 23rief oon meinem s £ruber, oon bem id) feit tanger Beit 

^tcht^ cjcf?6rt tjatte, I received a letter from my brother, of whom 

I had not heard for a long time. 
€uropa ift ber SBelttfyetl, von bem bie ©efdj)td)tfd)reiber am meijten facjen, 

Europe is that part of the world of which historians say most. 
£r \)at mtr gefagt, toa$ id) tf)un foil, He has told me what I am to do. 
3d) roetjj, rcer ba£ ^ferb fatifcn roirb, I know who will buy the horse. 
3d) oermuu>, toeffen ftinb er gefefjen fjar, I fancy whose child he 

has seen. 
(5$ ift ungeroifj, roem er ba$ @e(b gab, It is uncertain to whom he 

gave the money. 
3d) fragte tfjm, wen er juerfl befudjen roolle, I asked him whom he 

would visit first. 
<£.$ ift mtr gletdjguttig, roaS fur ein j?au» er gefauft tyat, It is indifferent 

to me what sort of house he has bought, 
©agen Ste mir, toaS fur 231umen rerfauft nnuben, Tell me what sort 

of flowers were sold. 

Active verbs are employed generally when the pronoun removes 
the verb to the end of the sentence. When they are used interro- 
gatively the verb is not generally removed to the end. 

g. Adverbs referring to a cause, as, roarum, roefjtjatb ; or to a place, 

as, too, roofyer, TOofnn, borr, and others, remove the verb to the 
end of the sentence when they are not employed interro- 
gatively. 

Examples. 

3d) roet£ ntd>t, roarum er mid) oermeiber, I do not know why he 
avoids me. 

<£$ ift befannt, n>e£(;atb er bie Stabt oerlteg, It is known why he left 
town. 



1 98 SYNTAX. 

£>iet tft bte ©telle, roo id) it>n fmben foil, Here is the place where I 

shall find him. 
(£$ tft una,eroi$, rooijer er fommen rottb, It is uncertain from whence 

he will come. 
Stffen ©ie, roofyin ©ie tfm ful>ren ? Do you know where you are 

leading him ? 
3c& funfcte, bort roirb er nic&t fetjn, I fear he will not be there. 

/*. The indefinite pronouns roaS and roer are followed in the second 
part of the sentence by ba$ and bet. The latter are not ex- 
pressed. 

Examples. 

$8a$ er *>erbtent, (ba&) gibt er ctuS, What he earns he spends. 
SBer (and)) fommt, (ber) mufs marten, Whoever comes must wait. 
2Ba$ 3{td)t ift, (ba$) roirb SKecbt bleiben, What is right will be always 

right. 
5Cer arm ift, (ber) fyat ©otcjen, Who is poor, he has cares. 

The indefinite pronouns ba$ and ber after roa£ and roer are em- 
ployed in the following sentences : — 

3£a*> bu md)t son Slnbetn erroarten roillft, ba$ tt>ue aurf> itmen nid)t, What 
thou dost not wish others to do to thee, so also do not to them. 

28ct$ bir nicfrt gefyort, ba$ lajfe unberiifyrt, Do not touch that which 
does not belong to you. 

?'. The verb is not removed to the end of the sentence when auxi- 
liary verbs of mood with infinitives are employed, although 
those conjunctions which are used in the beginning of the 
sentence remove the verb to the end according to the above 

rules. 

Examples. 

SBertn id) ttm fyatte fefyen roollen, fo f?dtfc id) urn oier Ul>r fommen muffen, 
If I had been willing to see him I should have been obliged 
to come at four o'clock. 

^fttemcmb jroetfelt baran, ba$ ©ie nid)t fyaben arbeiten fonnen, Nobody 
doubts that you have not been able to work. 

(£S ift naturltcf), ba$ id) ifm fyabe untetftu^en muffen, It is natural that 
I have been obliged to assist him. 

£>aS ^pferb ijt franf, ba e$ nirf)t l)at freflfen roollen, The horse is ill, be- 
cause it was not willing to eat. 

j. When urn is used as a conjunction, it always is followed by ju 
with an infinitive, and requires to be separated. 



CONSTRUCTION OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE, 1 99 

Example. 
(£r ging au$, urn ben 2lr&t ju bolen, benn feiti ftine mat fvanf, He went 
out in order to fetch the physician, for his child was ill. 

k. When compound separable verbs are employed in a sentence, the 
particles or prepositions are placed at the end of the sentence 
when the present or imperfect tenses, or the imperative mood, 
are used. 

Examples. 
3<*> gebe ben 33rtcf fogletd) ab, I will deliver the letter immediately. 
2Bit fauftcn tnele Sacfyen ein, We purchased many things. 
3ftufen <2ie ben 25oten jutucf, Call back the messenger. 

/. When conjunctions which remove the verb to the end of the 
sentence precede compound separable verbs, the particles or 
prepositions are not to be separated in the present or imper- 
fect tenses. 

Examples. 

2Bcnn cr ben 53tief fjeute abgibt, (fo) rotrb er morgen ba$ @elb etfyalten, 
If he delivers the letter to-day he will receive the money to- 
morrow. 

211$ n>ir inete ©adjen einfauften, fafjen rcit etne Wmerifanerin im Saben, 
When we purchased many things, we saw an American lady 
in the shop. 

m. When an infinitive follows compound separable verbs, the par- 
ticles or prepositions, being separated from the verb, stand im- 
mediately after the infinitive, and are not placed at the end of 
the sentence. 

Examples. 

£>te .fttnbet fangen an miibe ju metben, The children begin to become 

tired. 
<£r fyorte auf ju fpieten, He left off playing, 
gafyren <5ie fort ju fd)tetben, Continue to write (writing). 

n. When the infinitive with ju, or the participle with the augment 
ge, is employed, the particles or prepositions of compound 
separable verbs are followed by ui or ge; as, abjufefyreiben, to 
copy ; abgefrf)teiben, copied. 

Examples. 
£t roat beretr, mir nac^utfolgen, He was ready to follow me. 
So eben ftnb ibm Me ©ofboten nacbgcfolgt, The soldiers have followed 
him just now. 



200 SYNTAX. 

o. When pronouns which remove the verb to the end of the sen- 
tence are employed in the beginning of a sentence, the par- 
ticles or prepositions of compound separable verbs are not 
separated. 

Example. 

£He gtau, roeldje bte 25lumen fyetbtincjt, iff etne SBtttroe, The woman 
who brings the flowers here is a widow. 

p. The particles or prepositions of compound separable verbs are 
separated from the verb after such conjunctions as do not alter 
the construction; as, attetn, aber, benn, fonbetn, entroebet — obet, 
mbnt — nod) ; or after the following adverbs : jroar, nut, focjat, 
[ebon, faum, aud>, which do alter the construction. 

Examples. 
3d> routbe eg tfym nun facjen, attein et fommt rotebet, I should tell him 

now, but he will come again. 
(£t setfefyrcenbete We$, abet (parte ^ic^tg auf, He spent every thing, 

but spared nothing. 
St rottb nid)t ju 3fynen fommen, benn et gefyt tjeute ntcbt aus>, He will 

not come to you, for he is not going out to-day. 
St befucbte un£, unb btafyte feine ©cfyroeftet mit, He visited us, and 

brought his sister with him. 
©ie laben mid) entroebet ein, obet nefymen meine Sinlabung an, They 

will either invite me or accept my invitation. 
3Bebet et teitet auS, nod? ^t auS, fonbetn fdt>rt auS, He is neither 

riding out (on horseback), nor walking out, but driving out. 
SBeber teitet et auS, nocf) gefyt et aus, fonbetn et fdfjtt aug, unb roitb 

fef)t mube fet?n, He is neither riding out (on horseback), nor 

walking out, but driving out, and will be very tired. 
Broat tft et fTeijjig ; nut tyat et feine Steunbe, Although he is indus- 
trious, yet he has not any friends, 
©ocjat feine Steunbe famen, or ©ogat famen feine Steunbe, Even his 

friends came. 
©ebon rear et ba, ati id) fam, or St n>at febon ba 7 afe tcb fam, He was 

already there when I came, 
or, 2flg id) lam, roat et fd>on ba, When I came he was already there. 
$aum faf? et mid), fo bemerfte et aud) feinen *fteffen, or Sr fat? mid) foum, 

aU et aucb feinen flteffen bemetfte, He scarcely saw me when he 

also noticed his nephew. 
5tucb feine $teunbe ttetltej^en if>n, ate et im Unojucf roat, His friends 

also left him when he was in misfortune. 



CONSTRUCTION OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 201 

%\U er tm Ungliicf rear, tfcrliepen it?n aucb feine Sreunbe, When he was 
in misfortune his friends left him also. 

A better acquaintance with the syntax and the minutias of the 
language is best to be attained by continual and lively conversation, 
and by reading the best authors, both of which are sadly neglected 
in this country by many teachers in the metropolis. 



ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON PUNCTUATION. 

A. The points which are used when the accent is to be laid 
on the sentence are — 

2)a$ 3raa,e$eicr>i>n (?), note of interrogation ; and ba$ 21u$rufuno> 
jeicf)cn (!), note of interjection. 

When these are used, the whole of the sentence should be read as 
an interrogation or as an interjection, which is frequently neglected 
in reading. 

Examples. 

5Bte stele ©turtben roetben ©ie fyettte fytet bletben ? How many hours 

will you remain here to day? 
5Bobin finb 3bre $inbet gegangen ? or 5Bo finb 3t?re $mbet fyingegangen ? 

Where are your children gone ? 

B. Those by which sentences or periods are divided are 
called ba$ $ omnia (,); ba$ $ofon (:), (bcr £>oppelpuntY) ; 
ba$ ©emtfolon ( ; ), (or ber ©trid)punft) ; ber ^unft ( . ), (or ber 
©cfcuifjpunft). 

The above points are used in the same wayas in English, except 
ba$ $omma, ka$ £oton, and ba$ Scmifolon, the use of w r hich requires 
particular attention, as it is materially different from English. 

1. Mules and Examples for the use of the Comma. 
It shews the construction of a sentence or period minutely, and 
is applied — 

a. When one part of a sentence ends with a verb, and the other 
begins with one ; as, 

SBenn roit jufrieben finb, (fo) gebrau&en rear SEBenig, If we are con- 
tented we want little. 

3Bct rcetnt, (acbt balb roiebet, He who weeps will soon laugh 
again. 



202 SYNTAX. 

b. Before conjunctions or relative and demonstrative pronouns ; as, 

28tr gotten auf, ate mix beenbigt fatten, We left off when we had 

finished. 
3d) fefye ba$ $inb, roeld)e$ fprtd)t, I see the child who speaks. 
2)ie£ tft bcr 3fang, ben id) t?etloren fyatte, This is the ring which I 

had lost. 

c. When a relative pronoun is preceded by a demonstrative pro- 

noun, or an interrogative pronoun by a demonstrative one; as, 

£)et 23aum, rcelcber tyex flefyt, tft fefyr alt, That tree which stands here 

is very old. 
£r bead)tete ba$, rcag tcb tfym fagte, He paid attention to what I 

told him. 

d. Before any preposition which begins a part of a sentence; as, 

(£.$ roar metn 23tubet, wn bem id) fyeute etnen S&rtef crt>tett, It was my 
brother from whom I received a letter to-day. 

e. Before adverbs of time or of place, when they begin a part of a 

sentence ; as, 

3d) etfufyr, roo ex rcofynt, I learned where he lives. 
SBtflfen fie, roofytn et o,eo,ana,en ift? Do you know where he is 
gone to ? 

f. After adjectives referring to the same noun ; as, 

(£r t?etfaufte fein alteS, magereS, fcbroarjeS ^ferb, He sold his old, lean, 
black horse. 

g. After nouns referring to one verb ; as, 

<Pferbe, ©dmafe, &iu>, £>d)fen unb £unbe ftnb nufclid&e £f)tete, Horses, 
sheep, cows, oxen, and dogs are useful animals. 

h. Before infinitives which are governed by a preceding verb ; as, 

(£r bemufyte fid), feme Samilie anftanbia, ju etndfyren, He endeavoured 
to provide for his family respectably. 

/'. When a whole sentence refers to different subjects, the conjunc- 
tions unb and obex are preceded by a comma; as, 

X)ie Gutter gina, au$, unb lief fyxe $tnber ju £aufe, The mother went 

out, and left her children at home. 
(£r rctrb fommen, ober ^ie mxb fdjvetben, He will come, or she will 
write. 



PUNCTUATION. 

}. In case of apposition ; as, 

Gtcero, bet berufmtfe 3fobner, rctrb nirf>t leid)t erfefjt rcerben, Cicero, the 
flimous speaker, will not easily be replaced. 

2. Rules and Examples for the use of the Colon. 
The colon includes a greater part of tlie sentence than any other 
point except the period, (ocbtuppunft,) and is employed — 

a. After namltd), al$, rote, in explanations; as, 

g$ o,ibt funf SBetttyeile, namud>: (£uropa, Slften, Slfrtfa, 2lmettfa unb 
3mftralten, There are five parts of the world, namely, Europe, 
Asia, Africa, America and Australia. 

When those conjunctions are not employed, the comma takes 
the place of the colon. 

b. When others speak, or the words of another are referred to; as, 

£r fagte : er fev> mit bcm Marine md)t mftieben, He said he was not 

satisfied with the man. 
3d) \)hte twn tfym : bag btc ^entginn fefor franf fet>, I learned from 

him that the Queen was very ill. 

c. It is employed before conjunctions when a principal sentence 

contains a condition which is to be explained in the second 
part of the sentence; as, 

(£fretn unb £ef)tet rcenben MeS an, urn bie ^inber ju erjtefjen : bafyer 
mufien bic £inbet fTeipia, unb gefyorfam fetjn, Parents and master 
do every thing to educate the children ; therefore the children 
must be industrious and obedient. 

3. Rules and Examples for the use (tf the Semicolon. 
The semicolon is used when two thoughts, either expressed by 
single words or by a whole sentence, are not considered as being 
closely connected. 

a. It is placed between the principal and subordinate sentence, and 
before such conjunctions as do not alter the construction men- 
tioned at the end of the Syntax; as, benn, better, atfein, nur, &c. 

Example. 
3d) lann 3fynen ba$ @e(b nid>t feif?cn ; benn mem 35ruber serfangt tine 
ctyntidje ©umme, I am not able to lend you the money, for my 
brother requires a similar sum. 



204 SYNTAX. 

b. It is employed in all sentences consisting of several parts ; as, 

(Stntge 536gel bletben nut etne lurje %eit in etnem 2 anbe ; man nennt ft'e 
3ugj?6gel ; unter btefen QS&geln ft'nb toe 'iftacbttgatten, ©d>n>alben, $u= 
ftife, unb anbete ; btefe $6get jtefyen nacb mdrmcren £dnbem ; ft'e 
ttetrceiten bo. etnige 3eit; bet Stuping fdngt rctebet an; bann 
fommen btefe 5S6ge( rotebet jutucf; ft'e batten tfyte defter unb 
btuten 3unge au$, Some birds remain only a short time in 
one country : they are called birds of passage. Among 
these birds are nightingales, swallows, cuckoos, &c. Those 
birds go to warmer countries ; remain there for some time. 
When spring begins again those birds return ; they build 
their nests, and bring forth their young. 

The other points are used as in English, and need no particular 
explanation here. They are, bcr 5tpoftropf? or ba$ $ttr jung$$eid)en, ( ' ) ; 
ba$ SlnfufyrungSjeicfcen, („ ") ; ba$ 2Iu$rufuna,$jetc&en ( ! ); bie ^atenn)efe, 
toe Slammer, or ba$ £tnfcbaltttng$$etd)en ( [ ] ) ; bet ©ebanfenftrtd) ( — ). 



RULES EXPLAINING THE PREFIX tfet BEFORE VERBS. 

1. It often strengthens the meaning of the verb; as, t»etbeffetn, to 

correct; serbletben, to remain; t?etef)ten, to respect one, to pre- 
sent one with; sermelben, to inform; perfyoffen, to expect; t>er- 
fytnbern, to prevent ; serbtenben, to dazzle, to blind. 

2. It indicates motion, or destruction ; 

a. As, serleifyen, to lend, or to lend out, to grant ; serjagen, to drive 
away (transitive verbs) ; ttemnnen, to pass away (an intransi- 
tive verb). 

b. And as fetavbeiten, to consume by work ; oerbrennen, to con- 
sume by fire; serbacfen, to consume in baking, (transitive 
verbs) ; t?etbunjten or setbimften, to smoke away, to evaporate ; 
*?erf ocfyen, to consume in boiling ; pern?ad)fen, to lose by growing, 
(intransitive verbs). 

The verb tetrtnnen, to pass away, to elapse, signifies passing away 
of time and of things ; as, semnnen, to run off or out. 

3. It indicates killing or dying. 

a. As, ttergiften, to kill by poison, (transitive verb). 

b. And as tfetbuvften, to die by thirst; i?etf)ttngern, to die by star- 
vation; pcrfommen, to starve, to go to ruin; tterfcf>mad)ten, to 
languish, (intransitive verbs). 



THE PREFIX vcr. 205 

4. It attaches the meaning of deviating from, or losing the way, to 

the verb, both moral and physical; as, rerbrefcen, to distort; 
cerfufjrcn, to corrupt, to transport ; fid) t>ergef)en, to commit a 
fault; t>crgef)cn, to pass away; ft'cf) jjerfprecfcen, to promise 
marriage, to make a mistake in speaking; r-evfafyren, to proceed, 
to manage ; fid) tferfafyren, to drive the wrong way. 

Examples. 

(Moral) <£t wrbtef>t bie $3orte bet beiligen ©cbrift, He distorts the 
words of scripture. 

(Physical) ©ic t>evb»rel;te ben 9Ung, She bent the ring. 

(Moral) ©d)terf)tc @efe((frf>aft rerfu^rt un$, Bad company cor- 
rupts us. 

(Physical) Sic ttetfufyrten tfyre ©liter, They transported their goods. 

(Moral) (£r retting ftd>, He committed a fault. 

(Physical) £>ie ?3eit t>erget)t, Time passes away. 

(Moral) <£t fyat (id) mfprod)en, He has promised marriage. 

(Physical) ©ie tterfptad) fief) oft, She often made a mistake in 
speaking. 

(Moral) (£r fyat ntd)t gut nut mtt wrfafyren, He has not proceeded 
well with me. 

(Moral) <St t)at mit bem ©elbe fd)(ed)t retfafjren, He has managed 
badly with the money. 

(Physical) JDer ^utfetjet fyat fid) mfafyren, The coachman has been 
driving a wrong way. 

5. It indicates injury to any thing by doing too much ; as, vcv- 

faljen, to spoil by salting, to embitter, (transitive verb). 

Examples. 
(Physical) £)te $ed)tnn fyctt bie ©uppe rerfaljen, The cook has spoiled 

the soup by salting. 
(Moral) (£t t)dt mir ba$ $ergnugen perfaljen or rerborben, He has 

embittered my pleasure. 

6. It implies securing any thing ; as, mbdmmen, to dam up ; rer= 

cuttern, to lattice; uerfeiten, to plug up ; mforfen, to cork up ; 
ttetpfdfylen, to empale ; rerfteben, to lute ; wrtammeln, to block 
up; wrrennen, to stop one's passage; fid) revrennen, to run 
wrong; wrfonben, to cover with sand. 

Examples. 

(Physical) (£t ?ermad)te bie SBaaren gut, He procured the goods 
well. 



206 SYNTAX. 

(Moral) £>a$ 9)Ubcben t>etmad)t ft'rf) fef>r, That girl pretends much. 
(Moral) (Et ttettennt mit ben SBeo,, He stops my passage. 
(Physical) £)a$ ^pfetb fyat ftd) serrennf, The horse has run wrong. 
(Physical) £)et ©dttnet ttetfanbete bie 2Mument6pfe, The gardener 
covered the flower-pots with sand. 

7. It signifies that two things are combined in one ; as, setbtelen, 

to cover with boards ; setftlbern, to cover with silver, to plate, 
to pawn ; t>etfof)len, to sole ; mjtnnen, to cover with tin. 

Examples. 
(Physical) (£t ttetfttbette ba$ $upfer, He covered the copper with 

silver. 
(Physical) (£t mftlberte feme Ufyr, He pawned his watch. 
(Moral) 3cb setftlberfe tfym bie jpdnbe, I bribed him. 

8. It refers to the uniting of persons or things ; as, ftd) wtbtnben, 

to connect, to unite one's self; uetftecbfen, to entwine; t>er= 
mtipfen, to combine, to join ; t?erfetten, to chain together ; t>er= 
fdjmeljen, to melt together, to consume by melting, (transitive 
verbs) ; ttetfcfymeljen, to be melted together (intransitive verb). 

9. It shews that a thing is made of something, or that it exists by 

itself; as, mfofyten, to carbonize; ttetftetnetn, to petrify; t»er= 
gottetn, to deify, to adore ; uerbunfeln, to darken ; tterbtmnen, to 
thin, to dilute; t>erbtcfen, to thicken; perbretfacfyen, to triple, 
(transitive verbs); fetatmen, to grow poor; ttetftummen, to grow 
crooked, malten, to grow old; »etbletd)en, to grow pale, to 
expire. 

10. It refers to the replacing or delaying of a thing ; as, setfafyren, 
to bring one conveyance to another; serpflanjen, to replant; 
t?etfef?en, to remove ; t>etfd)teben, to delay ; t>ettucfen, to move 
out of its place. 

The prefix jet signifies destruction of a thing whenever used. 

VERBS COMPOUNDED WITH PREPOSITIONS AND ADVERBS. 

a. ab, an, auf, au$, bet, butd?, etn (in), nut, nacb, ubet, um, nntet, Mr, 

&u — fasten. 

b. fytn, fyet, roea,, sorbet, jutucf, (o$, jufammcn — gefyen. 



( 207 ) 

THE EXERCISES. 

Principal rules: 
The verb fjaben governs the accusative case. Infinitives and past 
participles are placed at the end, except, when an infinitive follows 
the participle, the latter precedes the former. 

SJBir rcetben eine grope ©efettfcfyaft fyabcn, We shall have a large party. 
£)ie Dame fyat pafynfrfmierjen Qefyabt, The lady has had toothache. 
(£r f)Ctt 9ftiif)e gefyabr, micf) ju ftnben, He has had trouble to find me. 

SpaUn, to have. (p. 70.) 

They should have more sense. The gardener has success this 
year. Many people have too many children. I have not had any 
time. The carpenter will have four fine tables. Let us have con- 
fidence. The wealthy niece has had influence and friends. The 
foreigners will have admirers. Have they had work? Have 
courage. Thou wilt have had perseverance. The tradesman would 
have customers. We have had no peace. These women have had 
no shelter. They had a spaniel. The subjects will have the pri- 
vilege. The builders would have had the advantage. 

Sense, 3Setftanb, m. ; success, (£tfotg, m. ; people, Scute, m. or f. ; 
carpenter, jSimmetmann ; confidence, jSut-erficbt, f. ; wealthy, roof)(= 
tjabenb ; niece, 'D'hote ; influence, (Sinffajj, m. ; foreigners, 9lu$lanber, 
m. ; admirers, 53eref)rev, m. ; work, Sltbett, f. ; courage, Oftun), m ; 
perseverance, 25efyatrltd)Fett, f. ; tradesman, jpanbrcerfer, m. ; cus- 
tomer, $unbe, m. ; peace, 3uifye, f. ; woman, %tau, f. ; shelter, 
Dbbctd), n. ; spaniel, ^ubet, m.; subject, Untertfyan, m. ; privilege, 
53orred)t, n. ; builder, SDaumeifter, m. ; advantage, <Bottfyetl, m. 

Principal rule: 

The verb fctjn governs the nominative case. 
(Sepn, to be. (p. 72.) 

We shall soon be in London. Let us be cheerful. I have not 
been very well. Have you been in Germany ? Why were you 
not there ? You would be very kind. We should have been rich 
merchants. The performer was an American. You are not angry. 
Be diligent. They were never satisfied. Thou hast been a good 
companion. Times have been better. He would have been atten- 
tive. Let them be indulgent and peaceful. It is not well. The 
English are generous and benevolent. 

Cheerful, frfylid) ; why, rc-atum ; there, ba ; kind, guttg ; mer- 
chants, ftctufTeute ; performer, (5d)au(pteler m. ; diligent, fleitftg ; 



208 EXERCISES. 

satisfied, jufrieben ; companion, ©efeflfc&after, m. ; times, bie ^eiten, 
f. ; attentive, aufmerffam ; indulgent, nacfyftcfotig ; peaceful, friebfertig ; 
well, gut ; the English, bie (Engldnbet, m. or f. ; generous, ftetgebig ; 
benevolent, rcofylrcottenb. 

Principal rule : 

The verb rcerben governs the nominative case. 
SBetben, to become, (p. 74.) 

The brothers have become enemies. The Turk will become a 
neighbour of mine. The wild Indians have become Christians. 
She grows old. The huntsman became a poor man. The pond 
has become deeper. The duck became useful. The eggs become 
dear. Innkeepers have often become beggars. She will become 
a bride. We became adventurers. You have become Godfather. 
Let him become an artist. The powder would have become dan- 
gerous. The manuscripts will have become valuable. Let him 
become a dyer. 

A neighbour of mine, mem 'iftacfybat, m. ; she grows, fie rcirb ; 
huntsman, 3dger, m. ; pond, Steicfc, m. ; deeper, ttefer ; eggs, bie 
<£ier, n. ; innkeepers, ©aftrctttfje, m. ; adventurers, 5lbenteuret, m. ; 
Godfather, @e»attet, m. ; manuscripts, jpctnbfcfyriften, f. ; valuable, 
roertfywH, dyer, barber, m. 

Principal rule : 

When the personal pronoun or the noun does not begin a sen- 
tence, the verb precedes them ; which is called the inverted 
position. 

9hm fyctt er @etb, Now he has money. 

$otigen SBintet roctten ©ie in Stalien, Last winter you were in Italy. 

£)iefen 3Ibenb roetbe id>reid) roerben, This evening I shall become rich. 
The preceding verbs in an inverted position. 

Next Friday I shall have visitors. Now I am tired. Probably 
they have become cautious. Many months ago the old lady had 
much company. Perhaps the laundress has become impatient. 
At present the weather is fine. The day after to-morrow I shall 
be at home. A short time since you have become much more 
punctual. Here I am. To-morrow I shall have time. 

Next, ndd)ften ; visitors, SSefud), m. 5 probably, roafyrfdjemltd) ; many 
months ago, sot tneten $)Ronaten ; at present, je$t ; fine, fd)6n ; the 
day after to-morrow, ubermorgen ; at home, ju £>aufe ; a short time 
since, feit einet ftirjen Sett ; much more punctual, *uel punWidjer. 



EXERCISES. 209 

THE REGULAR ACTIVE VERB. (p. 75.) 

Principal rule. 
I work, I do work, I am working, is expressed in German l>y 

3$ arbette, I work. 
I worked, I did work, I was working, is expressed by tcf) axbci.-- 

tete, I worked. 
I have worked, I have been working, is expressed by id) babe 

Qeaxbeitet, I have worked. 

The verbs I do or I am with the present participle are never 
used in connection with another verb. 

We shall admire the beauties of nature. The brave sailor should 
sail many (a) thousand miles. The parents of the disobedient 
children are acting prudently. They did fear the enemy. He 
hated his adversary. I have fulfilled my duties. He did not care 
for business. A good horseman would have managed his horse. 
The Russians will pay the money. Let him wait. The old sol- 
dier has killed many enemies. I would rather refuse pleasure than 
duty. The discoverer of this island will relate the history of his 
life. The unfortunate man has failed in business. They will refuse 
our invitation. He will tell the truth. I have been working day 
and night. He has finished his work. 

Of nature, bee Iftatut, f. ; many (a) thousand miles, tnelc taufenb 
Sfteilen ; are acting (act), fyanbeln ; they did fear (they feared), ftc 
futd)teten ; his adversary, feinen ©ecjncr ; to manage, bdnbtgen ; 
rather, Ueber ; than, aU ; the history of his life, fctne 2cbcn^cje(d)tditc ; 
has failed in business, fyat gefefytt; to tell, fagen ; I have been work- 
ing, ich babe gearbeitet ; to finish, beenbtgen. 

THE REGULAR PASSIVE VERB. (p. 77.) 

The young artist was admired. The good workmen are 
wanted. Your key will be fetched. The beggar was pursued. They 
were accused. The warriors will be killed. Ten thieves would 
have been captured. The breakfast had been prepared. The law- 
yers will be separated. The letters would have been opened. 
Their voices were heard. You are praised and esteemed. The 
poor have been assisted. The house will be sold. We were 
punished. The child has been baptized. 

Are wanted, n>erben gefucbt ; the lawyers, hie Untcrgeuteannxtfte ; 
their voices, ibrc ©timmen ; assisted, unfcrjh'Ujt. 



210 EXERCISES. 

PERSONAL PRONOUNS. (p. 59.) 

I have heard him, but I did not hear her. You looked pale. She 
did not observe us. I advised her, you, and them. We wished 
them hearty farewell. She is at church, and you and they will also 
go there. They will not find her. Where has he been so long? 
I can neither find him nor them. We shall leave it to them or to 
her. He will visit him, me, us, and you. Lend me (mit) a thaler. 
I shall forgive (it) you. Where am I ? 

Looked, fctf)en=auS ; to observe, beobac^ten ; hearty farewell, ein 
&erjU<$e$ 2eben>of)l ; at church, in bet ^ttcbe ; there, bafnn ; to leave, 
ttbetlajTen ; to visit, befucfyen ; to forgive, eg wtcjeben. 

The pronoun e$, it, 
takes the gender of the noun which precedes it, and is only used in 
German when a noun is of the neuter gender. 

Is the town large ? I find it very small. Did you see my collar ? 
It is not here. Where is it ? Bring me the ribband. Here it is. 
It is here. Is this silk blue ? It is green. Is it dear ? No, it is 
cheap. Shew me the hat. It is not here. Where is it? It is in the 
room. I have lost my purse. Who has found it ? It was yellow. 

Town, &tabt, f.; large, cjto£ ; very small, fefyr fletn; collar, $tct= 
cjen, m. ; ribband, 25cmb, n. ; silk, ©eibe, f. ; cheap, n>ot)(fet( ; to 
shew, jetcjen ; lost, wttoten $ purse, ©elbbeutet, m. 

The pronoun eS, it, is employed as an indefinite pronoun — 

1 . When the expression there is is employed in English, and does 

not refer to place, but to existence ; e$ gtebt is used for the sin- 
gular and plural in German ; as, 

&$ gtebt in btefem Safyt ml $£ein, There is much wine this year. 
<£& cjtebt tnele ctrme £eute, There are many poor people. 

2. When the adverb there refers to place and not to existence,' the 

pronoun e$ is employed in German, followed by bet or fyter; as, 

(£$ ift ein $ftctnn bet, There is a man. 

(£& ftnb Jipevten fyiet, There are gentlemen. 

3. When in English the words they are, or are they, are used with 

the present or other tenses, es? ftnb, or ftnb e£, is used in German, 
when referring to existence ; as, 

<£$ ftnb 3fyre ©cfnffe unb feme ©djaafe, They are your ships and 

his sheep, 
©tnb e$ 9utfTen obet ©pamer ? Are they Russians or Spaniards ? 



EXERCISES. 211 

There is only one moon and one sun. There are Turks, Rus- 
sians, Swedes, and Italians. There are also Frenchmen and Poles. 
There is somebody at the door. There i> a slave who wishes to 
see his master. There are two Turkish ladies in the room. Are 
they young ladies ? How many are there ? There are six of them. 
What kind of flowers are those ? They are roses and forget-me- 
not. They are beautiful. 

Moon, «JRonb, m. ; sun, (Sonne, f. ; somebody, 3>?>nanb, m. or f. ; 
slave, ©c(a»e, m. ; who wishes, roelcfrer rounfc&t ; what kind of flowers ? 
m$ fur a^lumcn ? those, ba$ or etf ; forget-me-not, flSergijjmcinntdH. 

CONJUNCTIVE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. (p. 61.) 

Our friend will soon come back. I have seen your litttle girls. 
His garden is attached to her house. Their views differ. Her 
friend possessed formerly her property. His cousin knows my 
brothers and their nephew. Is it your or their business? Our 
neighbours have sold their horses. Thou hast spent thy money. It 
is his duty. His partner has paid your account. 

To come back, gurueffommen ; is attached to, Uegt an (tf>vcm) ; 
views, %tfid)ten, f. ; differ, finb t>erfd)teben ; possessed, befajj ; knows, 
fennt ; spent, auSgegeben ; duty, <pfftc&t, f. ; partner, Stfceilnefymer, m. ; 
account, 3M>nung, £ 

ABSOLUTE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. (p. 62.) 

Your hearth is not so strong as mine, but it will not be as expen- 
sive as his. The seat is neither yours nor hers. My grandson is 
not as young as yours, but he is as clever as hers. Was it your 
bird ? No ; it was not yours, but mine. My uncles are poorer 
than yours and his. That property is mine, and not thine. That 
stool is theirs, and not hers. The ox was mine, and not his. These 
hats are mine, thine, and his. 

Hearth, jperb, m. ; strong, ftarf ; as expensive, fo theuer ; seat, 
©effet, m. ; grandson, (£nfel, m. ; poorer, drmer ; property, 33ermogen, 
n. ; stool, ©tufyldjen, n. ; these hats, bteft? Xputc. 

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. (p. 64.) 

This is the huntsman. This is my whip. This is her ribband. 
These are their birds. Are these your plants ? Whose picture is 
this ? Whose shillings are these ? This pond is very deep. This 
pear was too dear. This castle is not old. These rabbits are white. 
Are these candles good ? This water is clear. This horse-dealer is 

p2 



212 EXERCISES. 

very rich. This room is small. Here are two apricots, try this 
(one). Such a noise is disagreeable. This is the same carriage. 
This kind of string will be too strong. Such a ringing of bells is 
unpleasant. That basin is full. Those irons were hot. 

Huntsman, 3dget, m. ; whip, ^eitfc^e, f. ; ribband, 23anb, n. ; birds, 
*8&ge(, m. ; plants, ^fTonjcn, f. ; picture, @cmd(be, n. ; pond, Stetcfc, m. ; 
pear, SSirne, f. ; rabbits, .ftcmincben, n. ; horse-dealer, ^fetbefydnbtet; m. ; 
to try, wrfud>en ; such a noise, ein folcfycS ©etdufd? ; this kind (of) 
biefe 21tt ; such a ringing of bells, ein folcfyeS ©elctute. 

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS FOLLOWED BY RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

That cold bath (which) I have taken just now has agreed with 
me. That governess (whom) I have seen to-day is agreeable, but 
proud. That pupil (whom) you have instructed a week ago is nine 
years of age. That paper which I bought a few months ago is 
bad. Those gentlemen of whom you spoke so often have arrived 
from Spain. Here are those flowers (which) you have bought for 
me in the market. That foreigner whose sister you have heard 
yesterday is now dead. Give your money to those who are in 
want of it. 

Has agreed with me, ijt mir juttdgtid) geroefen ; a week ago, wt 
einer SBocfye ; a few months ago, sot etnigen Wlonakn ; have arrived, 
ftnb cmgefommen; from, au$; in the market, auf bem Wlatfte; to 
those who, benen, roelcfce ; to be in want of it, e$ notf)ig fyaben. 

RELATIVE PRONOUNS. (p. 66.) 

Here is the money which I owe you, and the coat which you 
have lent me. Our niece, who will go to Italy, is not married. 
His father, who is at Rome, is very benevolent. The man whom 
you have seen is the American ambassador. The flowers (which) 
I bought are red. Have you seen the houses which were burnt 
down yesterday ? Where is the butterfly which I admire so much ? 

To owe, fdmlbig fet)n ; lent, geliefyen ; to, na$ ; benevolent, mof)(tf)d= 
tig ; the American ambassador, bet amerifcmifdje ©cfanbte ; butterfly, 
©cfcmetterUng, m. ; so much, fo fef>t. 

INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. (p. 68.) 

Who is there ? Who has done that and what will be the conse- 
quence? What shall I give you? What will you say? To 
whom have you given the cloak? Who will answer for it? 
Whose handwriting is this ? Of whom have you heard it ? Whom 



EXERCISES. 213 

did you like best? With whom do you live? Which is your 
handkerchief? Which are your children ? What shall we do ? 
What he has said is true. Of what is the cake made? Whv (to 
what end) do you use that cane ? 

There, ka; consequence, S'ol^, £> shall, fo(( ; cloak, Wlantel, in.; 
to answer for it, e$ mantrcorien ; did you like best, moducn Sic am 
ttebften ; with whom, bci n>cm ; to live, rcofmen ; which is, rcclc&etf ift ; 
which are, meltyS ftnb ; of what, moron ; why, rooju. 

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. (p. G9.) 

Somebody wishes to speak to me. Is nobody here? There has 
been nobody here yet. Everybody is now at home. There are a 
very few who are contented. Many others have done it. Do you 
know any one in London? I have seen no one, but to-morrow J 
shall meet with many. There is the man whom all admire! 
Have you paid some money this morning ? Have you heard any- 
body ? I did hear somebody ? Every one cares for himself first. 
Did she say any thing ? She said nothing. Each of them carries 
a table. He tried every thing. He believed it. They gave him 
bread. They wish me success. They employed him. 

To me, mtt mir ; there has, e*> ift ; there are, e£ cuebt ; a very few, 
nut SBcntge ; many others, tuele Slnbete ; to meet with many, $3iele 
fefyen ; all, Wie ; (some) money, @elb ; every one, 3?bet ; for himself, 
flit ftcb felbjt ; each of them, Seber or 3*?be son u)nen ; they, man ; 
success, Srfolg, m. 

numbers, (p. 53 — 58.) 

One volume contains ninety-two pages. Twenty-seven boys 
were playing on the property of one of my tenants. All the seven 
workmen shall be employed, except one. Thirty thousand thalers 
have been coined during the reign of one of the last kings of 
Prussia. The one inn is more patronized than twelve of the first 
hotels. The disobedient son was not allowed to live in one house 
with two of his cousins. Twenty-one adventurers have received 
more kindness than three of their friends could afford, and the 
twenty-first behaved badly. The fortune of nine of my friends has 
been divided among the first noblemen of the land. That one thou- 
sand is to be given to the ten thousand poor. In the year one thou- 
sand eight hundred and fifteen the battle at Waterloo was fought. 
The ten united themselves to destroy the two. The daughter of the 
Elector was about twelve or fourteen years old. The one piece of 



214 EXERCISES. 

land is sixty-four feet long. On the twentieth of this month her 
thirty-first birthday will be celebrated. Firstly, we shall proceed 
with our business; and secondly, we will give an account of it. 
I have been at the watering place an hour and a half, and have 
spent the fourth part of my fortune. That field produces fourfold 
more than thirty-three can gain by hard labour. The ninth part 
of the people have been deprived of their homes. 

To contain, ftarf fct>n ; on the property, ouf bem Stgent^um, n. • 
tenants, sjJUetfcfeute ; except one, (£tnet auSgenommen ; of one, etneS ; 
of Prussia, j?on *preupen ; inn, 2BtrtMau$, n. ; was not allowed, burfte 
ntdjt ; with two of his cousins, mtt feinen jroet 33ettetn ; to afford, 
tetften ; behaved, bettug fid) ; among, untet (accus.) ; is to be given, 
foH gegeben roetben; fought, geliefert; about, ungefdfyr; celebrated, 
gefeiett ; to proceed, fovtfafyren ; an account, 9vecf>enfrf>aff, f. ; of it, 
batton ; at the watering place, an bem 35abebtt ; fourfold, $termal ; to 
gain, erubrtgen ; by, burcfy ; of the people, bet (Stnroofyner ; have been 
deprived of their homes, fyaben fyu ©coming tferloren. 

INDEFINITE NUMBERS. 

Every one will find difficulties to satisfy others. Everybody 
should endeavour to be happy. Each of your sheep is worth a 
great sum of money. That old paper is still of some value. I 
shall give you half as much for the trowsers as they are worth. 
All Spain and the half of Russia are armed. All nations live in 
peace. This tin is mixed with nothing but lead. Yesterday I re- 
ceived no good news. None of the apples were good. He has 
lost all his money. He is not to be found in all Paris. They have 
sold many kinds of silk. I have frequently been ill. 

To satify, ju entfytecben ; should endeavour, fottfe ftcb beffreben ; of 
money, ©elbeS ; still of some value, nod) son eintgem SBertfye, nod) <&iwa$ 
rcertfy; all Spain, @an§ ©panten ; the half of Russia, fyalb 3tujjfanb ; 
nothing but, 9?tcbt$ aU ; none, feinet ; all his, fetn ganjeS ; he is not 
to be found, 9ftan fann ifm nic^t fmben ; in all, in ganj ; kinds of, 
bitten con. 

THE AUXILIARY VERBS OF MOOD. (p. 78.) 

1. Safien, to let, to permit. 

The schoolmaster permits the first boy to go out. Do not per- 
mit them to have more liberty. I have permitted her to walk with 
the children. We have permitted our gardener to sell the flowers. 



EXERCISES. 215 

Let her come here. Will you permit me to dine with you ? I 
shall not permit him to play. 

2. gftuffen, to be obliged, (p. 80.) 
You must do your work better. They have been obliged to go 
away. I shall be obliged to give up my business in a month. We 
should have been obliged to get into debt if we had not been very 
sparing. Thou wilt be obliged to leave when he is coming. I was 
obliged to yield to him. 

To get into debt, in ©cfyutben ejevatfjen ; very sparing, fefyr fpctrfam ; 
to leave, roegjugefyen ; to yield to him, tbm nad>jugeben. 

3. @otten, to be compelled, (p. 81.) 
They shall hear the music. All shall be prepared for death. 
You should give him a card of admission. The company has been 
compelled to pay your debts. The rich ought to have assisted the 
poor. You shall work. You ought to have mentioned it. 

4. SSotfen, to be willing, (p. 82.) 
Are you willing to rise early this morning ? The general was 
willing to lose his life. Our friends have (had) been willing to 
take the child. I wished to stay at home. I will not go with you. 
What will you do ? 

5. IDiirfen, to dare, to be allowed, (p. 83.) 
Where am I allowed to put the umbrella? The stranger will 
have been allowed to join that evening party. The young officers 
have been allowed to remain at the castle for eight weeks. The 
artists were not allowed to appear before the king. You are not 
allowed to speak. Here is no smoking allowed. Wherefore are 
you not allowed to play ? 

Where, roofytn ; to join that evening party, bee 5l&cnb<jefeflfd>aft betju 
roofynen ; at, auf ; for eight weeks, ad)t 2Bod)cn ; to appear, erfc&cinen ; 
is no smoking allowed, barf man ntaSt raucfyen. 

6. $6nncn, to be able. (p. 85.) 
The rich are not always able to assist. I shall have been able to 
finish the outside of the building in a fortnight. The publicans 
were not able to sell any good porter. Are you able to see ? The 
Russian count will not be able to depart. I might perhaps be able 
to do you some service. I might have been able to save some 
money. He is able to walk ten miles a day. 



216 EXERCISES. 

The rich, bie 3let$en ; the outside, bie Slupenfette, f. 5 in a fortnight, 
in tner jefm £agen ; not any, fetnen ; to do, erroetfen ; some service, 
einen £)tenft ; some money, etn>a$ @elb ; a day, beS £age$. 

7. s»%n, to like. (p. 86.) 

I like a swan better than a wild goose. The young ladies liked 
their own dresses best. The birds would like to be released from 
their cages. Germans like England and English habits. Should 
you like to go with me home ? 

Better, iiebet ; best, am beflen ; would like, molten gern ; from 
their cages, au$ ifyren ^dftc^en ; Germans, bie £)eutfd)en ; habits, ©tt= 
ten ; should you like, medjten ©ie gern ; home, nad) Jjaufe. 

IRREGULAR VERBS. (p. 87.) 

First Class, (p. 88.) 
The candle was burning. He has brought good news. They 
will think of me. He does not know the stranger. They called 
me a miser. The ambassador sends me letters every week. He 
knew not who I was. Did you know it ? 

Second Class, (p. 88.) 
Command him to do it. The duchess commanded him to write 
to me. He has begun his work. She considered a long time 
about it. The valet tied the monkey to the chair. They will ask 
me for silver. I am threshing every evening. The servants have 
eaten too much meat. A thaler is worth three shillings. They 
have come too early. That coin does not sound. They were read- 
ing the newspapers. I have been singing an Italian song. Where 
has he been sitting ? My grandson died last night. He met me 
at the ball. They will never forget me. The wine-merchant 
forced me to drink wine. 

Third Class, (p. 92.) 
We remained at the hotel. She roasted the goose very well. 
The tailor kept his word. They were running through the flames. 
You rub your hands. He has advised me. The children called 
their father. To whom did you write ? He spit into my face. 
Will you pardon me ? Would you have remained here ? They 
will keep the money. 

Fourth Class, (p. 93.) 
Be more studious. The horse bit the groom. He resembles 



EXERCISES. 217 

his parents. He seized the bird. The coat is hanging behind the 
door. He suffered many years. I have been riding through the 
park. Do you grind scissars well? Cut four slices of bread. 
They have quarrelled for two hours. I shall not withdraw. 

Groom, (Sta((fnecf)t ; his parents, feinen (£ltem ; scissars, bie Scbcc^ 
ren ; slices, ©dmitten, f. ; for two hours, jtwi ©tunben. 

Fifth Class, (p. 94.) 

My dog barks at night. He has bent the spoon. The fire was 
extinguished. The brave soldier fights for his country. The 
pigeon was flying into the fields. The beer has fermented enough. 
The serpent is creeping very fast. The servant-girl was milking 
the white cow. The flower smells very strong. The shepherd 
was shearing the sheep. He shoots a hare every week. The snow 
was melting. His leg will swell. He has lost his situation. The 
meat weighs twenty pounds. 

At night, beS Wafytt ; spoon, 26ffel, m. ; into the fields, ctuf bct£ 
getb ; very fast, fefyt fcfmett ; servant-girl, £)ienffrndb<f>en, n. ; situation, 
©telle, f. 

Sixth Class, (p. 97.) 

The gentleman hired three servant- men for two months. They 
drive to London every Thursday. The man struck the woman. 
Those workmen were swearing. Split the wood into two pieces. 
That donkey carries a heavy load. You have grown much. He 
washes his hands and his face. 

Servant-men, 23ebtenten, m. $ for, ctuf ; workmen, SlrbeitSleute, m. ; 
much, fefyr ; face, @eftd)f, n. 

NEUTER OR INTRANSITIVE VERBS. (p. 98.) 

I have been waiting here for ten minutes. The sick sat before 
the street-door of the physician. We met him in the front of the 
house. Did you sleep last night ? Do not cry too loud. The 
visitors will soon awake. Children tell the truth. The policeman 
was standing behind the thief. One soldier was fighting with two 
enemies. They went from one place to another. Go home. 

Street-door, jpauStfyur, f. ; physician, %jt; in the front of the, oor 
bem ; from one place to another, eon etnem Orte jum cmbetn. 

REFLECTIVE VERBS. (p. 102.) 

I wonder to see you again. How are you to-day? When did 
he lay down? She wa< in a hurry. The farmer will be mistaken. 



£18 EXERCISES. 

I have inquired after them. I should lose myself in the darkness 
of the night. The count places himself at the head of the conspi- 
racy. Who could call himself happy before the hour of death ? 
They had sacrificed themselves for their country. He will distin- 
guish himself. Many have ruined themselves. 

I wonder, id) rounbre micb ; How are you ? 5Bte beftnben ©ie fid) ? 
to lay down, ft'd) ntebevkcjen ; to be in a hurry, fid? etten ; to be mis- 
taken, ftcf> irren; to inquire, ficf> ethmbtcjen ; to lose oneself, fkh t?er= 
lieren ; to place oneself, fid) ffetfen ; at the, an bit ; to call oneself, fid) 
nennen ; to sacrifice oneself, |td> cmfopfern ; to distinguish oneself, fid) 
au£$etd)n<m ; to ruin oneself, fid) ju ©tunbe ridjten. 

IMPERSONAL VERBS. (p. 105.) 

It has been raining (for) several hours, and I fear it will freeze 
shortly. It was thawing when I went out, and on my return it 
had been hailing and lightning. It will snow when (the) thunder 
ceases. I was thirsty on account of a fever which I had had for 
many weeks. It appears to me as if I should never meet you 
again. There are no grapes sweeter than those which come from 
Italy. There was much fighting and quarrelling. The question 
is, whether the foreign princes will arrive in time for the races. It 
will certainly occur. It dawns at four o'clock in the morning. 

To fear, furcfyten ; shortly, bctlb ; to go out, auSgefjen ; on my re- 
turn, bet metnet £RucfFcf?r ; to cease, auffyoren ; on account of, rcegen 
(gen.) ; it appears, eS fcbeint ; to meet you, nut 3fynen sufamrmmtreffen ; 
there are, eS finb or e$ gtebt ; there was much fighting and quarrel- 
ling, eS rourbe ml gefocfyten unb Cjeftrttten ; the question has been, e$ 
fra^t fief) ; it will occur, e$ roirb fief) eretcjnen ; in the, ke$. 

COMPOUND INSEPARABLE VERBS. (p. 106.) 

I have invented a new instrument. Did you notice her dress ? 
To-day I received two letters. Will you answer them? Our 
neighbour has spent a large fortune. I have broken three looking- 
glasses. I shall pay for them. They would have neglected your 
business. That has caused me much grief. Do not destroy the 
book. What do you expect from me ? 

To notice, beacfjten ; her dress, ifyren 5fnjug ; to receive, etfjatten or 
empfangen ; to answer, beantwotten ; to spend, t>erfd)rcenben ; to break, 
jctbrccben ; for them, bafur ; much grief, tnelen Summer ; to destroy, 
jevntcf)tcn ; to expect, evwatten. 



EXERCISES. 219 

COMPOUND SEPARABLE VERBS. (p. 107.) 

Send away this parcel immediately. The ambassador did not 
arrive sooner than myself. The messengers brought back the 
newspapers, and went away soon with provisions. Fetch back that 
person who ran away with the carpets. My brother-in-law went 
out this morning at five o'clock, and gave, up all hope of seeing his 
dying uncle. The matter was cleared up. I did not go out on 
purpose. He has not come back yet. They have attacked the 
enemy. He began to cough. They will take their friends along. 
We arrived at nine. How do you pass away your time ? I dress 
myself twice a-day. 

Than myself, ati id) ; with provisions, mit Sebettfmitteln ; brother- 
in-law, ©cfcroaget ; dying, ftevbenb ; matter, ©cute, f. ; was cleared 
up, rourbe aufeeftdrt ; on purpose, mit gfeifi ; to pass away, uibringen ; 
twice a-day, jroeimat be$ Staged. 

ADVERBS OF TIME. (p. 113.) 

Now he is sleeping. Let us go now. We have just now r re- 
ceived a letter from America. Will you speak to him already ? 
You have purchased lately many things. Formerly you often tra- 
velled together. Hitherto he has endeavoured to be kind to me. 
To-morrow we shall not visit anybody. The day after to-morrow 
we shall go hunting. He will return a week hence. Afterwards 
I told him to visit me. He w T ill soon be at home. They spoke to 
me frequently. She occasionally visits me. The court of justice 
has existed. I have often said that you are happy. At present I 
am engaged. 

ADVERBS OF PLACE. (p. 114.) 

Where shall I find you this evening. There he is working. 
Come hither. We went thither. You had better stop here. It 
is not far from my house. Are they up stairs or down stairs 
(above or below r ) ? He is not to be seen anywhere. He has friends 
everywhere. 

You had better, ©ie fottten (icber ; up stairs, oben ; down stairs, uru 
ten ; not anywhere, ntrgenbS ; everywhere, aUentbatben. 

ADVERBS OF NUMBER, ORDER, AND REPITITION. (p. 115.) 

Let us consider first, and then act. The physician visited the 
sick three times a-day. The servant told him again that I am 
waiting. He is never alone (by himself). 



220 EXERCISES. 

ADVERBS OF QUALIFICATION. (p. 115.) 

They have done it badly. She instantly denied that the con- 
spiracy had been known to her. You may easily imagine that his 
expenses greatly exceed his income. The matter has actually 
ended for the best. My brother has justly suffered his punishment. 

To be known to her, tfyr befcmnt fet>n ; you may imagine, ©te f 6n= 
nen ftrf> benfen ; greatly, bei roettem ; to end for the best, jum 25eften 
ctuSf alien. 

ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION. (p. 116.) 

I really can say that I am surprised. I am indeed rejoiced that 
you have given up travelling. Surely you might have finished 
that business a few days ago. You have without any doubt exa- 
mined the prisoner, and he consequently has confessed. By all 
means he will return to-morrow. 

Surprised, etftaunt; travelling, ba$ 3tetfen; you might have 
finished, ©ie fatten beenbigen fatten ; by all means, alfetbtngS, a,an$ 



ADVERBS OF NEGATION. (p. 116.) 

Do not leave me in the time of trouble. The case is by no means 
lost. My books are neither here nor there. I am not at all satis- 
fied with my work. 

In the time, jur >3ett ; of trouble, bee £rubfale ; case, (Sctcfye, f. 

ADVERBS OF DOUBT. (p. 117.) 

Perhaps you will allow me to go with you to your aunt ? Very 
likely he was mistaken. You might perchance come here again. 

Very likely, roafytfcfyeinltd) ; might, fonnten ; perchance, jufdlliger 
SSeife. 

ADVERBS OF COMPARISON. (p. 117.) 

They all looked like dead persons. We have as much money 
as we want. He has acted exactly as if he were his guardian and 
benefactor. As sure as I am alive they have stolen our fowls. 
How can you compare them to such persons! If that colour 
were even as dark as this it would not please. He has in this 
manner lost his money. He speaks (as) if he were a Member of 
Parliament. 

Like, nxe ; as much, fa mel ; exactly as if, Qttabc fa ate wenn ; as 
sure as I am alive, fa uoafyv trf> lebe ; to such, nut fallen. 



EXERCISES. 221 

MIXED PREPOSITIONS. (p. 119.) 

You should do it for the sake of (aus) friendship. Out of town 
stands a house which belongs to me. Instead of my coachman, 
you shall drive me. I have learned (o,ef)6rt) it from the merchant. 
Since the arrival of a friend of mine (metne£ ftreunbes) I am of a 
different (wrfcbtebencr) opinion. All ladies are friendly towards him 
(a,eo,en inn). By virtue of his situation he is able to do it. Opposite 
to the church (bet ^ttcfye gegenuber) lives a baker. The mountain 
seemed to rise (ftd> ju erfyeben) above the clouds. I am the whole 
day about (bet) him. They were walking about (umber) in the 
room. It was about (um) the same time when he came. We were 
walking together after (nacb bem) supper. After an absence of three 
years I returned in health (gefunb). These landscapes are painted 
after the most celebrated painters. He took up arms against him 
with the intention of killing (ui tobten) him. It is against my duty. 
That village is situated opposite the town. We went along the 
(tangS bcr) sea-shore. I have seen all towns along (an) the Baltic. 
Remain with (bei) us. I shall go with (nut) you. Provide your- 
self (rerfefyen <5ie fid)) with an umbrella. In the midst of (mitten in) 
his devotions he died. Amidst (roifyrenb) this confusion he shewed 
courage. The inn stands in the middle of the (mitten im) forest. 
The town lies at the foot of the mountain. He lives with ((£r trofmt 
bei) his father. He found them at play (beim ©piel). We walked 
through a beautiful avenue. I generally go to bed at eleven o'clock. 
He rose before daylight. They were fighting in front of the (vox 
ber) fortification. He has the advantage of (per) many others. 
The clergyman (^rebiger) lives in the back of the church (Winter ber 
$itd>e). He went behind the carriage. There is your writing-desk 
beneath (unter) the table. He was smoking below (unter) the bal- 
cony. It would be beneath (unter) your dignity. The girl is 
occupied down (unten) in the cellar. His gun was hanging beside 
him. There are many cherries beside these (aupet btefen). Beside 
you, nobody thinks so. Between these houses are fields and gar- 
dens. Many things may happen between to-day and to-morrow 
(*>on fyeute bi£ morgen). Put those papers between (ace.) the books. 
My property lies beyond the forest and the lake. This is (£)tefeS 
gefyt) beyond (ubet, ace.) my comprehension. The town beyond 
(jenfeitS) the river has been besieged by (burd)) the enemy. He went 
beyond (ubet — fyinauS) n ^ s order OBotfdptift). Take the horse by (an, 
dat.) the reins. Take an example of (an, dat.) him. He died by 
(burd)) the sword. He is a nobleman by (son) birth. He was fight- 



222 EXERCISES. 

ing for honour and right. They will die for (au£) want of (an) 
employment. I shall go to Germany for the (jut) recovery of my 
health. I shall invite her only for (auf, ace.) three weeks. I shall 
visit your brother for your sake (3f)retrcea,en). I do not care (3d) 
frage 9Ud)t$) for (nad)) him. The ship was bound for (nad)) London. 
Shall I hear from you? She spoke of (*>on) me. He concealed it 
from (t?or) me. They did it from (auS) avarice. From time to time 
I receive letters from him. He treated me in (auf, ace.) a friendly 
manner. I find great advantage in it (babet). In (au$) contempt 
of (cjegen) him I shall destroy these letters. It terminated in (ju) 
his favour. He lived in my house. He was introduced into my 
family. He inquired into the (nad) ber) matter. My castle lies 
near (nafye an, dat.) the town. His likeness is hanging near (neben) 
the door. A man of (t>on) bad character is capable to (fur) bad 
deeds. I am always thinking of (an, ace.) you. He complains of 
(itber, ace.) his idleness. His horse is blind of (an, dat.) one eye. 
This wine tastes of (nacb) the cask. Of (oor, dat.) all things do 
that first. He died of (t>or) hunger. He retired from (son) the 
stage. He trod on (auf, ace.) my foot. The binder sent me the 
books on (am) Monday. I have compassion on (mit) him. On 
(bet) my return I did not find him at home. It is made on (nacb) a 
new plan. A carpet lay spread on (uber, dat.) the floor. This 
(XHefeS) is quite out of (au$ ber) fashion. Put the stockings out of 
(jut) sight. He leaped over the bridge. They walked round the 
town-hall (urn ba$ SRat^auS fyerum). This is the second year since his 
death. He rushed through the flames. I am accustomed to (an) 
frugality. I shall do it out of (au$) kindness to (cjegen) you. He 
always turned his eyes to (auf, ace.) her. He is related to (mit) 
him. Let us go to work (anS 583er!). 

CONJUNCTIONS. (p. 137.) 

When I came to London I went out in order (um) to see the 
Queen and Prince (ben ^rtnjen) Albert. Whilst my neighbour 
was sleeping I was working (arbeitete id>). He lent me his gun 
that I might shoot a partridge and a pheasant. I took my pistol 
in order to shoot the mad dog. As I am obliged to go to London, 
I spoke to him before. Before I go home I shall buy a new 
stick. I went home after having bought (nacbbem id) gefaufr fyatte) a 
pair of shoes. It is indifferent to me whether Mr. A. is coming or 
not. Although I only drink water I am still in health (gefunb). 
I was ill ; still (bennod)) I went out driving (fufyt td> au$). It is fine 



EXERCISES. >>..) 

weather, therefore I shall take a walk into the fields (auf ba& $elb). 
If(n>enn) that be (tft) the case I shall be glad. We hoped, but 
(allein) it was in vain. He sought his sister, but (abet) he did not 
find her. Be silent until he speaks. I caution you, in order that 
(bamit) you may be more sparing. He has a family, therefore 
(barum) I shall not dismiss him. He is young; on the other hand 
(fyingecjen) she is old. No sooner (faum) was I at home, than I been me 
ill. Not only herself (fie), but also her friends (Sreunbtnncn) came 
to me. Since (fettbcm) he is dead I have no friends. 



WILLIAM WATTS, CROWN COURT, TEMPLE BAR. 



0* 



1830 



'.WATERSTRir,' 



;j!!i!!i;!!f:!!;iii!V!ij:!!'!!:i 



i!i ; i;!!!iii!i!!i;!JJIii!i 



